Release Notes for - SAP · 3 SCM Supply Chain Management 1 3.1 Roles in SCM (Changed) 1 3.2 Structure Changes in SAP Reference IMG for SCM 5.0 1 3.3 SCM-CA SCM Cross-Application Components

Release Notes for SAP Supply Chain Management Release SAP SCM 5.0

______________________________________________________________

CopyrightCopyright(c) 2006SAP AG. All rights reserved.

Neither this document nor any part of it may be copied or reproduced in any form or by anymeans or translated into another language, without the prior consent of SAP AG. Theinformation contained in this document is subject to change without notice.

SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG.

All other products which are mentioned in this documentation are registered or not registeredtrademarks of their respective companies.

3 SCM Supply Chain Management 13.1 Roles in SCM (Changed) 13.2 Structure Changes in SAP Reference IMG for SCM 5.0 13.3 SCM-CA SCM Cross-Application Components 23.3.1 SCM-CA-PER SCM Performance Cross-Application 23.3.1.1 APO Performance Monitor (new) 23.4 SCM-APO Advanced Planning and Optimization 33.4.1 Structural Changes to the IMG of SAP APO 33.4.2 SCM-APO-CA APO Cross-Application Components 103.4.2.1 SCM-APO-CA-CDP Characteristics-Dependent Planning 103.4.2.1.1 Functions in Block Planning (Enhanced) 103.4.2.1.2 Block Planning in the DS Planning Board (Enhanced) 113.4.2.1.3 Checks for Consistency Comparison in liveCache and APO Database (New) 133.4.2.1.4 Copy Configuration Data from Sales Order to Planned Order 133.4.2.2 SCM-APO-CA-COP Collaborative Planning 143.4.2.2.1 Collaborative Planning: User Settings and Shuffler (New) 143.4.2.2.2 Transportation Tendering (Enhanced) 143.4.3 SCM-APO-MD Master Data 153.4.3.1 Master Data Enhancement with the Easy Enhancement Workbench (New) 153.4.3.2 Master Data Locking Concept (new) 163.4.3.3 SCM-APO-MD-LO Location 183.4.3.3.1 Integration of Shipping Points (New) 183.4.3.3.2 TP/VS-Specific Resources in the Location Master (Enhanced) 193.4.3.4 SCM-APO-MD-PR Product 193.4.3.4.1 Alternative Product Number (Enhanced) 193.4.3.4.2 Inheritance of Product Master Attributes (New) 203.4.3.4.3 Product Groups (New) 203.4.3.4.4 Transportation Lanes for Product Groups (Enhanced) 213.4.3.4.5 Consideration of Minimum Safety Stock (New) 213.4.3.5 SCM-APO-MD-INC Product and Location Interchangeability 223.4.3.5.1 Master Data for Location Interchangeability (New) 223.4.3.5.2 Master Data for Product Interchangeability (Enhanced) 233.4.3.6 SCM-APO-MD-RE Resource 253.4.3.6.1 Resources: Logging Changes 253.4.3.6.2 Resources: Improved Shift Maintenance in Capacity Profile (Enhanced) 263.4.3.7 SCM-APO-MD-TL Transportation Lanes 263.4.3.7.1 Product Groups (New) 263.4.3.7.2 Transportation Lanes for Product Groups (Enhanced) 27

______________________________________________________________SAP AG iii

Release-Informationen Inhaltsverzeichnis SAP AG______________________________________________________________

3.4.3.7.3 Means of Transport (Enhanced) 273.4.3.8 SCM-APO-MD-PDS Production Data Structure 283.4.3.8.1 Enhancements to the PDS: Template PDS (New), Push Production (New), BAdIs 283.4.3.8.2 Heuristic and Consistency Check for the Production Data Structure (PDS) (New) 293.4.4 SCM-APO-VS Vehicle Scheduling 303.4.4.1 BAdIs for Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (Enhanced) 303.4.4.2 Conditions (Enhanced) 313.4.4.3 Consolidation (Enhanced) 323.4.4.4 Schedule Heuristic Run in the Background (New) 323.4.4.5 Transportation Tendering (Enhanced) 333.4.4.6 New Shipment Structure (Enhanced) 333.4.4.7 Order Split Based on Freight Units (Enhanced) 343.4.4.8 Use of Transportation Zones in Transshipment Hierarchies (New) 363.4.4.9 Creation of Shipments Without Vehicle Resource (New) 363.4.4.10 SCM-APO-VS-RG Routing Guide Planning 363.4.4.10.1 Dynamic Route Determination (New) 363.4.4.11 SCM-APO-VS-BF Basic Functions 383.4.4.11.1 Definition of Customer-Specific Alerts (New) 383.4.4.11.2 Overriding the Ship-To Address (New) 393.4.4.11.3 Control of Scheduling ERP Shipments in liveCache (New) 393.4.4.11.4 Planning Based on Shipping Points (New) 403.4.4.11.5 Means of Transport (Enhanced) 413.4.4.12 SCM-APO-VS-OPT Vehicle Scheduling Optimization 413.4.4.12.1 Cost Profile (Enhanced) 413.4.4.12.2 Optimization Profile (Enhanced) 423.4.4.12.3 TP/VS-Specific Resources in the Location Master (Enhanced) 433.4.4.13 SCM-APO-VS-INS Interactive VS 433.4.4.13.1 New Fields in Interactive Planning (New) 433.4.4.13.2 Optimization (Enhanced) 443.4.4.13.3 Manual Overloading of Resources (New) 443.4.4.14 SCM-APO-VS-CAS Selection of Transportation Service Provider 453.4.4.14.1 Transportation Service Provider Selection (Enhanced) 453.4.4.15 SCM-APO-VS-MAP Integration 463.4.4.15.1 Control Rules (New) 463.4.5 SCM-APO-SNP Supply Network Planning (SNP) 473.4.5.1 Aggregated Planning (Enhanced) 47

______________________________________________________________SAP AG iv


3.4.5.2 SNP Heuristic: Direct Delivery (New) 483.4.5.3 Parallel Processing Profile (Enhanced) 493.4.5.4 SNP Heuristic: Consideration of the Resource Calendar (New) 503.4.5.5 Consideration of the Goods Receipt Processing Time (Changed) 503.4.5.6 SCM-APO-SNP-OPT SNP Plan Optimization 513.4.5.6.1 Consideration of Scheduled and Deallocated PP/DS Planned Orders (Changed) 513.4.5.6.2 Explanation Tool and Result Indicators for Optimization Results (New) 523.4.5.6.3 Automatic Cost Generation for SNP and Deployment Optimizer (new) 533.4.5.7 SCM-APO-SNP-INS Interactive SNP 543.4.5.7.1 Reference of a Key Figure to a Variable Planning Version (Enhanced) 543.4.5.8 SCM-APO-SNP-DPL Deployment 543.4.5.8.1 Consideration of Demand at the Source Location (Enhanced) 543.4.5.8.2 Explanation Tool and Result Indicators for Optimization Results (New) 553.4.5.9 SCM-APO-SNP-TLB Transport Load Builder 563.4.5.9.1 Interactive TLB Planning (Enhanced) 563.4.5.10 SCM-APO-SNP-SFT Safety Stock Planning 573.4.5.10.1 Extended Safety Stock Planning (Enhanced) 573.4.5.11 SCM-APO-SNP-CAP Capacity Leveling 593.4.5.11.1 Consideration of Scheduled and Deallocated PP/DS Planned Orders (Changed) 593.4.5.11.2 Capacity Leveling: Consideration of Alternative Resources (Enhanced) 593.4.6 SCM-APO-SDM Multilevel Supply & Demand Matching 603.4.6.1 SCM-APO-SDM-CTM Capable-to-Match 603.4.6.1.1 Aggregated Planning with Capable-to-Match (New) 603.4.6.1.2 Explanation Function and Results Indicators in Capable-to-Match (New) 613.4.6.1.3 Capable-to-Match (CTM) (Enhanced) 613.4.6.1.4 Build Up Safety Stock in CTM (Enhanced) 633.4.7 SCM-APO-FCS Demand Planning 643.4.7.1 Key Figure Properties for DP Planning Areas (Enhanced) 643.4.7.2 BI Authorization Concept in Demand Planning (DP) 653.4.7.3 Change Mode for Key Figures (New) 663.4.7.4 Demand Combination (New) 673.4.7.5 Combined Forecast (Enhanced) 683.4.7.6 Forecast Horizon and History Horizon (Changed) 693.4.7.7 Data Realignment of InfoCubes in Demand Planning (DP)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG v


(Enhanced) 693.4.7.8 Uploading Data to Demand Planning (New) 703.4.7.9 Locking Logic in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced) 703.4.7.10 MacroBuilder in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced) 713.4.7.11 Time-Based Demand Distribution (New) 723.4.7.12 TSDM Data in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced) 723.4.7.13 Differentiation of Initial Values and 0 Values (New) 733.4.7.14 SCM-APO-FCS-SEA Seasonal Planning 743.4.7.14.1 Seasonal Planning (New) 743.4.8 SCM-APO-SPP Service Parts Planning 743.4.8.1 Service Parts Planning (New) 743.4.9 SCM-APO-PPS Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling 763.4.9.1 Project Manufacturing and Make-to-Order Manufacturing (Enhanced) 763.4.9.2 BAPI for Production Planning Run (New) 803.4.9.3 Characteristics-Dependent Planning: Reorganization (New) 803.4.9.4 Changes to Header Quantity for Released Manufacturing Orders (Changed) 813.4.9.5 CTP and Multilevel ATP Check (Enhanced) 823.4.9.6 Underdelivery Tolerance in Net Requirements Calculation 843.4.9.7 Withdrawal from Alternative Plant (New) 843.4.9.8 PP/DS Horizon: Field Extended to 4 Places 863.4.9.9 Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly (New) 863.4.9.10 Production Planning Run (Enhanced) 873.4.9.11 Integration of PP/DS Processes in BI Process Chains (New) 873.4.9.12 Consider Assembly Scrap for Make-to-Order Production (Changed) 883.4.9.13 Simulation Version: Change when Calling (Enhanced) 883.4.9.14 SCM-APO-PPS-PPT Product Planning Table 893.4.9.14.1 Changes in the Product Planning Table (Changed) 893.4.9.14.2 Flag Processed Products in Planning (Enhanced) 903.4.9.15 SCM-APO-PPS-DST Detailed Scheduling Planning Board 903.4.9.15.1 Project Manufacturing and Make-to-Order Manufacturing (Enhanced) 903.4.9.15.2 Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Object Selection (Enhanced) 943.4.9.15.3 Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Menu Path Changed (New) 953.4.9.15.4 Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Changes to the User Interface (Enhanced) 953.4.9.16 SCM-APO-PPS-PVW Product View 97

______________________________________________________________SAP AG vi


3.4.9.16.1 Changes in the Product Planning Table (Changed) 973.4.9.16.2 Flag Processed Products in Planning (Enhanced) 983.4.9.16.3 Product View: Enhanced Table Display (Enhanced) 993.4.9.16.4 Pegging Structure: Display Alerts and Sort Function (New) 1003.4.9.16.5 Visualization Profiles for Characteristics 1013.4.9.17 SCM-APO-PPS-POV Product Overview 1013.4.9.17.1 Flag Processed Products in Planning (Enhanced) 1013.4.9.18 SCM-APO-PPS-SCF Scheduling Functions 1023.4.9.18.1 Create/Delete Fixing and Planning Intervals (New) 1023.4.9.18.2 Setup Matrix (Enhanced) 1033.4.9.18.3 Strategy Profile (Enhanced) 1063.4.9.19 SCM-APO-PPS-FP Fixed Pegging 1073.4.9.19.1 Fixed Pegging in Backorder Processing (New) 1073.4.9.19.2 CTP and Multilevel ATP Check (Enhanced) 1083.4.9.19.3 Planning Procedure for Fixed Pegging (Enhanced) 1103.4.9.19.4 Fixed Pegging in the ATP and CTP Process (Enhanced) 1113.4.9.20 SCM-APO-PPS-LPP Length-Based Planning 1133.4.9.20.1 Cutting Receipts (Changed) 1133.4.9.20.2 Length Plan 1133.4.9.20.3 Consideration of Length Allowances for Operation Durations 1143.4.9.21 SCM-APO-PPS-MMP Model Mix Planning 1143.4.9.21.1 Model Mix Planning (Enhanced) 1143.4.9.22 SCM-APO-PPS-RPM Planning Matrix 1173.4.9.22.1 Rapid Planning Matrix (Enhanced) 1173.4.9.23 SCM-APO-PPS-HEU Heuristics 1193.4.9.23.1 Capacity-Driven Order Creation (New) 1193.4.9.23.2 Create/Delete Fixing and Planning Intervals (New) 1203.4.9.23.3 PP/DS Heuristics (Enhanced) 1203.4.9.23.4 Enhanced Backward Scheduling (New) 1223.4.9.24 SCM-APO-PPS-RPT Resource Planning Table 1223.4.9.24.1 Detailed Scheduling: Resource Planning Table (New) 1223.4.10 SCM-APO-ATP Global Available-to-Promise 1233.4.10.1 SCM-APO-ATP-BF Basic Functions 1233.4.10.1.1 Advice Code (new) 1233.4.10.2 SCM-APO-ATP-RND Rounding 1243.4.10.2.1 Rounding (New) 1243.4.10.3 SCM-APO-ATP-PSS Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock 1253.4.10.3.1 Parameter-dependent ATP safety stock (new) 1253.4.10.4 SCM-APO-ATP-PRD ATP in Conjunction With Production 1253.4.10.4.1 Availability Check for Kits (new) 1253.4.10.4.2 CTP and Multilevel ATP Check (Enhanced) 1263.4.10.4.3 Fixed Pegging in the ATP and CTP Process (Enhanced) 128

______________________________________________________________SAP AG vii


3.4.10.5 SCM-APO-ATP-SCH Time and Scheduling Functions 1303.4.10.5.1 Using Dynamic Route Determination (new) 1303.4.10.5.2 Transportation and Shipment Scheduling (Extended) 1313.4.10.6 SCM-APO-ATP-RBA Rules-Based ATP Check 1323.4.10.6.1 Quantity conversion with various BUoMs (new) 1323.4.10.6.2 Consolidation Location (new) 1323.4.10.6.3 External Exclusions (new) 1333.4.10.6.4 Substitutions from the Product InC and Location InC Master Data (New) 1333.4.10.6.5 Multi-Item Single Delivery Location (new) 1343.4.10.6.6 Maximum Number of Substitutions in Rules (enhanced) 1343.4.10.6.7 Override Input Location (new) 1353.4.10.6.8 Preselection of Appropriate Substitutions (new) 1353.4.10.6.9 Rule Type (enhanced) 1363.4.10.6.10 Rule strategy (enhanced) 1363.4.10.6.11 Rule Strategy Sequence (New) 1373.4.10.6.12 Validity of Exclusions of an Exclusive Rule (New) 1383.4.10.6.13 Validity Periods for Substitutions (New) 1383.4.10.7 SCM-APO-ATP-BOP Backorder Processing 1393.4.10.7.1 Backorder processing (enhanced) 1393.4.10.8 SCM-APO-ATP-ODL Order Due List 1403.4.10.8.1 Order Due Lists (new) 1403.4.10.9 SCM-APO-ATP-EQA Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (EDQA) 1403.4.10.9.1 Event-driven quantity assignment (new) 1403.4.10.10 SCM-APO-ATP-TPO Third-Party Order Processing 1413.4.10.10.1 Third-Party By Source Determination and Product Allocation (New) 1413.4.11 SCM-APO-OPT Optimization 1423.4.11.1 SCM-APO-OPT-PPS Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling 1423.4.11.1.1 Underdelivery Tolerance in Net Requirements Calculation 1423.4.11.1.2 Explanation Log (New) 1423.4.11.1.3 PP/DS Optimization (Enhanced) 1433.4.11.1.4 Optimization Profile (Enhanced) 1453.4.11.2 SCM-APO-OPT-SNP Supply Network Planning 1483.4.11.2.1 Explanation Tool and Result Indicators for Optimization Results (New) 1483.4.11.2.2 Automatic Cost Generation for SNP and Deployment Optimizer (new) 1493.4.12 SCM-APO-CPR Collaborative Procurement 150

______________________________________________________________SAP AG viii


3.4.12.1 SCM-APO-CPR-SCH Procurement Scheduling Agreement 1503.4.12.1.1 Enhancements in the Procurement Scheduling Agreement (New) 1503.4.13 SCM-APO-INT Interfaces 1513.4.13.1 Saving and Deleting CIF Cockpit Performance Data (New) 1513.4.13.2 Collaborative Planning: Displaying Alerts Using Integrated ITS (New) 1513.4.13.3 SCM-APO-INT-EXT Interface to External Systems 1523.4.13.3.1 Business and Interface Objects and BAPI Methods (Changed) 1523.4.13.3.2 Collaborative Planning: Logging Function (changed) 1553.4.13.4 SCM-APO-INT-MD Master Data 1563.4.13.4.1 Integration of Shipping Points (New) 1563.4.13.5 SCM-APO-INT-STK Stock 1563.4.13.5.1 Integration of Stocks (Changed) 1563.4.13.6 SCM-APO-INT-PPS PP/DS - Production Process Order 1573.4.13.6.1 Changes to Header Quantity for Released Manufacturing Orders (Changed) 1573.4.13.7 SCM-APO-INT-RP Requirements Planning/Planned Order 1583.4.13.7.1 Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly (New) 1583.4.13.8 SCM-APO-INT-PUR Purchasing/Purchase Requisition, Purch. Order, Stock Transfer 1593.4.13.8.1 Integration of Stock Transport Orders (Enhanced) 1593.4.13.9 SCM-APO-INT-CCR CIF Compare/Reconcile 1603.4.13.9.1 CIF Comparison/Reconciliation: Processing of Change Pointers (New) 1603.4.13.9.2 Parallel Processing in the CIF Comparison/Reconciliation (New) 1613.4.14 SCM-APO-LCA SCM liveCache Applications 1613.4.14.1 Checks for Consistency Comparison in liveCache and APO Database (New) 1613.5 SCM-BAS SCM Basis 1623.5.1 Structural Changes in IMG for SCM Basis 1623.5.2 SCM-BAS-AMO Alert Monitor 1643.5.2.1 Alert Types: Changes 1643.5.2.2 New Features in Alert Monitor (New) 1663.5.2.3 Adoption of Selections in Alert Profiles After Upgrade (New) 1673.5.3 SCM-BAS-PAK Packing Basics 1673.5.3.1 Packaging specification (enhanced) 1673.5.3.2 Packaging specification determination (new) 1683.5.4 SCM-BAS-MD Master Data 1693.5.4.1 Master Data Locking Concept (new) 1693.6 SCM-EWM Extended Warehouse Management 1713.6.1 Extended Warehouse Management (new) 171

______________________________________________________________SAP AG ix


3.6.2 SCM-EWM-TM Transportation Management 1763.6.2.1 Structural Changes in IMG for SAP SCM in the Area of Transportation 1763.7 SCM-ECT Execution 1773.7.1 Structural Changes in IMG for SAP SCM in the Area of Execution 1773.8 SCM-EM Event Management 1773.8.1 Visibility Processes in SAP Event Management (Extended) 1773.8.2 Structure Changes in IMG for SAP EM 1783.8.3 SCM-EM-MGR Event Manager 1793.8.3.1 SCM-EM-MGR-ISQ Information System and Queries 1793.8.3.1.1 Connection to Document Flow (New) 1793.8.3.1.2 Web Interface (Enhanced) 1803.8.3.2 SCM-EM-MGR-EVP Event Processing 1823.8.3.2.1 Connection to the Alert Framework (Enhanced) 1823.8.3.3 SCM-EM-MGR-CON Control Processing 1823.8.3.3.1 Activate Seasonal Procurement Process (New) 1823.8.3.3.2 Connection to Document Flow (New) 1833.8.3.4 SCM-EM-MGR-ADM Administration 1843.8.3.4.1 Archiving and Deletion in Event Management (Enhanced) 1843.8.3.4.2 Change Documents (New) 1853.8.3.4.3 Dynamic Assignment of a URL to Alert Framework (Enhanced) 1863.8.3.4.4 Activate Seasonal Procurement Process (New) 1863.8.3.4.5 Authorization Concept for Event Handler Display (Enhanced) 1873.8.3.4.6 Connection to Document Flow (New) 1873.9 SCM-FRE Forecasting and Replenishment 1883.9.1 Exception Workbench (Enhanced) 1883.9.2 F&R Dispatcher (New) 1893.9.3 Replenishment Workbench (Enhanced) 1903.9.4 F&R Interfaces (Enhanced) 1913.9.5 F&R Interfaces (New) 1923.9.6 F&R Optimization Process (Enhanced) 1923.9.7 Consumption Data for SAP F&R (New) 1933.9.8 SCM-FRE-MD Master Data 1943.9.8.1 Business Week Definition (New) 1943.9.8.2 F&R Master Data (New) 1953.9.8.3 Product Type Identifier for Inbound Products (New) 1963.9.9 SCM-FRE-REF References 1963.9.9.1 Reference (Enhanced) 1963.9.10 SCM-FRE-CPF Collaborative Planning, Forecasting and Replenishment 197

______________________________________________________________SAP AG x


3.9.10.1 Collaborative Planning Forecasting and Replenishment (New) 1973.9.11 SCM-FRE-IF Interfaces 1983.9.11.1 Product Type Identifier for Inbound Products (New) 1983.9.12 SCM-FRE-DIF Demand Influencing Factor 1993.9.12.1 Weighting Profile DIF Type (New) 1993.9.13 SCM-FRE-SUI Replenishment Workbench for Stores 2003.9.13.1 Replenishment Workbench for Stores (Enhanced) 2003.10 SCM-ICH Inventory Collaboration Hub 2013.10.1 cFolders Integration 2013.10.2 Structural Changes in the IMG for ICH 2023.10.3 Scenario Control (New) 2043.10.4 Visible Products and Locations (Enhanced) 2053.10.5 XI Content for SAP SCM Basis (Changed) 2073.10.6 SCM-ICH-MD Master Data 2083.10.6.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New) 2083.10.7 SCM-ICH-REL Scheduling Agreement Release 2103.10.7.1 Confirmation Control (new) 2103.10.7.2 Due Schedule Lines (Enhanced) 2113.10.7.3 Goods Recipient View (New) 2123.10.7.4 Deviating Recipient of Ordered Products (New) 2133.10.7.5 Data in Release Processing (New) 2153.10.7.6 Functions in Release Processing (Enhanced) 2173.10.7.7 Receipts/Requirements List (New) 2183.10.7.8 Extended Confirmation Management (New) 2193.10.7.9 Scheduling Agreement Confirmations (New) 2203.10.7.10 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2213.10.8 SCM-ICH-PO Purchase Order 2223.10.8.1 Confirmation Control (new) 2223.10.8.2 Due Schedule Lines (Enhanced) 2233.10.8.3 Goods Recipient View (New) 2243.10.8.4 Confirmation Approval (New) 2253.10.8.5 Changeability of Purchase Order Items (New) 2263.10.8.6 Update of Goods Receipt Data (Enhanced) 2273.10.8.7 Notes (New) 2283.10.8.8 Data in Purchase Order Collaboration (New) 2293.10.8.9 Functions in Purchase Order Collaboration (New and Changed) 2303.10.8.10 Processes and Process Types in Purchase Order Collaboration (Changed) 2313.10.8.11 Scheduling in Purchase Orders (Changed) 2323.10.8.12 Sending Purchase Orders to the Customer Back-End System (Changed) 2323.10.8.13 Web User Interface for Purchase Orders (Enhanced) 233

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xi


3.10.8.14 Validation Checks for Purchase Orders (New) 2343.10.8.15 Deviating Recipient of Ordered Products (New) 2353.10.8.16 Receipts/Requirements List (New) 2373.10.8.17 Extended Confirmation Management (New) 2373.10.8.18 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2393.10.9 SCM-ICH-ASN Advanced Shipping Notification 2393.10.9.1 Data in ASN Processing (New) 2393.10.9.2 External ASN Validation in Service Parts Management (New) 2403.10.9.3 Functions in ASN Processing (Enhanced) 2413.10.9.4 Packaging Specification (Enhanced) 2433.10.9.5 Confirmation Control (new) 2453.10.9.6 Due Schedule Lines (Enhanced) 2453.10.9.7 Goods Recipient View (New) 2473.10.9.8 Deviating Recipient of Ordered Products (New) 2483.10.9.9 Receipts/Requirements List (New) 2503.10.9.10 Serial Numbers (New) 2503.10.9.11 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2513.10.10 SCM-ICH-RET Returns 2523.10.10.1 Goods Recipient View (New) 2523.10.10.2 Deviating Recipient of Ordered Products (New) 2523.10.10.3 Returns in Service Parts Management (New) 2553.10.10.4 Serial Numbers (New) 2553.10.10.5 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2563.10.11 SCM-ICH-IMO Inventory Monitor 2573.10.11.1 SMI Monitor (Enhanced) 2573.10.11.2 Generation of Inventory Alerts for SMI (Changed) 2583.10.11.3 Delivery Control Monitor (New) 2583.10.11.4 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2593.10.12 SCM-ICH-KNB Kanban 2603.10.12.1 Kanban (New) 2603.10.12.2 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2613.10.13 SCM-ICH-SNI Supply Network Inventory 2623.10.13.1 SNI Monitor (New) 2623.10.13.2 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2633.10.14 SCM-ICH-SCO Supplier Confirmations 2633.10.14.1 Confirmation Control (new) 2633.10.14.2 Receipts/Requirements List (New) 2643.10.14.3 Extended Confirmation Management (New) 2653.10.14.4 Scheduling Agreement Confirmations (New) 2663.10.14.5 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2673.10.15 SCM-ICH-FCS Forecast 268

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xii


3.10.15.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New) 2683.10.15.2 Key Figure Selection (New) 2703.10.16 SCM-ICH-NDC Net Requirements Calculation 2703.10.16.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New) 2703.10.16.2 Key Figure Selection (New) 2723.10.16.3 Consideration of Minimum Safety Stock (New) 2723.10.17 SCM-ICH-PRO Promotion Planning 2733.10.17.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New) 2733.10.17.2 Key Figure Selection (New) 2753.10.17.3 Cannibalization Effect of Promotions (New) 2753.10.17.4 Comparison of Promotions (New) 2763.10.17.5 Complex Shipping Units (New) 2763.10.17.6 Interchangeability in RR (New) 2773.10.17.7 Activity Status "Introduction" (Enhanced) 2773.10.17.8 Post Promotion Dip (New) 2783.10.17.9 Percentage Promotion (New) 2783.10.17.10 Usability in PP (Enhanced) 2793.10.17.11 Usability in RR (Enhanced) 2793.10.18 SCM-ICH-DIO Inbound/Outbound Data Processing 2803.10.18.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New) 2803.10.18.2 Addresses (Enhanced) 2823.10.18.3 Logical Business Partner Role in ICH (Enhanced) 2833.10.18.4 Process Type Definition (Enhanced) 2843.10.18.5 Time Stamp Format of Outbound Messages (Enhanced) 2843.10.18.6 Validation Framework (Enhanced) 2853.10.18.7 Deviating Recipient of Ordered Products (New) 2863.10.19 SCM-ICH-AMO Alert Monitor 2883.10.19.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New) 2883.10.19.2 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced) 2903.10.20 SCM-ICH-ERP ERP-ICH Integration (ERP Only) 2913.10.20.1 Kanban Master Data Transfer to SAP ICH (new) 2913.10.20.2 Data Transfer for Contract Manufacturing (New) 2913.10.20.3 Transfer of Requirements and Stock to SAP ICH (extended) 292

______________________________________________________________SAP AG xiii


3 SCM Supply Chain Management

3.1 Roles in SCM (Changed)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, a number of new and modified roles are available. For more information about theseroles, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management -> Roles.

3.2 Structure Changes in SAP Reference IMG for SCM 5.0

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 the implementation guide (IMG) structure of SAP Supply Chain Management (SAPSCM) has changed.

If structure changes were made in the SAP reference IMG, you will find the corresponding Release Notesin the individual IMG areas. To find these Release Notes, proceed as follows:

1. Call the entire list for SCM 5.0.

2. Search the list for the expression Structure.

3. To find further entries, continue the search.

Below are the changes and main structure Release Notes:

- The component Extended Warehouse Management (SCM-EWM) was added.You can find the IMG activities for this component in the IMG under Extended WarehouseManagement .

- Structure changes in IMG for SAP APO

- Structure changes in IMG for SCM Basis

- Structure changes in IMG for SAP SCM in the Execution area

- Structure changes in IMG for SAP EM

- Structure changes in IMG for ICH

To include these changes in the project IMGs, you must generate the project IMGs anew.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 1

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.3 SCM-CA SCM Cross-Application Components

3.3.1 SCM-CA-PER SCM Performance Cross-Application

3.3.1.1 APO Performance Monitor (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the APO Performance Monitor is available to you for analyzing and monitoringperformance in SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO). The APO Performance Monitorcollects general and performance-relevant data for individual applications, and displays this in the form ofoverviews. You can use these overviews for example to determine the performance behavior during aplanning run, or the direction in which the performance is tending towards across multiple planning runs.Since you are given detailed information about the individual phases of a planning run, you are able tolocate any existing performance problems quickly.

You can use the APO Performance Monitor to fulfill the following tasks:

- Performance analysis for demand planningThe system displays the following overviews:

- Planning Area Overview

- Statistics: Mass Processing

- Statistics: Calculation of Proportional Factors

- Performance analysis for Supply Network Planning (SNP)The system displays the following overviews:

- Statistics: SNP Optimizer

- Statistics: SNP Heuristic

- Performance analysis for Multilevel Supply and Demand Matching (SDM)The system displays the following overviews:

- Statistics: CTM Planning Run

- Performance analysis for Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS)The system displays the following overviews:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 2

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Statistics: PP/DS Optimizer

- Performance analysis for Global Available-to-Promise (ATP)The system displays the following overviews:

- Backorder processing

To delete performance data at regular intervals, a deletion program is also available for you to use.

You can the APO Performance Monitor from the SAP menu, under SCM Basis -> PerformanceMonitor -> APO Performance Monitor. From here, you can call the different overviews for theperformance analysis.

3.4 SCM-APO Advanced Planning and Optimization

3.4.1 Structural Changes to the IMG of SAP APO

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the structure of the Implementation Guide (IMG) of SAP APO has changed. Youmust regenerate the project IMGs to transfer these changes.

Deleted IMG Activities

- IMG for Master DataAll the IMG activities under Master Data -> Model and Version Management -> BusinessAdd-Ins for the Planning Version Copy have been deleted and replaced by two new ones (seeNew IMG Activities).

- IMG for Vehicle Scheduling

- Define Dimensions/Units

- Maintain TSP Profile

- IMG for Demand Planning (DP)The IMG activity Maintain Customer-Specific Macros under Enhancements has been deleted.

New IMG Activities

- IMG for Master Data

- Master Data -> Classification and Configuration -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) forClassification and Configuration -> BAdI: Additional Customer-Specific Checks forOM17

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 3

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Master Data -> Product -> Product Groups -> Define Product Group Types

- Master Data -> Product -> Product Groups -> Define Product Groups

- Master Data-> Product -> Maintain Alternative Product Number Type

- Master Data-> Product -> Define Replenishment Indicator

- Master Data -> Product -> Define ABC Indicator

- Master Data -> Resource -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Resources -> BlockPlanning

- Master Data -> Transportation Lane -> Maintain Transportation Mode

- Master Data -> Model and Version Management -> Business Add-Ins for the PlanningVersion Copy -> BAdI: Deactivate CIF Before Copying Planning Version

- Master Data -> Model and Version Management -> Business Add-Ins for the PlanningVersion Copy -> BAdI: Activate CIF After Copying Planning Version

- IMG for Detailed Scheduling

- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply-Chain Planning -> ProductionPlanning/Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Detailed SchedulingAll the IMG activities that are valid for the detailed scheduling planning board and the resourceplanning table are new.

- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply-Chain Planning -> ProductionPlanning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Detailed Scheduling -> Settings for theResource Planning TableAll the IMG activities that are valid for the resource planning table only are new.

- IMG for Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS)

- Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Length-Based Planning -> Assign Characteristics

- Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs) for PP/DS -> Sorting LPP Receipts Before Requirement Coverage

- Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling -> DetailedScheduling -> Settings for the Resource Planning Table -> Create Button and PeriodProfiles

- IMG for Vehicle Scheduling

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Basic Settings -> DefineCustomer-Specific Alerts

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings -> DefineNumber Range for One-Time Locations

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic RouteDetermination -> Activate Dynamic Route Determination

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic RouteDetermination -> Define Strategy

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic Route

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 4

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Determination -> Define Methods

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic RouteDetermination -> Assign Methods to a Strategy

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic RouteDetermination -> Define Parameters

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic RouteDetermination -> Assign Method Parameters to a Strategy

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Interactive Planning -> BAdI: Enhancement to Object Display on Map

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Interactive Planning -> BAdI: Additional Buttons for Interactive Planning

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Transportation Service Provider Selection -> BAdI: Control OptimizationData Before Saving

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Transportation Service Provider Selection -> BAdI: Control Optimizationfor TSP Selection

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Transportation Service Provider Selection -> BAdI: Deactivation ofPlanning Book

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Dynamic Route Determination -> BAdI: Enhancements to CostDetermination in Routing Guide

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Dynamic Route Determination -> BAdI: Enhancements to Geography inDynamic Route Determination

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Dynamic Route Determination -> BAdI: BAdI Methods in Routing Guide

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Dynamic Route Determination -> BAdI: Adjustment of Shipments forDelivery Group Correlation

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Dynamic Route Determination -> BAdI: BAdI-Based Sorting of RoutingGuide Results

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Dynamic Route Determination -> BAdI: Mapping of Data from ATPTables to Freight Units

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Interfaces -> Enhancements for Using One-Time Locations -> BAdI:Own Address Search

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Interfaces -> Enhancements for Using One-Time Locations -> BAdI:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 5

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Adjustment of Location Data for One-Time Addresses

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Interfaces -> BAdI: Enhancements to Inbound Communication

- Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)for TP/VS -> Scheduling -> BAdI: Enhancements to Shipment Creation

- IMG for Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP)

- General Settings -> Specify Advice Code

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Create Field Catalog

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Define Condition Tables

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Define Access Sequences

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Define Condition Types

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Define Determination Procedure

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Determine Condition Maintenance Groups for Context

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Create Condition Maintenance Group

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable ProcessScheduling -> Assign Schema and Activity to a Condition Type List

- Transportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Activate Extended Scheduling

- Product Availability Check -> Consider Confirmed Quantity of Receipts

- Product Availability Check -> Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock -> MaintainField Catalog

- Product Availability Check -> Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock -> MaintainPASS Settings

- Product Availability Check -> Pick from Goods Receipt-> Define Settings

- Product Availability Check -> Pick from Goods Receipt-> Generate SettingsAutomatically

- Rules-Based Availability Check -> Maintain Rule Strategy Sequence

- Rules-Based Availability Check -> Activate Multi-Item Single Delivery Location

- Third-Party Order ProcessingAll the IMG activities under this node are new.

- Backorder Processing ->Define Variant-Dependent Special Sorting

- Backorder Processing ->Configure Order Due Lists (Worklist)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 6

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Backorder Processing -> Parallelizing Backorder Processing

- Event-Driven Quantity Assignment All the IMG activities under this node are new.

- Enhancements -> Availability Check -> BAdI: Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock

- Enhancements -> ATP Controller -> BAdI: Enhancement of Field Catalog forRounding

- Enhancements -> ATP Controller -> BAdI: Restriction of Supplier Selection

- Enhancements -> Rules -> BAdI: Maintenance of Rules-Based ATP Master Data

- Enhancements -> Rules -> Multi-Item Single Delivery Location -> Notes onImplementation

- Enhancements -> Rules -> Multi-Item Single Delivery Location -> BAdI: Multi-ItemSingle Delivery Location (MISL)

- Enhancements -> Rules -> Multi-Item Single Delivery Location -> BAdI: Location Listfor Multi-Item Single Delivery Location (MISL)

- Enhancements -> Rules -> Multi-Item Single Delivery Location -> BAdI: Result forMulti-Item Single Delivery Location (MISL)

- Enhancements -> Rules -> BAdI: Characteristic Substitution

- Enhancements -> Rules -> BAdI: Preselection of Suitable Substitutions

- Enhancements -> Rules -> Backorder Processing -> BAdI: Grouping of Items forParallel Check

- Enhancements -> Backorder Processing-> BAdI: Results Transfer for OutboundDelivery Documents

- Enhancements -> Event-Driven Quantity AssignmentAll the IMG activities under this node are new.

- IMG for Service Parts PlanningAll the IMG activities under Service Parts Planning (SPP) are new.

- IMG for Product and Location Interchangeability

- Application Settings -> General Settings

- Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Product and Location Interchangeability -> BAdI:External Customer Enhancements

- IMG for Capable-to-Match (CTM)

- Specify Advice Code

- IMG for Demand Planning (DP)

- Basic Settings -> Demand Combination -> Make General Settings

- Basic Settings -> Demand Combination -> Specify Activity Parameters

- Basic Settings -> Demand Combination -> Specify Activity Classes

- Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Release SNP/DP -> Change Period Split Profile When

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 7

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

DP Released to SNP

- Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Macro Builder -> Additional Functions for Macros

Renamed IMG Activities

- IMG for Master DataThe IMG activity Maintain Product-Relevant Hierarchy is now called MaintainProduct-Relevant Hierarchies and Hierarchy Structures.

- IMG for Detailed SchedulingThe IMG activity Maintain Period Profiles is now called Define Period Profiles for ResourceUtilization.

- IMG for Global Available-to-PromiseThe IMG activity Assign Rule Strategy is now called Assign Rule Strategy or Rule StrategySequence.

- IMG for Product and Location Interchangeability

- The IMG activity Maintain Attribute Properties is now called Maintain AttributeProperties for Supersession Chains.

- The IMG activity Maintain Interchangeability Types and Assign Replacement Types isnow called Maintain Interchangeability Group Types and Assign Replacement Types.

- The IMG activity Consistency Checks is now called BAdI: Consistency Checks.

- The IMG activity Interface Enhancements is now called BAdI: Interface Enhancements.

- The IMG activity Interchangeability Master Data Maintenance is now called BAdI:Master Data Maintenance for Product and Location Interchangeability.

- The IMG activity Rule Resolution is now called BAdI: Rule Resolution.

- The IMG activity Group Filter is now called BAdI: Group Filter.

- The IMG activity XML Upload of Product Interchangeability Groups is now called BAdI:XML Upload of Interchangeability Groups.

Renamed IMG Structure Nodes

- IMG for Master DataThe structure node Product Interchangeability is now called Product and LocationInterchangeability.

Reassigned IMG Activities

- IMG for Detailed SchedulingYou can now find the following IMG activities under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Detailed Scheduling:

- Maintain Strategy Profiles

- Maintain Heuristics

- Maintain Heuristics Profiles

- Maintain Work Areas

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 8

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Maintain Optimization Profiles

- Maintain Propagation Ranges

- Maintain Overall Profiles

- Maintain Time ProfilesThese IMG activities were previously found under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Detailed Scheduling Planning Board.You can now find the following IMG activities under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Detailed Scheduling -> Settings for the Detailed Scheduling Planning Board:

- Define Period Profiles for Resource Utilization

- Maintain Planning Board Profiles

- Define Functions for the Toolbar in the Detailed Scheduling Planning BoardThese IMG activities were previously to be found under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling(PP/DS) ->Detailed Scheduling Planning Board.

- IMG for Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP)

- The IMG activity Define Condition Table for Scheduling can now be found underTransportation and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using the ConditionTechnique. This activity was previously found under Transportation Planning andShipment Scheduling.

- The IMG activity Maintain Access for Scheduling can now be found under TransportationPlanning and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using the Condition Technique.This IMG activity was previously found under Transportation Planning and ShipmentScheduling.

- The IMG activity Maintain Control for Scheduling can now be found under TransportationPlanning and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using the Condition Technique.This activity was previously found under Transportation Planning and ShipmentScheduling.

- The IMG activity Determine Assignment of Item Category to Process Alias can now befound under Transportation Planning and Shipment Scheduling -> Scheduling UsingConfigurable Process Scheduling. This activity was previously found underTransportation Planning and Shipment Scheduling -> Interfaces.

- The IMG activity Maintain Filter Category can now be found under Backorder Processing, and under Event-Driven Quantity Assignment. This activity was previously found underTools.

- The IMG activity Define Sort Profile can now be found under Backorder Processing , andunder Event-Driven Quantity Assignment. This activity was previously found under Tools.

- The IMG activity Define Special Sorting can now be found under Backorder Processing ,and under Event-Driven Quantity Assignment. This activity was previously found underTools.

- The IMG activity Define Check Level can now be found under Backorder Processing. This

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 9

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

activity was previously found under Tools.

3.4.2 SCM-APO-CA APO Cross-Application Components

3.4.2.1 SCM-APO-CA-CDP Characteristics-Dependent Planning

3.4.2.1.1 Functions in Block Planning (Enhanced)

Use

Create Block Basis Definitions

As of Release SAP SCM 5.0, you can create block basis definitions via Advanced Planning andOptimization -> Master Data -> Resource -> Block Basis Definitions.

However, you can still create block basis definitions in resource maintenance.

Where-Used List for Class or Block Basis Definition in a Resource

You can run a where-used list for classes or selected block basis definitions in resources via AdvancedPlanning and Optimization -> Master Data -> Resource -> Block Basis Definitions.

Evaluate Changes to Block Basis Definitions

In the BAdI Block Planning (/SAPAPO/MCO1_BLK), you can use the method Publish Changes to BlocksWhen Saving (BLOCK_CHANGES_PUBLISH) to evaluate changes to block basis definitions whensaving, for example, to transfer these to an external system.

You can access the BAdI in Customizing under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Resource ->BAdIs for Resources -> Block Planning.

Move Blocks by Productive Time

When moving blocks in block maintenance for the resource, you can choose if the productive time isconsidered, or if the block is moved by hours or calendar days.

Consider Downtimes

The system considers the downtimes maintained for a resources when the productive time is calculated

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 10

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

for blocks.

Maintain Attributes for Several Blocks Simultaneously

You can maintain different indicators for several simultaneously in block maintenance:

- Fix blocks

- Protect blocks

- Specify scheduling at block limits

- Set number for block basis definitions

- Specify block tolerances

See also:

Block Planning in the DS Planning Board

3.4.2.1.2 Block Planning in the DS Planning Board (Enhanced)

Use

Blocks as Inbound Parameters in Heuristics

Previously, you could only use resources as inbound parameters for the heuristics SAP_CDPBP_01 andSAP_CDPBP_02. As of Release SCM 5.0, you can also select blocks and use these as inboundparameters for heuristics.

Blocks as Inbound and Outbound Parameters for Enhancements in the DS PlanningBoard

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can specify blocks as inbound and outbound parameters for the followingenhancements:

- Select Objects in the DS Planning Board (APOCDPS8)

- Read and Change Objects from the DS Planning Board(APOCDPS0)

- Choose Objects for Production Planning Run (APOCDPS1)

You can access the enhancements via Customizing under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Enhancements.

Block Maintenance as Heuristic

The block maintenance for the resource is available as the heuristic SAP_CDPBP_04 (call up blockmaintenance interactively).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 11

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Adjust Function Keys

When accessing block maintenance from the DS planning board, the system displays it in a dialog box. Asof SCM 5.0, the function keys for returning to the DS planning board and calling up block maintenance asa full screen have been changed:

- Function key F8: Return to DS Planning Board

- Function key STRG F8: Call Block Planning as Full Screen

Display Blocks in the DS Planning Board

In Customizing for planning board profiles, you can define if blocks are displayed as bars or lines in theDS planning board. The planning board profile was enhanced with the indicator Blocks Display.

- When the blocks are displayed as bars, the block description is displayed directly on the bar.

- When the blocks are displayed as lines, the block description is displayed as a quick info.

Fix Blocks in the DS Planning Board

Blocks can be fixed in the DS planning board. If the blocks are displayed as bars, the fixed blocks aremarked by a red line in the display.

When the blocks are displayed as lines, the quick info will contain the word Fixed.

BAdI Method for Displaying Block Descriptions

In BAdI Change Data for Block Planning (/SAPAPO/CDPS_BLKDATA), you can use the method ChangeBlock Texts in DS Planning Board BLOCKDESCR_CHANGE to create a customer-specific descriptionfor blocks in the DS planning board.

You can access the BAdI in Customizing under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> SupplyChain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs) for PP/DS -> Change Data for Block Planning.

Settings in the Strategy Profile for Block Planning

In the expert view of the strategy profile, there are two new fields for controlling block planning. You canfind these fields on the General Strategy Parameters tab page in the Other Parameters screen area:

- Block PlanningYou can use this field to deactivate block planning or remove the fixing of blocks.

- Schedule on Block LimitsYou can use this field to switch off scheduling on block limits in order to carry out more detailedplanning for specific operations in a block.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 12

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Functions in Block Planning

3.4.2.1.3 Checks for Consistency Comparison in liveCache and APO Database(New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use a check for block planning and activities for the consistency comparisonin the liveCache and the APO database under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APOAdministration -> liveCache/ LCA Routines -> Tools -> liveCache Consistency Check.

You can use the BAdI Additional Customer-Specific Checks for OM17 (/SAPAPO/OM_SYNC) to carryout additional customer-specific checks for the consistency comparison.

3.4.2.1.4 Copy Configuration Data from Sales Order to Planned Order

Use

If you manually create a planned order for a sales order in the product view, the system copies thecharacteristic value assignments for CDP from the assigned requirements elements in the planned order.

However, you must carry out planning in make-to-order production, and there must be requirements withunique characteristic value assignments.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 13

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.2.2 SCM-APO-CA-COP Collaborative Planning

3.4.2.2.1 Collaborative Planning: User Settings and Shuffler (New)

Use

User Settings

Hitherto, you could only make user settings for the external partner in Collaborative Supply and DemandPlanning (such as the display of a graphic in the Internet planning book) by means of user parameters. Asof SCM 5.0, a transaction is available to you for these settings. From the SAP Easy Access screen,choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Cooperation -> Environment ->Current Settings -> User Settings for Collaborative Supply and Demand Planning.

Shuffler

Previously, you had to create and assign selections to the external partner in interactive planning forDemand Planning or Supply Network Planning (SNP). As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify in thea.m. user settings that a shuffler is available to the external partner, with which he can create, change, ordelete selections himself (it is only possible to change and delete if he is the creator of the selection). Theselections created by him are automatically assigned to the user. Furthermore, the partner can then alsoload data without saving it in a selection. This function corresponds to the shuffler function in interactiveDemand Planning or interactive SNP.

You can also specify in the user settings that the partner can directly define the header information for thedrilldown mode in the Internet planning book.

Effects on System Administration

If you are upgrading from an earlier SAP SCM release to SAP SCM 5.0, the system takes already existinguser settings that you have made with the user parameters into account. If you have both specified userparameters and made settings in the new transaction, the system takes the settings of the new transactioninto account.

3.4.2.2.2 Transportation Tendering (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can monitor shipment tenderings. To do this, you can use the report/SAPAPO/VS_MONITOR_TENDER (transaction /SAPAPO/VS61). To call the report, on the SAP EasyAccess screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Transportation Planning/Vehicle

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 14

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Scheduling -> Planning -> Collaborative Transportation Planning -> Monitoring Tenderings.

You can also schedule the monitoring of shipment tenderings in the background. To do this, you can usethe report /SAPAPO/VS_MON_TENDER_SCHED (transaction /SAPAPO/VS611). To call the report, onthe SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling -> Planning -> Planning in the Background -> Schedule Monitoring ofTendering.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also control whether dates/times that the transportation service provider haschanged during transportation tendering are to be adjusted manually or automatically in theTransportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component.

Effects on Customizing

To control the adjustment of TSP dates/times, choose the TSP Dates/Times indicator in Customizingfor TP/VS under Basic Settings -> Basic Settings for Vehicle Scheduling.

See also

For more information about the two reports, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management ->Transportation Planning//Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Collaborative Transportation Planning ->Monitoring of Shipment Tenderings.

3.4.3 SCM-APO-MD Master Data

3.4.3.1 Master Data Enhancement with the Easy Enhancement Workbench(New)

Use

To enhance the master data fields in the customer name space provided by SAP, you can add extra fieldsusing the Easy Enhancement Workbench (EEW) that is available as of SAP SCM 5.0. The newly createdfields appear on the respective tab page in the Enhancement Fields frame. This frame is only visible ifyou use the enhancement. You can use individual or mass maintenance to edit the enhancement fields.

You can use EEW to enhance the following master data objects and master data subobjects:

- Location

- Location header

- Product

- Storage data

- Product header

- Location product

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 15

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Warehouse product

- Storage type product

- Packing material

You can find the EEW on the SAP Easy Access screen under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Master Data -> General Master Data Functions -> Enhancements.

Effects on Data Transfer

The enhancement fields are automatically transported to the new system, during an upgrade.

Enhancement fields are not integrated in the ERP system. This means that they are not automaticallytransferred to the ERP system via the Core Interface (CIF) or Business Application ProgrammingInterface (BAPI).

See also

For more information about master data enhancement with the EEW, see the SAP Library under SAPSupply Chain Management -> SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -> Master Data ->General Master Data Functions -> Master Data Enhancement with EEW.

3.4.3.2 Master Data Locking Concept (new)

Use

To prevent data inconsistencies caused by concurrent accesses, the master data locking concept wasintroduced as of SAP SCM 5.0. Concurrent accesses are:

- Individual maintenance

- Mass maintenance

- Data transfer via Business Application Programming Interface (BAPI)

- Data transfer via Core Interface (CIF)

The master data locking concept includes all maintenance types and ensures that these maintenance typeslock each other out in the case of parallel access to a master data object. The lock time and theperformance loss associated with it is minimal. The maintenance types have a default lock priority thatdefines which maintenance type the system gives priority to in the case of parallel access, or whichmaintenance type can remove the lock from another maintenance type. In addition to the lock priority, thelock behavior is also controlled by the processing mode of the system (individual or mass processingmode).

The master data locking concept applies to products and location products.

Lock priority

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 16

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The maintenance types have the following lock priorities:

- Highest priority: Data transfer via BAPI and CIF

- Medium priority: Mass maintenance

- Lowest priority: Individual maintenance

Individual processing mode

In the individual processing mode, the system sets the locks during dialog processing and postingindividually for master data objects just being processed. In individual processing, the system always usesthe individual processing mode. In mass maintenance and during data transfer via CIF or BAPI, thesystem only uses up to a certain number of lock requests set in Customizing. In the individual processingmode, a parallel individual or mass maintenance is possible. Individual and mass maintenance have thesame priority in the individual processing mode.

If you process a master data object in individual maintenance, access to this object is locked to other usersduring the dialog and processing time. Users attempting parallel access to the same master data object canonly save their changes once you have ended your maintenance. However, if parallel access occurs via amaintenance type with higher lock priority, this maintenance type can remove the lock for yourmaintenance. In this case, you will get an error message with the next screen change, and you will not beable to save your changes. You have to start the maintenance transaction again and repeat your changesuntil the lock is back in place and you can save the changes.

Mass processing mode

In the mass processing mode, the system collects the lock requests up to a certain block size set inCustomizing, and then processes these in parallel work processes.

The system uses the mass processing mode in mass maintenance and for data transfers via CIF or BAPI asof a certain number of lock requests.

In the mass processing mode, parallel accesses via mass maintenance and CIF or BAPI transfers lock eachother out, regardless of whether the master data objects to be maintained overlap or not.

Here you have to differentiate between a general lock and a restricted general lock. In the general lock, theuser can no longer save changes in a maintenance type of lower priority, regardless of whether themaintenance type of higher priority affects the same master data objects or not. In the restricted generalmaintenance, the user can still save changes to different master data objects. However, no new access tothis maintenance object is possible for the duration of the lock.

One exception is parallel data transfers via CIF and/or BAPI. Here, a parallel maintenance of differentmaster data objects is possible, in other words, these maintenance types do not lock each other out.

CIF parallelizes the data transfer and ensures via the queued Remote Function Call (qRFC) that the masterdata objects are transferred as serialized. This is not automatically the case in BAPI transfers, so the usermust therefore ensure that the same master data objects are not processed in parallel through differentBAPI accesses.

For an overview of system behavior depending on maintenance type and processing mode, see LockPriorities in Individual and Mass Processing Mode.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 17

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


In the Define Parameters for Master Data Lock Concept IMG activity, you can make the followingsettings:

- You can switch off the master data locking concept for mass maintenance, for CIF transfers, and forBAPI transfers. If you exclude all maintenance types from the master data locking concept, thesystem behaves as in SAP SCM 4.1 or earlier.

- With the Block Size parameter, you can set as of which number of lock requests the system switchesfrom individual to mass processing mode.

- You can control the performance via the Block Size, Number of Parallel Work Processes, and Blocksper Parallel Work Process parameters.

See also

For more information about the master data locking concept, see the SAP Library under SAP SupplyChain Management (SAP SCM) -> SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -> Master Data-> General Master Data Functions -> Master Data Locking Concept.

3.4.3.3 SCM-APO-MD-LO Location

3.4.3.3.1 Integration of Shipping Points (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 and SAP ECC 6.0, shipping points are integrated via APO Core Interface (CIF).Shipping points in the ERP system as created as locations of the type shipping point in SAP APO. As aprerequisite, the shipping point must be contained in an active integration model.


To change the transfer data, you can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Change Shipping Point DataBefore Sending to SAP APO in Customizing on the ERP side. For more information, see theImplementation Guide (IMG) for the ERP system under Integration with Other SAP Components ->Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Application-Specific Settings and Enhancements ->Enhancements to Plant, Vendor, Customer, and Shipping Point -> BAdI: Change Shipping Point DataBefore Sending to SAP APO.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 18

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.3.3.2 TP/VS-Specific Resources in the Location Master (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define loading resources (inbound/outbound) and opening times for eachmeans of transport. Moreover, you can define these resources separately for the inbound process andoutbound process.

For this purpose, the Resources field was added to the Additional Resources group box on theResources tab page.

When selecting the suitable resource, the system takes into account hierarchical relationships betweenmeans of transport.

The system takes into account loading resources (inbound/outbound) and opening times duringoptimization in the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component.

3.4.3.4 SCM-APO-MD-PR Product

3.4.3.4.1 Alternative Product Number (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can maintain a product in the system not only under the product number youdefine when you create it, but also under one or more alternative product numbers (APNs). APNs can be,for example, manufacturer part numbers or an old material number.

APNs make your search for a product more flexible, because you can search using not just one but severalproduct numbers. To search for an APN, call for example the input help for the Product field on theinitial screen of the product master, and choose Search with Alternative Product Numbers.

You assign APNs to a product in the product master on the Properties 2 tab page.


APNs are not integrated in the ERP system via the APO Core Interface (CIF). However, a solution using acustomer exit is possible.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 19

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


APNs are always assigned to a specific type (APN type) defined in Customizing for the product masterunderMaintain Alternative Product Number Type.

3.4.3.4.2 Inheritance of Product Master Attributes (New)

Use

To ensure that certain product master attributes assume the same values in all products of a location and aplanning version, as of SAP SCM 5.0 you can make use of the inheritance function. The maintenancetransaction also affords the options of displaying inherited values and excluding attributes frominheritance. In the standard system, the values of all attributes displayed in the maintenance transactionfor inheritance can be passed on.

To invoke the inheritance function, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data ->Product -> Maintain Values for Inheritance from the SAP Easy Access Menü

3.4.3.4.3 Product Groups (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can group together products of the same kind in product groups. Product groupsare used in various processes, such as those of Service Parts Planning (SPP).

If you define product groups, you can also maintain transportation lanes for such groups rather than justfor individual products, for example. For more information on the maintenance of transportation lanes forproduct groups, see Transportation Lanes for Product Groups.

You define product groups in Customizing. They are assigned to a product group type which is likewisedefined in Customizing. While the product group type specifies the criterion according to which groupingtakes place (for example, size), product groups represent the instances of this grouping (for example,small, medium, large).

You can assign products to an existing product group on the Properties 2 tab page of the product master.You can use the mass maintenance function to assign a large number of products to an existing productgroup.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 20

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- You define product group types in Customizing for the product master under Define Product GroupTypes.

- You define product groups in Customizing for the product master under Define Product Groups.

3.4.3.4.4 Transportation Lanes for Product Groups (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, you could only assign a transportation lane to one product or to all products. As of SAP SCM5.0, you can also assign a transportation lane to one or more product groups of a product group type. As aresult, the transportation lane maintenance is faster and easier.

To assign a transportation lane to the product group of a product group type, you must first set inCustomizing for the product master the Relevant to Transportation Lanes indicator for a product grouptype.


You set the Relevant to Transportation Lanes indicator in Customizing for the product master dataunder Define Product Group Types.

See also

For more information, see Product Groups.

3.4.3.4.5 Consideration of Minimum Safety Stock (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the responsive replenishment algorithm considers the minimum safety stock as thelower limit for the safety stock, regardless of whether the safety stock value has been calculateddynamically or is provided as a static master data attribute.

The minimum safety stock is maintained in the location product master data. If, for example, safety stockis calculated in any period below the minimum safety stock that has been maintained, the safety stockcalculated for this period is replaced by the minimum safety stock.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 21

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.3.5 SCM-APO-MD-INC Product and Location Interchangeability

3.4.3.5.1 Master Data for Location Interchangeability (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can also use the interchangeability master data for the location substitution.You use this function to determine alternative locations in rules-based Available-to-Promise (ATP).Therefore, new interchangeability group types have been added to the product interchangeability masterdata that is now called Master Data for Product and Location Interchangeability.

The following interchangeability group types are available for location substitution:

- Location Substitution ChainYou can use this interchangeability group type to maintain locations that can replace each other bydefining attributes such as valid-from date/time, valid-to date/time, and location determinationactivity.

- Location ListYou can use this interchangeability group to define a sequence of locations that is used to find astarting location for the availability check. It contains no additional information regarding thesubstitution of locations.

- Location Product Substitution ChainYou can use this interchangeability group type to maintain location products that can replace eachother by defining attributes such as valid-from date/time, valid-to date/time, location determinationactivity, and reason code.

- Location Determination ProcedureYou can use this interchangeability group type to group several location substitution chains for therules-based availability check. It contains no additional information regarding the substitution oflocations.You can also define a location determination procedure as a location determination alternativeprocedure. Compared to a normal location determination procedure, the alternative procedure allowsthe multiple use of a location in the assigned location chains.

- Location Product Substitution ProcedureYou can use this interchangeability group type to group several location product substitution chainsfor the rules-based availability check. It contains no additional information regarding the substitutionof locations.

In the ATP application you can determine whether the availability check has to use the interchangeability

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 22

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

master data.

See also

For more information on the master data maintenance for product and location interchangeability, see theSAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management -> SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization (SAP APO) -> Master Data -> Application-Specific Master Data -> Master Data forProduct and Location Interchangeability.

For more information on the integration of the product and location interchangeability master data inATP, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management -> SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization (SAP APO) -> Global Availability Check Methods -> Rules-Based AvailabilityCheck -> Substitutions from the Interchangeability Master Data.

3.4.3.5.2 Master Data for Product Interchangeability (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can use the following functions in the master data for productinterchangeability:

- Enhancement with location interchangeabilityThe master data maintenance for product interchangeability has been enhanced to support locationinterchangeability in rules-based Available-to-Promise (ATP). Therefore, new interchangeabilitygroup types have been added to the product interchangeability master data that is now called MasterData for Product and Location Interchangeability. For more information, see release noteMaster Data for Location Interchangeability (New).

- Product discontinuation without further replacementIf a product should not be replaced by another product, you can maintain this as a discontinuationstep in a supersession chain. Therefore, the new replacement type One-to-Zero Product Substitutionis available.

- Supersession chains with overlapping or without validity periodsIn global ATP you can have a product substitution that overlaps the validity period of anotherproduct substitution or a product substitution that has no validity period at all.To support these scenarios in the interchangeability master data, you can create supersession chainsthat contain discontinuation steps with overlapping or without validity periods.

- New attributes for supersession chainsThe following attributes are available to support the different interchangeability scenarios in

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 23

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

planning and ATP:

- Predecessor Valid-From DateWith this attribute you can specify the date from which the first product of a supersession chainwill be valid.

- Data Realignment End DateWith this attribute you specify the date from which the successor product receives its ownorders in a partial substitution. The partial substitution is a replacement strategy in ServiceParts Planning (SPP).

- Successor Product Receipt DateWith this attribute you specify the date on which the successor product arrives at the entrylocation of the bill of distribution (BOD) in SPP. The successor product receipt date iscalculated by the system and is the successor product planning date plus the supplier deliverytime to the entry location.

- Application-specific maintenance of attribute properties for supersession chainsIn Customizing for product and location interchangeability you can maintain each attribute perapplication. This means that you can configure the same attribute differently for the areas planning,ATP, or planning and ATP.

- Validity dates for product substitution procedures (PSPs)On the header level of the PSP a new list box is available with which you can determine whethercross-location validity dates or planning validity dates will be used for the PSP.

- Data archiving for interchangeability groupsUsing data archiving you can remove interchangeability groups that the system no longer needsonline from the database. This reduces the demand of storage space and improves systemperformance. If required, you can still read the archived interchangeability groups.

- Change documentsYou can use change documents to find information in the system about which users have changedwhich interchangeability groups during a certain time period and which changes they have made.

- Improvement of usabilityTo improve the usability for maintaining interchangeability groups, the user interface (UI) for theinterchangeability master data has been enhanced with the following features:

- Improvement of accessibility

- Navigation from the substitution procedures such as product substitution procedure (PSP) to itssubgroups

- Wildcard search for products within procedures

- Creation of interchangeability groups in change mode

- Search screen area with two search options: quick search and advanced search

- Favorites list for interchangeability groups

- Enhanced options for controlling the mass generation of FFF subsets

- XML upload for new interchangeability group typesThe XML upload function has been enhanced to support the new group types for locationinterchangeability.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 24

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Business Application Programming Interfaces (BAPIs)To transfer discontinuation data from a legacy system to the interchangeability master dataapplication the business object InCGroup (Interchangeability Group) is provided. It contains thefollowing BAPI methods:

- DeleteMultiple (Deletion of One or More Groups)With this method you can delete interchangeability groups.

- GetList (Reading InC Groups)With this method you read the details of interchangeability groups.

- Save (InC Group Create Or Change)With this method you can create or change interchangeability groups.

- Business Application Add-InWith the new BAdI: External Customer Enhancements (/INCMD/BAPI_CUST_EXT) you canmaintain the data in interchangeability data structures before it is transferred from the legacy systemto the interchangeability master data application.

See also

For more information on product interchangeability, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply ChainManagement -> SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -> Cross-ApplicationTopics -> Product Interchangeability.

3.4.3.6 SCM-APO-MD-RE Resource

3.4.3.6.1 Resources: Logging Changes

Use

As of SCM 5.0, planning-relevant changes to a resource are recorded in the planning log. In the planninglog, the system lists all the resources, changes to which affect liveCache (for example, changes toavailable capacity, changes to the planning indicator).

Both the resources and the orders that are changed are logged.

To call the planning log, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Reporting -> Logs -> Display Logs.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 25

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Specify Resource as the application.

3.4.3.6.2 Resources: Improved Shift Maintenance in Capacity Profile(Enhanced)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can change multiple shifts in a period at the same time in the capacity profile.

To do this, you can use the function Change Shifts. A dialog box appears in which you can specify theperiod of time and the shift for which you want to change the available capacity.

You also specify the change to the available capacity in the dialog box. When you confirm your entries,the changes are copied to the capacity profile.

3.4.3.7 SCM-APO-MD-TL Transportation Lanes

3.4.3.7.1 Product Groups (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can group together products of the same kind in product groups. Product groupsare used in various processes, such as those of Service Parts Planning (SPP).

If you define product groups, you can also maintain transportation lanes for such groups rather than justfor individual products, for example. For more information on the maintenance of transportation lanes forproduct groups, see Transportation Lanes for Product Groups.

You define product groups in Customizing. They are assigned to a product group type which is likewisedefined in Customizing. While the product group type specifies the criterion according to which groupingtakes place (for example, size), product groups represent the instances of this grouping (for example,small, medium, large).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 26

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can assign products to an existing product group on the Properties 2 tab page of the product master.You can use the mass maintenance function to assign a large number of products to an existing productgroup.


- You define product group types in Customizing for the product master under Define Product GroupTypes.

- You define product groups in Customizing for the product master under Define Product Groups.

3.4.3.7.2 Transportation Lanes for Product Groups (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, you could only assign a transportation lane to one product or to all products. As of SAP SCM5.0, you can also assign a transportation lane to one or more product groups of a product group type. As aresult, the transportation lane maintenance is faster and easier.

To assign a transportation lane to the product group of a product group type, you must first set inCustomizing for the product master the Relevant to Transportation Lanes indicator for a product grouptype.


You set the Relevant to Transportation Lanes indicator in Customizing for the product master dataunder Define Product Group Types.

See also

For more information, see Product Groups.

3.4.3.7.3 Means of Transport (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, several new fields are available for defining means of transport in the TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 27

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Ext. MTr (external means of transport)You can assign multiple shipments to an external vehicle resource, in other words, a vehicle resourcethat is assigned to an external means of transport. This is recommended, for example, if thetransportation service provider has multiple vehicles of this means of transport. In this case, theexternal vehicle resource is used as a template for the physical vehicles. For more information, seeExternal Means of Transport.

- ExtVehRes. (number of external vehicle resources)The number of external vehicle resources defines the maximum number of shipments that can beassigned to this vehicle resource at the same time. If you do not specify the number of vehicleresources, it means that any number of shipments can be assigned to this vehicle resource at thesame time. External vehicle resources are also taken into account during dynamic routedetermination. For more information, see Number of External Vehicle Resources and the releasenote Dynamic Route Determination.

- Sup. MTr (superordinate means of transport)You use superordinate means of transport to define hierarchical relationships between means oftransport. For more information, see Superordinate Means of Transport.


To define means of transport, in Customizing for SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO),choose Master Data -> Transportation Lane -> Maintain Means of Transport or TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Basic Settings -> Maintain Means of Transport.

3.4.3.8 SCM-APO-MD-PDS Production Data Structure

3.4.3.8.1 Enhancements to the PDS: Template PDS (New), Push Production(New), BAdIs

Use

Template PDS:

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the BAPI method CreateFromTemplate of business object ManufactOrderAPSsupports order creation using a template PDS as the master record.

You can now use a template PDS as the master record to create orders using the BAPIManufactOrderAPS.CreateFromTemplate.

The function is the same as when a PPM is used as the master record. An external optimization tool cannow create orders using a PDS as the master record.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 28

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The following PDS uses are supported.

o Transfer a PDS from an ERP system

o PDS created via the CreatePDS BAPI

Push Production:

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the PDS for push production.

BAdI: /SAPAPO/CURTO_SNP:

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the standard SAP delivery contains the new, active default implementation/SAPAPO/CURTO_SNP_I1 of BAdI /SAPAPO/CURTO_SNP. This replaces the previous defaultimplementation /SAPAPO/CURTO_SNPDEF.

Note the following methods in implementation /SAPAPO/CURTO_SNP_I1:

- CIF_IMPORT:This method filters out the resources and materials that are not relevant to SNP.

- CALC_BUCKET_CONSUMPTION:This method calculates the bucket requirement when the dimension is Time. See also SAP Note853241.It calculates the fixed durations using the lower lot size limit. If the lower lot size limit is specifiedas 0, the system calculates using the value 1.

Effects on Existing Data

Template PDS

- No substantial changes have been made to the interface of the BAPIManufactOrderAPS.CreateFromTemplate.

- There are no enhancements that do not also exist in the template PPM.

- The existing constraints continue to be valid.

3.4.3.8.2 Heuristic and Consistency Check for the Production Data Structure

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 29

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

(PDS) (New)

Use

In the SAP ERP system, you can execute an extended consistency check for the PDS when transferringproduction data structures and changes. Using the extended consistency check, you can reduce errors inthe data that you use for planning in SAP SCM. Execute the extended consistency check if you havefaulty production data structures or faulty orders in SAP SCM.

Only activate the extended consistency check in the exception cases mentioned above, since execution hasan effect on system performance.

3.4.4 SCM-APO-VS Vehicle Scheduling

3.4.4.1 BAdIs for Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) in the TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component:

- Enhancements to Shipment Creation(/SAPAPO/VS_SHIPMENT)

- Enhancements to Inbound Communication(/SAPAPO/VS_INB_PROC)

- Control Optimization Data Before Saving(/SAPAPO/VS_CS_SAVE )

- Control Optimization for TSP Selection(/SAPAPO/VS_CS_SELECT)

- Deactivation of Planning Book(/SAPAPO/VS_PLAN_BOOK )

- Enhancement to Object Display on Map(/SAPAPO/VS_GIS_MAP )

- Enhancements to Cost Determination in Routing Guide(/SAPAPO/VS_RG_COST)

- Enhancements to Geography in Dynamic Route Determination

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 30

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

(/SAPAPO/VS_RG_GEO )

- BAdI Methods in Routing Guide(/SAPAPO/VS_RG_BADI_METHODS)

- Adjustment of Shipments for Delivery Group Correlation(/SAPAPO/VS_RG_DELGROUP_CONS)

- BAdI-Based Sorting of Routing Guide Results(/SAPAPO/VS_RG_SORT)

- Own Address Search(/SAPAPO/VS_OSTA_ADDR_SEARCH)

- Check If a One-Time Location Must Be Created(/SAPAPO/VS_OSTA_INB_CHCK_REL)

- Adjustment of Location Data for One-Time Addresses(/SAPAPO/VS_OSTA_INB_LOCDATA)

- Mapping of Data from ATP Tables to Freight Units(/SAPAPO/VS_ATP_MAPTO_FUNIT)

- Additional Buttons for Interactive Planning(/SAPAPO/VS_ADD_BUTTONS)

The BAdIs are available in the Implementation Guide (IMG) under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for TP/VS.

3.4.4.2 Conditions (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, the function for defining conditions was redesigned. It now offers the followingcharacteristics:

- You can define conditions for any attribute belonging to an order, shipment, vehicle, or freight unit.

- An AND/OR logic is available.

- You can choose any number of selection options.

A separate transaction is now available for defining conditions (Define Conditions (/SAPAPO/VS15)).

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also use conditions for shipment types. For this purpose, the Conditionfield was added to the IMG activity Determine Shipment Type.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 31

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


To determine shipment types, choose Interfaces -> Determine Shipment Type in Customizing forTransportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS).

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Condition.

3.4.4.3 Consolidation (Enhanced)

Use

The consolidation logic was enhanced in SAP SCM 5.0 as part of the new function Order Split Based onFreight Units.

Until now, you could specify a consolidation level in Customizing for the TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component under Basic Settings -> Basic Settings for VehicleScheduling. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use consolidation strategies to define how order items, deliveryitems, or order schedule lines are consolidated into freight units. You define consolidation strategies in thesplit rules. For more information about split rules, see the release note Order Split Based on Freight Units.

The Consolidation Level field in Customizing has been deleted.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Consolidation.

3.4.4.4 Schedule Heuristic Run in the Background (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can schedule the execution of customer-specific heuristics in the background.You use the optimization profile to select the required objects. For more information about implementingcustomer-specific heuristics, see the BAdI documentation for the Business Add-In BAdI: HeuristicsInterface (/SAPAPO/VS_HEURISTIC).

To schedule heuristic runs in the background, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 32

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

and Optimization -> Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling -> Planning -> Planning in theBackground -> Schedule Heuristic Run (/SAPAPO/VS_HEURSCHED).

3.4.4.5 Transportation Tendering (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can monitor shipment tenderings. To do this, you can use the report/SAPAPO/VS_MONITOR_TENDER (transaction /SAPAPO/VS61). To call the report, on the SAP EasyAccess screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Transportation Planning/VehicleScheduling -> Planning -> Collaborative Transportation Planning -> Monitoring Tenderings.

You can also schedule the monitoring of shipment tenderings in the background. To do this, you can usethe report /SAPAPO/VS_MON_TENDER_SCHED (transaction /SAPAPO/VS611). To call the report, onthe SAP Easy Access screen, choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling -> Planning -> Planning in the Background -> Schedule Monitoring ofTendering.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also control whether dates/times that the transportation service provider haschanged during transportation tendering are to be adjusted manually or automatically in theTransportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component.


To control the adjustment of TSP dates/times, choose the TSP Dates/Times indicator in Customizingfor TP/VS under Basic Settings -> Basic Settings for Vehicle Scheduling.

See also

For more information about the two reports, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management ->Transportation Planning//Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Collaborative Transportation Planning ->Monitoring of Shipment Tenderings.

3.4.4.6 New Shipment Structure (Enhanced)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 33

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In SAP SCM 5.0, the shipment structure was redesigned. Shipments are now processed on the basis ofdatabase tables. A new object, "shipment", was added to liveCache to enable scheduling. The shipmentactivities are now no longer part of the planned orders, in other words, when you change an order or adelivery in the ERP system, the relevant shipment is no longer automatically invalidated in theTransportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component. You can use control rules to definewhat is to happen to such shipments in TP/VS. For more information, see the release note Control Rules.

The new shipment structure offers the following advantages, among others:

- Improved performance

- Greater stability

- Reduced data quantity

It is also a prerequisite for implementing the order split and other important functions in SAP SCM 5.0.

Use the liveCache upgrade report /SAPAPO/OM_UPGRADE_50 to convert shipments from the oldstructure to the new structure. For more information, see the SAP Service Marketplace underservice.sap.com/instguides -> mySAP Business Suite Solutions -> mySAP SCM -> Using SAP SCM5.0 Server in the "Upgrade Documentation - SAP SCM 5.0" in the "Perform TPVS-Specific Conversions"section.

For performance reasons, we recommend that you delete all shipments in TP/VS before the upgrade, andthen reactivate the integration model after the upgrade.

3.4.4.7 Order Split Based on Freight Units (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can execute the order split on the basis of freight units. Freight units can becreated as a combination of order items or outbound delivery items with different quantities. In particular,multiple freight units can be created for an order item. Deliveries are created in the ERP system on thebasis of these freight units.

The freight units can be created automatically by applying split rules. You can use the transaction DefineSplit Rules (/SAPAPO/VS14) to define split rules. You can also create freight units manually. To do this,you can use the transaction Create Freight Units (/SAPAPO/VSSP). You can also branch to thistransaction from the planning view (/SAPAPO/VS01). The split can be performed either in accordancewith a split quantity or the vehicle capacity (multiple units of measurement are possible). Roundingquantities are supported. Smaller freight units that were scheduled on the same vehicle can be combinedinto one freight unit after optimization.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 34

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The split results can be communicated via a BAPI. You can also use a BAPI to connect an externaloptimization.

The following additional functions, for example, are available in the transaction Define Split Rules:

- You can define dimensions and units of measurement. Previously, the IMG activity DefineDimensions/Units in Customizing for the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS)component was used to do this. It has been deleted.Two split rules with the relevant settings are automatically created via an XPRA for Customizingentries from previous releases.

- You can assign order characteristics to units of measurement, but only for quantitative ordercharacteristics. Rounding quantities are supported here too. The order characteristics are then takeninto account when freight units are created. If you want order characteristics to be taken into account,set the Use Characts indicator in Customizing for TP/VS in the basic settings.All order characteristics are displayed in the planning view and in the transaction Create FreightUnits. Order characteristics are also taken into account during dynamic route determination that isperformed when sales orders are entered in the ERP system. For more information, see the releasenote Dynamic Route Determination.

The following additional functions, for example, are available in the transaction Create Freight Units:

- You can trigger the creation of deliveries in the ERP system for planned and unplanned freight units.

- You can change the requested delivery date or enter a requested delivery time frame.

Note:

The previous transactions for the order split under Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling ->Planning -> Planning Preparation have been deleted.

Limitations:

You can perform the order split for the following types of orders and deliveries only:

- Sales orders

- Purchase orders

- Stock transport orders

- VMI sales orders

- Outbound deliveries (as of SAP R/3 Enterprise Release 4.70)


Several new fields are available in the IMG activity Basic Settings for Vehicle Scheduling with which youcan influence the order split or the creation of freight units.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Order Split Based on Freight Units.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 35

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.4.8 Use of Transportation Zones in Transshipment Hierarchies (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can assign transportation zones to transshipment locations in transshipmenthierarchies. All the orders for customers that belong to these transportation zones are then available forthe relevant transshipment processes.

3.4.4.9 Creation of Shipments Without Vehicle Resource (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can manually create shipments without a vehicle resource in multilevelplanning. During planning, you can subsequently assign a vehicle resource to such shipments.

The system can also create shipments with a vehicle resource during dynamic route determination. Youdefine this in the route determination profile. For more information, see the release note Dynamic RouteDetermination.

3.4.4.10 SCM-APO-VS-RG Routing Guide Planning

3.4.4.10.1 Dynamic Route Determination (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, a function is available for dynamic route determination. For example, you can

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 36

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

perform automatic transportation planning and scheduling as part of the global availability check (globalATP check) when entering sales orders in the ERP system.

Dynamic route determination offers the following:

- Determination of shipment proposals on the basis of transportation lanes, transshipment locations(maximum of two), and compatibilities, for example

- Assignment of vehicle resources, for example, while taking into account capacities andcompatibilities,

- Manual selection of the required shipment proposal on the user interface or automatically based onpredefined criteria (for example, most punctual or fastest shipment proposal, or the shipmentproposal with the lowest costs)

- Scheduling based on the following data, for example:

- Factory calendar

- Loading resources

- Windows for pickup and delivery

- Schedules

- Minimum or maximum goods wait times at transshipment locations

- Vehicle calendar

- Transportation allocation check for transportation service providers

- Automatic creation of shipments in the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS)component with automatic posting of transportation service provider capacity (optional, in otherwords, a simulation mode is available)

- Automatic correlation of shipments for orders with delivery groups

- Enhancement options due to customer-specific methods and strategies

You make the settings for dynamic route determination in the route determination profile (transactionDefine Route Determination Profile (/SAPAPO/VS16)), for example:

- Planning horizon

- Strategy

- Sort criteria

- Selection criteria (for example, with regard to vehicle resources and transportation service providers)

- Conditions

The following options are available for calling dynamic route determination:

- Automatically from the ERP system (when creating or changing sales orders)Note:To use the function from the ERP system, you need SAP R/3 4.6C or higher.

- Interactively from the planning view (transaction /SAPAPO/VS01) in TP/VS

- In the background using the transaction Schedule Dynamic Route Determination Run(transaction /SAPAPO/VS08)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 37

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Note:These two functions replace the previous function "Autorelease". For this reason, the tab page withthis name has been deleted from the optimization profile.You configure the route determination profile to be used in the optimization profile on the Generaltab page.

- In simulation mode in the transaction Simulate Dynamic Route Determination (transaction/SAPAPO/VS18)

Note:

Dynamic route determination provides shipment proposals as the result. No ERP route is determined.


You activate dynamic route determination in Customizing for TP/VS under Dynamic RouteDetermination -> Activate Dynamic Route Determination. Several IMG activities are available under thenode Dynamic Route Determination with which you can define your own strategies and methods fordynamic route determination. Several BAdIs are also available under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for TP/VS-> Dynamic Route Determination to connect customer-specific solutions.

See also

Note also the release note Using Dynamic Route Determination.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Dynamic Route Determination.

3.4.4.11 SCM-APO-VS-BF Basic Functions

3.4.4.11.1 Definition of Customer-Specific Alerts (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define customer-specific alerts for freight units, shipments, andtransportation tendering.


To define customer-specific alerts, choose the IMG activity Define Customer-Specific Alerts inCustomizing for Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 38

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.4.11.2 Overriding the Ship-To Address (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the overriding of ship-to addresses is completely supported in the TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component. It offers the following advantages:

- One-time addresses for ship-to parties can be transferred automatically from the ERP system to SAPAdvanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO). In SAP APO, a temporary location is createdwith this address (existing addresses can also be used again). This location is automatically assignedto a transportation zone.

- In the TP/VS component, this location and the transportation lane from this location to thetransportation zone are used as the basis for planning.

- When you access planning, you can use the ship-to address as a selection criterion.

- One-time addresses are dealt with in the same way as standard locations/addresses.

System Prerequisite:

- You have installed SAP R/3 4.6C or higher (ERP system). You must implement SAP Note 842759for the following releases:

- SAP R/3 Release 4.6C

- SAP R/3 Enterprise Release 4.70

- SAP ERP Central Component 5.0

- The freight cost simulation in the ERP system with one-time addresses based on sales orders is onlypossible as of SAP R/3 Release 4.6C. For more information, see SAP Note 868042.

3.4.4.11.3 Control of Scheduling ERP Shipments in liveCache (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can control whether ERP shipments are to be scheduled in liveCache. If youspecify that they are not to be scheduled, they are posted to an exclusion table, instead of a resource toexclude the assigned deliveries from any further planning. The shipments are not displayed in theplanning view (transaction /SAPAPO/VS01). For more information, see Do Not Schedule ERP Shipmentsin liveCache.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 39

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


In Customizing for the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component under BasicSettings -> Basic Settings for Vehicle Scheduling, set the Do Not Schedule ERP Shipments indicator,as required.

3.4.4.11.4 Planning Based on Shipping Points (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can plan on the basis of shipping points in the Transportation Planning/VehicleScheduling (TP/VS) component.

As of SAP ERP Central Component 6.0, shipping points are integrated in the CIF (APO Core Interface)integration model and are transferred to SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO). In SAPAPO, a location of the type shipping point is created. For more information, see the release noteIntegration of Shipping Points.

In TP/VS, shipping points are taken into account as source locations during transportation planning. Youcan use shipping points to filter orders in the optimization profile.

In TP/VS, you can also perform planning on the basis of shipping points in lower ERP releases, if thefollowing prerequisites are fulfilled:

- You have installed SAP R/3 release 4.6C or higher and Plug-In 2004.1 SP10.

- You have created a location of the type shipping point in SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization(SAP APO) and have manually entered values in table /SAPAPO/LOCMAP (mapping between ERPshipping point and SAP APO location).


To specify that you want to use shipping points as source locations, set the Use Shipping Point asSource Location indicator in Customizing for TP/VS under Basic Settings -> Basic Settings for VehicleScheduling.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 40

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.4.11.5 Means of Transport (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, several new fields are available for defining means of transport in the TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component:

- Ext. MTr (external means of transport)You can assign multiple shipments to an external vehicle resource, in other words, a vehicle resourcethat is assigned to an external means of transport. This is recommended, for example, if thetransportation service provider has multiple vehicles of this means of transport. In this case, theexternal vehicle resource is used as a template for the physical vehicles. For more information, seeExternal Means of Transport.

- ExtVehRes. (number of external vehicle resources)The number of external vehicle resources defines the maximum number of shipments that can beassigned to this vehicle resource at the same time. If you do not specify the number of vehicleresources, it means that any number of shipments can be assigned to this vehicle resource at thesame time. External vehicle resources are also taken into account during dynamic routedetermination. For more information, see Number of External Vehicle Resources and the releasenote Dynamic Route Determination.

- Sup. MTr (superordinate means of transport)You use superordinate means of transport to define hierarchical relationships between means oftransport. For more information, see Superordinate Means of Transport.


To define means of transport, in Customizing for SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO),choose Master Data -> Transportation Lane -> Maintain Means of Transport or TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Basic Settings -> Maintain Means of Transport.

3.4.4.12 SCM-APO-VS-OPT Vehicle Scheduling Optimization

3.4.4.12.1 Cost Profile (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define the following additional costs and constraints in the cost profile ofthe Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component:

- Load costs based on means of transport

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 41

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Cost functions for modeling load costs

- Wait times based on means of transport for each location

- Cost factors based on means of transport to weight earliness costs and delay costs

- A maximum waiting time for each location based on means of transport

3.4.4.12.2 Optimization Profile (Enhanced)

Use

The following changes were made to the optimization profile in SAP SCM 5.0:

- The Autorelease tab page was deleted. The function was moved to the "Dynamic RouteDetermination" function. The relevant fields can now be found on the General tab page. For moreinformation, see the release note Dynamic Route Determination.

- The TSP Selection tab page was added. It offers several fields in which you can define parametersand make settings for the transportation service provider selection (TSP selection). For moreinformation, see the release note Transportation Service Provider Selection.

- The Additional tab page was deleted:

- The Planning Board Profile and Display Incompatibilities fields can now be found on theGeneral tab page.

- The other fields were deleted.

- The lock concept was changed. Planning objects are now no longer locked automatically when youcall interactive planning. Instead, they are only locked when you are processing them. If you want toactivate the previous logic, set the Lock All Objects for Planning indicator.

- You can now retain planned shipments during optimization, in other words, the system does notdelete planned shipments that already existed before the optimization run during optimization. Itupdates these shipments if, during optimization, additional orders were scheduled on the samevehicle or orders were removed from the shipment. You activate this function by setting the KeepExisting Shipments indicator.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 42

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.4.12.3 TP/VS-Specific Resources in the Location Master (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define loading resources (inbound/outbound) and opening times for eachmeans of transport. Moreover, you can define these resources separately for the inbound process andoutbound process.

For this purpose, the Resources field was added to the Additional Resources group box on theResources tab page.

When selecting the suitable resource, the system takes into account hierarchical relationships betweenmeans of transport.

The system takes into account loading resources (inbound/outbound) and opening times duringoptimization in the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component.

3.4.4.13 SCM-APO-VS-INS Interactive VS

3.4.4.13.1 New Fields in Interactive Planning (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following new fields are available in the planning view in interactive planning(transaction /SAPAPO/VS01):

- Remove (for shipping activities)

- Weight and volume (for shipping activities)

- Source location address and destination location address (for freight units and shipment stages)Note:These fields are also displayed in other planning transactions.

- Planning status of deliveries (for freight units)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 43

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Resource utilization (in %) and resource utilization dimension (in shipment view)

- Empty runs (in all views)

3.4.4.13.2 Optimization (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, additional options are available when calling the optimizer in the planning view ofinteractive planning (transaction /SAPAPO/VS01):

- You can execute optimization for individual selected objects, for example, for orders, shipments, orvehicle resources.

- You can execute optimization in the background, in other words, you can start optimization withoutcalling the optimization UI.

- You can define the number of iterations for the optimization, in other words, if you enter the value 1,the system ends the optimization run after creating the initial solution.

- You can change the planning horizon when calling the optimizer interactively.

- You can use Change Shipment Fixing to exclude planned shipments from the optimization run.

3.4.4.13.3 Manual Overloading of Resources (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can violate capacity restrictions for vehicles in manual planning. In thesesituations, an alert can be written (Shipment: resource is overloaded).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 44

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.4.14 SCM-APO-VS-CAS Selection of Transportation Service Provider

3.4.4.14.1 Transportation Service Provider Selection (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, the transportation service provider selection (TSP selection) was redesigned. It nowoffers the following new functions:

- Optimization is now executed by a stand-alone optimizer.

- During automatic TSP selection, continuous moves can be created. The continuous moveidentification is displayed in the shipment view of the planning view (/SAPAPO/VS01). It specifiesthat a shipment belongs to a continuous move.

- You can now also define transportation allocations for location transportation lanes and intrazonelanes. The system also takes into account transportation allocations for hierarchical relationshipsbetween means of transport. This allows you to use capacity restrictions in conjunction with variousbuckets (at means of transport level).

- You can transfer freight costs (as external costs) that were distributed to the shipments in acontinuous move as well as the continuous move identification to the ERP system.

- The TSP profile was deleted. You now define some of the parameters for the TSP selection in thetransportation lane. A separate transaction is available for this Define Transportation Lanes forTSP Selection (/SAPAPO/SCC_TL5). The system now gets the remaining parameters, forexample, locations and selection period, from the optimization profile.To be able to continue to use the parameters that you defined in TSP profiles in previous releases,you must use the report Perform Upgrade of TSP Selection Parameters (/SAPAPO/VS09) totransfer them to the relevant transportation lanes.

- In the location master for the transportation service provider, the Break Duration indicator wasdeleted. Instead, you can now define arrival and departure windows in the transportation lane.In the Perform Upgrade of TSP Selection Parameters report, you can specify in the Copy BreakDuration from Location Master field that the break durations defined in the location master for allrelevant transportation lanes are to be copied to the arrival window in the transportation lane as themaximum value.

- A new tab page, TSP Selection, is now available in the optimization profile. You can use this tabpage to define additional parameters for the TSP selection.

Notes:

- In the case of the Business Share strategy, shipments that have already been transferred to the ERPsystem are not taken into account.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 45

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The use of the continuous move function is release-dependent:

- ERP 2005: The continuous move information can be found on one of the new tab pages in thetransactions VT01N, VT02N, and VT03N.If you use these transactions regularly, we recommend, for performance reasons, that you usetable VTTK with an additional index with the key CM_IDENT as the selection criterion.

- Plug-In 2004.1: You can display the continuous move information in transaction VTCM. If youalso want to display the continuous move identification from the TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component in transactions VT02N/VT03N, you canspecify in Customizing the customer field that the system is to fill with the continuous moveidentification. To do so, in Customizing, choose Integration with Other SAP Components ->Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Application-Specific Settings and Enhancements -> Enhancements for Shipments -> Define Field for APO Continuous Moves.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Transportation Service Provider Selection.

3.4.4.15 SCM-APO-VS-MAP Integration

3.4.4.15.1 Control Rules (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use control rules to specify which actions are to be performed for shipmentsin the Transportation Planning/ Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component when you change the relevantorders in the ERP system. The following actions are possible:

- Adjust shipment

- Invalidate shipment

- Deallocate order (with or without capacity check)

By default, the system does not change the shipments (in other words, no invalidation).

A new alert has also be created for these situations Order was changed in OLTP.).

The transaction Define Control Rules (/SAPAPO/VS80) is available for defining control rules.

By using conditions, you can define different control rules for different orders or shipment attributes. Formore information, see the release note Conditions.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 46

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Transportation Management -> TransportationPlanning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) -> Control Rule.

3.4.5 SCM-APO-SNP Supply Network Planning (SNP)

3.4.5.1 Aggregated Planning (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, Supply Network Planning (SNP) has supported the hierarchical planning process. Thisprocess, now referred to as aggregated planning in SAP SCM 5.0, has been significantly enhanced. Inaddition, the process for planning with aggregated resources is also available.

Aggregated Planning

Aggregated planning supports planning scenarios in which you carry out heuristic- or optimization-basedplanning at header location product level of a location product hierarchy. You then disaggregate theplanning result to the individual sub products of this two-level hierarchy. Aggregated planning has beenenhanced with the following functions:

- Aggregated Safety Stock PlanningYou carry out safety stock planning based on aggregated data as a preliminary step before actualSNP planning. Up to now, you had to define the required master and historical data at header level.As of SCM 5.0, you can have the system automatically aggregate some of this data from the sublevelto the header level.

- Single-Level Supply and Demand MappingYou can use this new function before you execute aggregated planning in Supply Network Planning(SNP) to assign receipts that are directly assigned to a location product with a transportation lane tothe corresponding demands. You can thus prevent the system from assigning receipts to the wrongdemands during aggregated planning, due to detailed information no longer being available ataggregated level.

- AggregationYou can use this function after aggregated planning and subsequent SNP disaggregation to aggregatethe created stock transfers and planned orders back to header level. This is useful if you want tomake changes for specific location products at header level, for example.

- SNP DisaggregationThis function has been enhanced in SAP SCM 5.0 with the following options:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 47

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Disaggregation methods: Disaggregation according to quota arrangements is now available.You can also combine this new method with the already existing method of disaggregationaccording to demands.

- Disaggregation modes: You can specify how the system processes the orders within a certainperiod (bucket) during disaggregation. You can choose between period-based(bucket-oriented) disaggregation and order-based disaggregation.

Planning with Aggregated Resources

In this planning process, you carry out heuristic-based or optimization-based planning at aggregatedresource level, that is at header resource level of a resource hierarchy. You then disaggregate the result tothe subresources. This enables you to use resources evenly and achieve better performance, for example.

The new resource disaggregation function is now available for disaggregating the resource consumptionfrom the header resource to the subresources. It disaggregates the existing planned orders that cause theresource consumption of the header resource to new orders that consume the subresources.

Special Planning Book

The standard planning book delivered for hierarchical planning 9ASNPHRPL with data views SNPHRPLand SNPHRPL(2) has been renamed and enhanced. For aggregated planning, the standard planning book9ASNPAGGR is now available with data views SNPAGGR(1) and SNPAGGR(2) based on the standardplanning area 9ASNP02. Standard hierarchy structures are already assigned to the standard planning area.


As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system takes order groups into account during aggregation and disaggregation.You can define in Customizing for SNP under Basic Settings -> Maintain Global SNP Settingswhether or not you want the system to use order groups. The default value is Do not use order group, sothe system's behavior has not changed.

See also

For more information, see the SNP documentation in the SAP Library under Supply Network PlanningRun -> Aggregated Planning or Planning with Aggregated Resources.

3.4.5.2 SNP Heuristic: Direct Delivery (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, a process with direct delivery (for example, from the production plant to thecustomer) is available for heuristic-based planning in Supply Network Planning (SNP). You canspecify that certain products are to be preferred for direct delivery from a production location to acustomer location. There is no detour via a distribution center.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 48

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In the master data you flag the transportation lanes for which you want to specify a direct delivery. Thenyou execute a location heuristic. Using the Transport Load Builder (TLB), the system then checks whichproduct quantities can be delivered with which means of transport via the flagged transportation lanes.The system covers any remaining quantities using the normal source determination.

Multiple Selection in Interactive Planning

Up to now, you could only select one object for heuristic-based planning in the interactive SNP planningshuffler. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can select several objects in the shuffler for the direct delivery process,as well as for general heuristic-based planning processes. This enables you, for example, to interactivelyexecute the location heuristic for several location products at the same time. This is necessary in the directdelivery process so that the TLB can correctly determine the composition of transport loads.


In Customizing for SNP under Basic Settings -> Maintain Global SNP Settings, specify whether you wantthe SNP heuristic to consider direct deliveries via flagged transportation lanes. The default value is NoDirect Delivery, which is the same as the SAP SCM 4.1 system standard.

See also

For more information, see the SNP documentation in the SAP Library under SNP Planning Run ->Heuristic-Based Planning-> Direct Delivery from Production Plant to Customer.

3.4.5.3 Parallel Processing Profile (Enhanced)

Use

You could previously determine a parallel processing profile for various Supply Network Planning(SNP) applications (for example, SNP heuristic and SNP optimizer). To improve the performance ofbackground jobs, it is often useful to execute them in several parallel processes. Using the parallelprocessing profile you can determine how the background jobs are to be divided up into parallelprocesses. You can enter the number of processes running in parallel, the number of objects perprocessing block, and the server group.

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can also define parallel processing profiles for the following application areas:

- Deployment heuristic

- Transport Load Builder (TLB)

- Consistency check

- Initialization of SNP planning areas (only available previously for DP Planning areas)

- Delta initialization of master data

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 49

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You define the parallel processing profile for the individual applications in SNP Customizing underProfile -> Define Parallel Processing Profile . You then enter the defined profile on each screen forexecution of the application in the background.

For the delta initialization of master data that the system executes in the background at the start of all SNPplanning runs (for example, SNP heuristic and SNP optimizer), you can enter a previously defined parallelprocessing profile in the SNP Customizing <DS:SIMG.APO_SNP_GLOB >Basic Settings-> Global SNPSettings Maintenance

3.4.5.4 SNP Heuristic: Consideration of the Resource Calendar (New)

Use

Up to now, the heuristic in Supply Network Planning (SNP) has considered the production calendar ofthe location in order to determine the validity of the source of supply when planning in-house productionprocesses. However, when creating planned orders the system used the calendar of the calendar resource.This sometimes caused discrepancies between the planning of receipts and the creation of planned orders.For example, the heuristic would plan a receipt on a certain day, but could not create the planned orderdue to restrictions of the resource calendar.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify that the SNP heuristic is to consider the calendar of the calendarresource during planning as well as when creating planned orders. If no resource calendar is available, thesystem uses the production calendar.


You specify that you want the system to consider the resource calendar in Customizing for SNP underBasic Settings -> Maintain Global SNP Settings in the Heu: Resource Cal. field. The default value isNo Consideration, which is the same as the SAP SCM 4.1 system standard.

3.4.5.5 Consideration of the Goods Receipt Processing Time (Changed)

Use

Up to now, you have been able to specify in Customizing for Supply Network Planning (SNP) that thesystem is to consider the goods receipt processing time defined in the location product master whencreating SNP planned orders and when determining the production process model (PPM) or the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 50

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

production data structure (PDS). To determine the exact goods receipt processing time, the system usedthe calendar of the calendar resource specified in the PPM or PDS. This was valid for the SNP heuristic,capacity leveling, and the SNP optimizer.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system considers the goods receipt processing time (if you have made the settingin Customizing) only when creating SNP planned orders. When determining the PPM or the PDS, thesystem does not consider the goods receipt processing time, regardless of your setting in Customizing.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system uses the calendar of the handling-in resource defined in the location toschedule the goods receipt processing time. If ahandling-in resource does not exist, the system uses thereceiving calendar defined in the location.


You specify that the system is to consider goods receipt processing time in Customizing for SNP underBasic Settings -> Maintain Global SNP Settings in the Goods Rcpt field.

3.4.5.6 SCM-APO-SNP-OPT SNP Plan Optimization

3.4.5.6.1 Consideration of Scheduled and Deallocated PP/DS Planned Orders(Changed)

Use

Up to now, planned orders whose activities were flagged by Production Planning and DetailedScheduling (PP/DS) with the status scheduled or deallocated were considered by Supply NetworkPlanning (SNP) in capacity leveling and during optimization-based planning. Scheduled planned ordersare fixed temporally. Deallocated orders are not fixed, which means they can be postponed and thereforehave less significance for planning. SNP does not use the status actively, but it is relevant to be able todetermine the resource load (capacity utilization of the resource) correctly.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify in Customizing for SNP whether scheduled and deallocated plannedorders or only scheduled planned orders are to be considered. If you want only the scheduled orders to beconsidered, the deallocated orders do not consume the capacity of the resource.


You specify that you want the system to consider scheduled and deallocated planned orders in

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 51

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Customizing for SNP under Basic Settings -> Maintain Global SNP Settings in the SNP: Deall.Activ.field. The default value is Consider Scheduled and Deallocated Activities, which is the same as theSAP SCM 4.1 system standard.

3.4.5.6.2 Explanation Tool and Result Indicators for Optimization Results (New)

Use

Up to now, you have been able to call up a log for an optimization run in Supply Network Planning(SNP) that contains the results of the run, for example the created orders. However, these results were notalways easy to understand.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the log also contains result indicators that display the quality of the optimizationsolution, for example, the service level achieved. In addition, an explanation tool is now available for twosignificant exceptional situations of an optimization-based plan: non-deliveries and shortfall of safetystock.

Result Indicators

The optimization run log contains indicators referring to the following factors:

- Demand fulfillment

- Warehouse stock

- Resource load (capacity utilization of the resource)

The system calculates the result indicators at the level of the entire model and the individual locationproducts.

For more information, see the SNP documentation in the SAP Library under SNP-Planning Run ->Optimization-Based Planning -> Application Logs for Optimizers -> Result Indicators.

Explanation Tool

This function shows you in the optimization run log, the possible causes for the exceptional situationsmentioned above, and suggests the orders that you could use to solve these problems.

Among other things, you can specify the location products for which you want the explanation, and howdetailed it should be.

You can start the explanation tool in the Optimizer Log Data transaction for a specific optimization run.If you want to execute the tool in the background, you can also call it from the SAP Easy AccessScreen (choose Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Network Planning -> Reporting-> Explanation of Optimization Results).

For more information, see the SNP documentation in the SAP Library under SNP Planning Run ->Optimization-Based Planning -> Application Logs for Optimizers -> Explanation of OptimizationResults.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 52

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.5.6.3 Automatic Cost Generation for SNP and Deployment Optimizer (new)

Use

Costs play an essential role for optimization-based planning in Supply Network Planning (SNP). Theoptimizer selects the plan with the lowest total costs from all the permitted production and distributionplans.

Up to now you have been able to specify the costs for planning to the optimizer by defining the actualcosts or control costs in the master data. For the planner, however, the conversion of business goals intocontrol costs is not easy.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can easily generate all the control costs (that is, the cost model) relevant to theoptimizer by using the automatic cost generation function. The system generates these costs automaticallybased on the business goals you have defined. The system takes the following goals into account:

- Maximization of the service level

- Demand and product priorities

- Procurement priorities for sources of supply

The system also ensures the following properties of the generated cost model:

- The model has no anomalies (such as not covering a demand because of too low penalty costs fornon-delivery).

- The model is stable (in other words, the costs are independent of the period length, for example).

- The model is coherent (that is, the transportation costs increase proportionally to the transportationlength, for example).

In addition, you can use this function to quickly and easily create an optimization-based production plan.To create a finite (capacity-based) production plan, you only have to make a few extra settings (such asthe consideration of capacities).


You define the automatic cost generation and the business goals in the SNP or deployment optimizerprofile. You activate the function via a new indicator in the header data of the Customizing transaction.You define the goals on the new Automatic Cost Generation tab page.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 53

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

You can find further information in the SAP Library under Supply Network Planning -> SupplyNetwork Planning Run -> Optimization-Based Planning -> Automatic Cost Generation.

3.4.5.7 SCM-APO-SNP-INS Interactive SNP

3.4.5.7.1 Reference of a Key Figure to a Variable Planning Version (Enhanced)

Use

In earlier releases, it was already possible to define a reference for a key figure in a planning book to acertain planning version. If you plan in Supply Network Planning (SNP) with various planningversions, you can thus compare the planning results in interactive SNP planning.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can even define a reference to a variable planning version for a key figure. Youcan then select the desired planning version for this key figure in interactive SNP planning.

You define the reference to a variable planning version in the planning book settings on the Key FigureAttributes tab page. Then choose Settings -> Set Variable Planning Version in interactive SNPplanning.

3.4.5.8 SCM-APO-SNP-DPL Deployment

3.4.5.8.1 Consideration of Demand at the Source Location (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, the deployment heuristic in Supply Network Planning (SNP) considered only the demand atthe destination locations by default. You could, however, specify that the system should cover the demandat the source location first. You could also include the order categories for customer demand and/orplanned independent demand in the category group that the system uses to calculate theavailable-to-deploy quantity (ATD quantity).

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also specify that the system carries out fair share distribution of the ATDquantity to cover not only the demand at the source location, but also the distribution demand at thedestination locations. To do so, you can use two new fields in the master data of the source locationproduct (SNP2 tab page) to specify whether the system should consider customer demand or planned

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 54

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

independent demand.

New Planning Book

So that the system can carry out fair share distribution of the ATD quantity, you must execute thedeployment heuristic in the real time deployment mode by replanning the existing deployment stocktransfers.

In addition, you must use the planning area 9AVMI03 and the new planning book 9ADRP_FSS thatcontain the key figure Deployment Reservation Quantity (or use a planning area you have defined anda planning book with this key figure). In this key figure, the system saves the quantity it reserves for thedemand at the source location.

The system does not create orders for the demand at the source location, but rather saves the reservedquantity as information in a time series key figure. The system also does not support the integration ofdeployment reservation quantities in the ERP system or other systems.

Further Changes to the Deployment Heuristic

Up to now, you could only enter one source location on the screen for executing the deployment heuristic.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can select several source locations.

If you enter several source locations, the system sorts these locations according to products. The systemprocesses the location products of a product in the sequence of their low-level code.

See also

For more information see the SAP Library under Supply Network Planning -> Deployment ->Deployment Heuristic -> Consideration of Demands in the Source Location.

3.4.5.8.2 Explanation Tool and Result Indicators for Optimization Results (New)

Use



______________________________________________________________SAP AG 55

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Result Indicators



- Warehouse stock




Explanation Tool





3.4.5.9 SCM-APO-SNP-TLB Transport Load Builder

3.4.5.9.1 Interactive TLB Planning (Enhanced)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 56

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Change Mode and Display Mode

As of SAP SCM 5.0, a change mode and a display mode are available in interactive planning of thetransport load builder (TLB) just like in interactive SNP planning. You can switch between these twomodes. If you carry out planning for a means of transport in a transportation lane, this combination oftransportation lane and means of transport is locked for other users.

TLB Profile and Master Data Temporarily Changeable

Up to now, you could assign the TLB profile to a means of transport in a transportation lane. The settingsof the TLB profile were displayed in the dialog box in which you make settings for the interactive TLBrun. However, these settings and the displayed master data settings of the transportation lane could not bechanged.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can temporarily change TLB profile settings, for example the upper and lowerlimits for the TLB parameters, in this dialog box or you can select an alternative TLB profile. The changesare only valid for the current TLB session. In addition, you can temporarily change the following masterdata settings of the transportation lane :

- Pull-in horizon

- Loading method

- Shipment sizing threshold value

3.4.5.10 SCM-APO-SNP-SFT Safety Stock Planning

3.4.5.10.1 Extended Safety Stock Planning (Enhanced)

Use

It was previously possible to have the safety stock for your supply-chain model calculated automaticallyusing extended safety stock planning. In SAP SCM 5.0 safety stock planning has been greatly adapted.The interface is now more user friendly and new functions have been added, for example, consideration ofdemand category.

The following enhancements have been made:

- User Friendly InterfaceThe user interface for the extended saftey stock planning function is now clearer. Settings that rarelyhave to be changed were removed and put into a safety stock planning profile (SFT planningprofile).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 57

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- SFT Planning ProfileIn the new SFT planning profile you determine how the system calculates the replenishment leadtime (RLT) forecast and the RLT forecast error.To create the profile, on the SAP Easy Access choose Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Supply Network Planning -> Environment -> Current Settings -> Profile -> Define SFTPlanning Profile. When creating a new profile you are offered default values that correspond to thefeatures of SAP SCM 4.1. You can also use the SNP standard profile SAPDEFAULT that also hasthese default values.

- Direct Entry of the RLT in Master DataPreviously the system calculated the RLT using historical data that you provided as key figures. Asof SAP SCM 5.0 you can also enter the RLT directly in the location product master data (tab pageLot Size). In the SFT planning profile you can set whether or not the system calculates the RLT oruses the value from the master data.

- Demand CategoryPreviously you could only use extended safety stock planning if the demand was regular. As of SAPSCM 5.0 you can determine in the SFT planning profile if the demand is regular or sporadic. Youcan also get the system to calculate the demand category automatically using historical data.

- Minimum and Maximum Safety StockAs of SAP SCM 5.0 you can determine a minimum and maximum safety stock in the locationproduct master data (tab page Lot Size). The safety stock values calculated by the system must notbe less or more than the values in the master data.

- New BAdIAs of SAP SCM 5.0 you can use the Business Add In (BAdI) /SAPAPO/SNP_ADV_SFT toinfluence the functions of extended safety stockplanning. The following methods are available:

- GET_PROFILE: Change the settings of the SFT planning profile for individual locationproducts.

- GET_LEADTIME: Provide RLT for individual location products.

- GET_FORECAST_ERROR: Provide relative forecast error of demand and RLT for individuallocation products.

- CALC_SAFETY_STOCK: Change of input data of available safety stock formulas orimplementation of own formulas.

See also

For more information, see the SAP library under Supply Network Planning -> Safety Stock Planning-> Extended Safety Stock Planning.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 58

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.5.11 SCM-APO-SNP-CAP Capacity Leveling

3.4.5.11.1 Consideration of Scheduled and Deallocated PP/DS Planned Orders(Changed)

Use

Up to now, planned orders whose activities were flagged by Production Planning and DetailedScheduling (PP/DS) with the status scheduled or deallocated were considered by Supply NetworkPlanning (SNP) in capacity leveling and during optimization-based planning. Scheduled planned ordersare fixed temporally. Deallocated orders are not fixed, which means they can be postponed and thereforehave less significance for planning. SNP does not use the status actively, but it is relevant to be able todetermine the resource load (capacity utilization of the resource) correctly.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify in Customizing for SNP whether scheduled and deallocated plannedorders or only scheduled planned orders are to be considered. If you want only the scheduled orders to beconsidered, the deallocated orders do not consume the capacity of the resource.


You specify that you want the system to consider scheduled and deallocated planned orders inCustomizing for SNP under Basic Settings -> Maintain Global SNP Settings in the SNP: Deall.Activ.field. The default value is Consider Scheduled and Deallocated Activities, which is the same as theSAP SCM 4.1 system standard.

3.4.5.11.2 Capacity Leveling: Consideration of Alternative Resources(Enhanced)

Use

Until now you could use capacity leveling in Supply Network Planning (SNP) to level the load ofresources by deexpediting orders that lead to a capacity overload of resources to earlier or later periods.

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can also deexpedite orders to alternative resources, that is, to alternativeproduction process models (PPMs) or production data structures (PDS) that use alternative resources. Indoing so the system only uses the free capacity of these resources and does not create new capacityoverload. The sequence of use is according to the procurement priority of the PPM or the PDS.

Use of alternative resources is restricted to production resources.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 59

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

New Fields to Enter Alternative Resources

You can enter the alternative resources that the system is to consider both on the screen for execution ofcapacity leveling in the background, and in the dialog box for interactive execution of capacity leveling.

See also

For more infomation, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) ->SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -> Supply Network Planning -> SNPPlanning Run Heuristic Based Planning -> Capacity Leveling -> Consideration of AlternativeResources.

3.4.6 SCM-APO-SDM Multilevel Supply & Demand Matching

3.4.6.1 SCM-APO-SDM-CTM Capable-to-Match

3.4.6.1.1 Aggregated Planning with Capable-to-Match (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can carry out aggregated planning in Capable-to-Match while taking hierarchystructures into account. For example, you can execute a CTM planning run for capacity planning andsource determination at header location product level of a location product hierarchy.

Aggregated planning with CTM comprises the following functions:

- Single- or Multi-Level Supply and Demand MappingYou carry out this function at sub location product level in a separate CTM planning run beforeaggregation. In this planning run, CTM consumes all existing receipts and supplies of the sublocation products and does not create any new orders. As a result, CTM creates fixed or dynamicpegging relationships between the receipts and demands. CTM uses the existing receipts andsupplies that do not have dynamic pegging relationships later on in the CTM run for fulfillingdemands in aggregated planning.

- Aggregation and PlanningCTM uses the location product hierarchy to determine all the receipts and demands from the subproducts and assigns them to the receipts and demands for the header product. CTM raises every subproduct order required for planning to header level. CTM then creates planning for the headerlocation product.

After CTM planning, you disaggregate the planning result for the header location product to the sublocation products. To do so, use SNP disaggregation.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 60

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For more information about SNP disaggregation, see therelease information for aggregated planning withSNP

3.4.6.1.2 Explanation Function and Results Indicators in Capable-to-Match(New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can see an explanation in the application logs after a CTM planning run as towhy CTM did not cover or only partially covered demands. An explanation function with an explanationprofile is available for this.

You activate the explanation function in the CTM profile on the Settings -> Technical Settings tabpage, under Logs -> Generate Planning Explanation, by setting the Use Planning Explanationindicator and then specifying an explanation profile.

In addition, you can see the following results indicators in the log:

- Demand fulfillment per location product and demand type

- Sources of supply used per location product

- Resource utilization

You activate the results indicators in the CTM profile on the Settings -> Technical Settings tab page,under Logs -> Generate Results Indicator, by selecting desired the results indicator.

You can transfer the results indicator for demand fulfillment with the DataSource()APO_SDM_INDC_DEMSAT to SAP NetWeaver 2004s Usage Type Business Intelligence.

3.4.6.1.3 Capable-to-Match (CTM) (Enhanced)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 61

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following enhancements are available in Capable-to-Match (CTM):

CTM Planning with Rules

During rules-based planning, CTM now takes the product substitutions into account that you defined inthe master data for product and location interchangeability.

CTM Master Data Consistency Check

If you want to carry out a consistency check of the master data that CTM is to take into account duringplanning, you can now have any messages that occur be displayed as a list on the screen and you can savethem in the application log.

Master Data Selection

The function in master data selection for selecting dependent master data has been enhanced. Thisfunction was previously called Generating Master Data and is now called Selection of DependentMaster Data.

You can use this function if you want the system to select all master data that is related to a certainlocation product or source of supply. You can also select the master data manually, that is, directly in theprocessing of the master data selection. The result of the selection is static and you can then save it withthis master data selection. You can also have the system automatically select the master data, whichmeans that CTM waits to select the master data until the data is needed, for example during the CTMplanning run.

SAP-APO Master Data

In addition to production resources, CTM now also considers transportation resources, handlingresources, and calendar resources.

Parallel Processing

CTM can now form independent submodels from the supply chain model and carry out an independentplanning run for each submodel. Each submodel contains a specific number of location products includingtheir sources of supply.

Product Interchangeability

CTM now supports planning with form-fit-function classes (FFF classes) in addition to simplediscontinuation of products.

Sources of Supply for External Procurement

CTM now also considers purchasing info records as sources of supply for external procurement.

Quota Arrangement

If you have set the Reqmt Splitting indicator in the quota arrangement maintenance, CTM splits ademand if necessary, to achieve the quota arrangement specified. CTM still does not, however, take anyother specifications for demand splitting into account.

Enable Product Substitution for Stock Transport Requisitions in ATP

Backorder processing currently supports product substitution for stock transport orders, but not for stocktransport requisitions. However, you can set up the CTM planning run such that CTM creates thecorresponding product substitution orders so that the ATP check can then confirm the demands of the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 62

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

stock transport requisitions against these product substitution orders.

For this, set the Enable Prod. Substit. for Stk Transp. Requisition in ATP indicator in the CTMprofile.

Advice Code

You can transfer orders that contain advice code information from SAP ECC Enterprise ExtensionDefense Forces & Public Security 6.0 (EA-DFP 600) to SAP SCM and plan them in CTM. The EnterpriseExtension must be activated.

The prerequisite is that you transfer the advice codes including their settings that you made inCustomizing for EA-DFP 600 to the SAP SCM system. For more information, see the ImplementationGuide (IMG) for Capable-to-Match (CTM) under Specify Advice Code.

Supply Chain Viewer

To be able to use the functions of the supply chain viewer in an accessible way, you use the product view(/SAPAPO/RRP3) instead of the supply chain viewer (/SAPAPO/CTMVIEWER).

3.4.6.1.4 Build Up Safety Stock in CTM (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, Capable-to-Match (CTM) has additional functions for building up safety stock (upto now, these functions were available as planning parameter SSTOCK_MODE ). You can find thefollowing functions in the CTM profile on the Supplies tab page under Supply Control.

- Do Not Plan DemandsWith this function, CTM directly builds up safety stock without planning demands first. That wayyou can plan demands and safety stock with two CTM profiles that have different settings, forexample.

- Consider Supply ShortageThis function defines how CTM is to build up safety stock for a partially fulfilled demand.If you do not set this indicator, CTM builds up safety stock for the partial quantity of a demand thatcan be fulfilled by a receipt.If you set this indicator, CTM builds up safety stock for the entire quantity of a partially fulfilleddemand.If you implement aggregated planning with CTM at header product level and have set the Build UpSafety Stock indicator, this function is automatically activated. That means that CTM builds upsafety stock for the entire quantity of the demand at header product level, since no information

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 63

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

regarding partially fulfilled demands at sub product level is available to CTM.

You can also combine the Do Not Plan Demands and Consider Supply Shortage functions.That way you can plan demands and safety stock together in one planning step, for example, to plantime-dependent or decreasing safety stock. This is only valid for make-to-stock production, however.During this planning, CTM does not consider any other order-specific prioritization criteria otherthan the demand date (such as ATP category).

- Stock is AvailableIf you do not set this indicator, CTM automatically uses the available stock for building up safetystock.If you set this indicator, CTM decides whether to use the available stock or to generate new receiptsfor building up safety stock.

3.4.7 SCM-APO-FCS Demand Planning

3.4.7.1 Key Figure Properties for DP Planning Areas (Enhanced)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can use new key figure properties when creating and changing a planning area forDemand Planning (DP). In addition, you can even change most of the key figure properties for initializedplanning areas.

New Key Figure Properties for Creating and Changing a Planning Area

You can make the following new settings for each key figure of a planning area:

- Accuracy of a key figure (number of decimal places)

- Key figure type

- Neg. not allowed indicator

- Fixable Zero indicator

- Zero allowed indicator

- Cannot Change Past indicator

Changing Key Figure Properties for Initialized Planning Areas

Up to now, you could only change a few key figure properties in planning areas that were already

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 64

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

initialized. These included, for example, the setting for time-based disaggregation and the calculationtype. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also change the following key figure properties for an initializedplanning area:

- Time-based disaggregation

- Time-based disaggregation key figure

- Calculation type for a key figure

- Accuracy of a key figure (number of decimal places)

- Key figure type

- Neg. not allowed indicator

- Fixable Zero indicator

- Zero allowed indicator

- Cannot Change Past indicator

- InfoCube

You can conveniently make these settings in planning area maintenance. On the Change Planning Areascreen, choose Extras -> Key Figure Settings.

In addition, you can add or delete key figures. However, you can only delete key figures that are no longerused in planning books, data views, macros, or demand forecasts. To find out where a specific key figureis used, see the where-used list.

NOTE: Only experienced users should be allowed to delete key figures or change key figure properties ininitialized planning areas. If you make changes here, the time series objects have to be adjusted directly inliveCache and in the database. Since these changes are time-consuming, we recommend that you make thechanges to key figure properties in the background.

All the changes in the planning area are logged.

You can transport the planning area changes to a target system in which the planning area is alreadyinitialized.


If inconsistencies occur when saving the key figure properties in liveCache, you can check and repairthem with report /SAPAPO/TS_LCM_CONS_CHECK.

3.4.7.2 BI Authorization Concept in Demand Planning (DP)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 65

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Demand Planning in SAP SCM 5.0 uses the current authorization concept of SAP NetWeaver 2004sUsage Type Business Intelligence 7.0 (BI). Since the authorization concept has changed since BusinessInformation Warehouse (BW) 3.5, the restrictions of the upgrade process from BI 3.5 to BI 7.0 also applyto the upgrade process from SAP SCM 4.1 to SAP SCM 5.0. These include the following:

- An automatic upgrade of BW authorizations to BI analysis authorizations is not possible. However,a migration help is available.

- Manual adjustments are necessary during the upgrade from SAP SCM 4.1 to SAP SCM 5.0. Theprocedure is described in detail in the upgrade guides and in the upgrade note 853797.

3.4.7.3 Change Mode for Key Figures (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, various change modes are available in Demand Planning (DP), which you can use tomonitor the value changes in key figures. With the implementation of the change modes, the logic forfixing and unfixing key figures, for example, has changed completely.

You can configure the change mode you want to use in macro definitions and in planning areamaintenance in the forecast settings for forecast key figures.

The following change modes are available:

Change Modes in Macro Definitions

- Change modes for fixable key figures:

- Value changeHere you can select whether the system is to consider or adjust existing fixings. If you want thesystem to adjust the fixing, it also changes the values that are fixed.

- Value change with subsequent fixingHere you can select whether the system is to consider or adjust existing fixings. Subsequently,the system fixes all the cells that are not fixed and in which values have changed.

- Value change with previous unfixingFirst the system unfixes the cells and then changes the values.

- RedisaggregationThe system disaggregates the key figure value again. It takes value changes and existing fixingsinto account.

- Attribute change (such as background color)

- Change modes for non-fixable key figures:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 66

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Value change

- Redisaggregation

- Attribute change

Change Modes for Forecast Key Figures:

- Take into Account Fixings

- Take into Account Fixings, Fix Previously Unfixed Values

- Adjust Fixings, Fix Previously Unfixed Values

- Cancel Fixing


If you want to keep the logic for fixing and unfixing key figure values from SAP SCM 4.1, work incompatibility mode. You can switch on the compatibility mode for each individual macro book. Werecommend, however, not to use the compatibility mode and to implement a new logic, which meansadjusting existing macros. In certain cases, the compatibility mode can lead to a degradation inperformance. In addition, the compatibility mode does not support fixed zero values nor thedifferentiation between initial and 0 values.


An upgrade assistant is available, which can help you deactivate the compatibility mode, for example.

See also

Release information Differentiation of Initial Values and 0 Values

3.4.7.4 Demand Combination (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use demand combination to compare forecast key figures of a planningbook period by period according to certain criteria and then transfer the determined key figure values to acombined result key figure. Demand combination can compare forecast key figures based on differenttime horizons and forecast levels and originating from different demand planning applications. For eachperiod of a specified time frame, demand combination transfers the determined key figure value from therespective demand planning application to the result key figure.

Demand combination consists of the following:

- Master data maintenance for demand combinationIn the master data maintenance, you specify the criteria that you want the system to use to compare

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 67

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the key figures from the different demand planning applications.

- Demand combination runYou can execute the subsequent demand combination run directly in interactive demand planning orin the background. You can see the result of the run in the planning book.

If you want to use demand combination to analyze forecast data from Demand Planning (DP) andResponsive Replenishment (RR), you can consolidate the data from these applications in SAPNetWeaver Usage Type Business Intelligence.


To be able to create the master data for demand combination, you must make the following settings in theImplementation Guide (IMG) for demand combination:

- Define the demand combination horizon that the system is to consider for the evaluation. For this, dothe following step: Make General Settings

- Define new activity parameters that you want to use for defining the demand combination masterdata. For this, do the following step: Specify Activity Parameters

- Define new activity classes that you want to use for defining the demand combination master data.For this, do the following step:Specify Activity Classes

3.4.7.5 Combined Forecast (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the combined forecast functions have been enhanced as follows:

- You can adopt the result of one forecast profile as the final result.Prerequisites:

- The forecast profile must be part of a combined forecast profile.

- The final result is the result of one single profile that uses a method with the smallest errors(method with the smallest MAD, MAPE, MPE, and so on). You have defined these in thecombined forecast profile.

- You can save the combined ex-post forecast in a predefined key figure within the combined forecast.The system uses the key figure that you have defined as the ex-post key figure for the univariateforecast.You can now define this key figure in planning area maintenance under Extras -> ForecastSettings.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 68

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.7.6 Forecast Horizon and History Horizon (Changed)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define the forecast and history horizons in the forecast profile in DemandPlanning (DP) more flexibly. Up to now, you had to specify the start date and the end date for thehorizons or the number of periods. Now you also have the following options:

- You enter only one fixed date per horizon (either the start date or the end date).For example, if you do not enter a start date for the forecast horizon, the system uses the current dateas the start date. If you do not enter an end date for the history horizon, the system uses the periodprevious to the current period as the end date.

- You enter a fixed date and the number of periods.For example, you enter a start date and a number of periods for the history horizon. The systemcalculates the history starting with the date you entered and extends this horizon by the number ofperiods you entered.

You cannot use an offset if you use these options.

3.4.7.7 Data Realignment of InfoCubes in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the data realignment of InfoCubes in Demand Planning works according to a newmethod. If an InfoCube that has already been filled with planning data is to be subsequently changed, onlythe changed data is added in one or more requests to the InfoCube. Existing requests are not changed.

The advantage of this method is that you can carry out all the functions of SAP NetWeaver Usage TypeBusiness Intelligence (BI) for these requests (for example, compress and rollback).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 69

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.7.8 Uploading Data to Demand Planning (New)

Use

Up to now, you were able to transfer planning data from interactive Demand Planning (DP) to a local filewith format CSV, which you can edit using Microsoft Excel. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also transferthe planning data from the CSV file back to interactive Demand Planning. The prerequisite is that youhave originally transferred the planning data from interactive Demand Planning and have changed onlythe planning data in the CSV file.

3.4.7.9 Locking Logic in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the new locking logic liveCache Lock is available in Demand Planning (DP). Thesystem can use this logic to more precisely lock data you are accessing than it can with the aggregated anddetailed locks. The liveCache lock takes intervals into account during selection and evaluates for singlevalues the first wildcard character (*) or the first placeholder (+) for each value.

You can activate the liveCache lock in planning area maintenance on the Locking Logic tab page. Youcan activate the liveCache lock together with the key figure-specific lock.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 70

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.7.10 MacroBuilder in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced)

Use

New and Changed Macro Functions

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following new macro functions are available:CELL_TOOLTIP ROW_TOOLTIP

COL_BG SEASON_BDATE

COL_FG SEASON_EDATE

COL_TOOLTIP STDV_DEMAND_GET

COLUMN_FROM STDV_WRITE_ALERTS

COLUMN_TO STEP_AREA_SET

GET_TEXT STEP_CALC_STOP

IS_FIXED

IS_INITIAL

IS_PARTLY_FIXED

The following macro functions have been changed:CELL_BG ROW_BG

CELL_FG ROW_FG

CELL_LICON ROW_LICON

CELL_RICON ROW_RICON

COL_LICON

COL_RICON

User Functions

Some of the user function parameters have been replaced by the c_s_actview parameter, whichcontributes to significantly better performance. You can still use the old parameters (they are flagged"obsolete"). We recommend, however, that you use the new parameters.

Printing Macro Definitions

You can print out the contents of a macro tree. However, you cannot print the information that is visiblewhile you edit an object of a macro tree.

Business Add-In (BAdI)

With the new BAdI Additional Functions for Macros (/SAPAPO/ADV) you can influence the system'sbehavior when executing a macro and you can implement your own calculation logics for macros. Youcan use this BAdI instead of the user exit Maintain Customer Macros.


An upgrade assistant is available which can help you deactivate the compatibility mode, for example.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 71

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Release information Change Mode for Key Figures

For more information about macros, see the DP documentation in the SAP Library under DemandPlanning Process -> Planning Book Design -> Advanced Macros -> Macro Workbench ->MacroBuilder Screen -> Operators and Functions in Macros -> Functions for InfoObjects andPlanning Books and under General and Planning Table Functions.

3.4.7.11 Time-Based Demand Distribution (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can distribute forecast data, which was calculated for a specific periodicity inthe demand plan or in the InfoProvider, across a more exact periodicity for the release to Supply NetworkPlanning (SNP) or to an ERP system.

For the time-based distribution of demands during the release, create a period split profile and adistribution function.

3.4.7.12 TSDM Data in Demand Planning (DP) (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, you only had limited access to the data of the time series data management (TSDM). As ofSAP SCM 5.0, you can now also access TSDM data via DP planning areas.

TSDM can be used at the following levels in the planning area:

- at location product level if the master planning object structure contains the characteristics productand location

- at detail level for master planning object structures with any characteristics

Planning Area Maintenance

You can select a TSDM time series type and TSDM key figures as well as other key figures (such as time

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 72

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

series key figures) directly in the planning area. In addition, you specify whether you carry out TSDM atlocation product level or at detail level. In both cases, you must select a time series data type inCustomizing for Time Series Data Management. For TSDM at location product level, it must be atime series data type mode A or C, and for TSDM at detail level, it must be a time series data type modeB.

Planning

You can only carry out planning with TSDM key figures if you are on the correct level. In interactiveplanning, only the corresponding key figure is then ready for input. In mass processing, you must selectthe correct level as the aggregation level.

Reports

With report /SAPAPO/TS_CHECK_MASTERDATA you can check whether all the master data for thelocation products of a planning object structure exist. With report/SAPAPO/TSDM_PLOB_LIST_GENER you can generate a list of the location product combinationsthat are used in a time series data type.

Note

Data realignment is not possible for planning areas that use TSDM.

3.4.7.13 Differentiation of Initial Values and 0 Values (New)

Use

In interactive Demand Planning (DP), the system can differentiate key figures that contain the value 0 andkey figures that have not yet been planned and are therefore initial.

In planning area maintenance, you can set the Zero allowed indicator for each key figure of the planningarea. In addition, you can set the Fixable Zero indicator for each key figure so that the system also fixeskey figures with the value 0. For this, the key figure must also be a fixable key figure, however.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 73

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.7.14 SCM-APO-FCS-SEA Seasonal Planning

3.4.7.14.1 Seasonal Planning (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use seasonal planning to perform a flexible time-based aggregation ofplanning data based on season years.

Seasonal Planning supports the following functions in Demand Planning (DP):

- Interactive Demand Planning including Macros

- Macro Execution with Mass Processing

For seasonal planning, the system aggregates the data of several periods of a specific periodicity (such as amonth) to a season, and the data of several seasons to a season year. The system determines the validseason years based on the selected characteristic values combinations. For this you have assigned all thecharacteristic values combinations of the planning area to seasonal patterns, which are based on seasonyears.

In interactive planning, you can switch between the following displays for seasonal planning:

- Display of seasons of a season year

- Display of one or more season years, aggregated to season year level

You can switch from a season year or an aggregated season year to another time buckets profile at anytime.

3.4.8 SCM-APO-SPP Service Parts Planning

3.4.8.1 Service Parts Planning (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, the planning services of Service Parts Planning are available in SAP Advanced Planningand Optimization. As well as the planning functions, you can also use many analytics and monitoringfunctions for service parts planning and delivery in SAP APO, SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAPICH), and in SAP NetWeaver usage type Business Intelligence.

SPP provides planning capabilities specific to service parts, and transparency throughout the supply chain,

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 74

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

right from the moment demand occurs through to the delivery of the product. SPP considers thecharacteristics of each product during planning, for example the locations at which you most need acertain product, be it fast-moving or slow-moving, and what the sales behavior of this product is. Thismeans that during planning, SPP differentiates between constant demand, trends , seasonal products, andproducts with intermittent demand. SPP optimally matches stock with demand as it occurs, and automatesmuch of the approval and release processes. This enables you to reduce your ordering and stockholdingcosts, to improve service levels, and to shorten your delivery times. The analytics and monitoringfunctions reveal weak spots in your supply chain that you can then deal with.

Planning

Service Parts Planning occurs in SAP APO and consists of the following services:

- ForecastingThe forecasting service covers the whole life cycle of a product from phase-in forecasting for newproducts via various types of supersession through to phase-out forecasting for products indiscontinuation. The forecasting service is flexible in reacting to changing demand, and uses variousforecast models to plan individually for future demand for products that have differing salesbehavior.

- Inventory PlanningThe inventory planning service determines the locations at which it would be useful to stock ordestock, and plans the optimal stock of location products. This means that stockholding costs are aslow as possible, the ordering costs are reduced, and yet you still reach a high level of customerservice. In addition, the surplus and obsolescence service uses certain criteria to evaluate currentstocks according to whether they count as surplus or obsolete stock, and can therefore be disposedof.

- Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP)DRP organizes replenishment planning within a bill of distribution (BOD) . Using forecasteddemand, the stocks of the locations, and scheduling agreements, DRP creates stock transportrequisitions, scheduling agreement delivery schedule lines, and purchase requisitions. DRP alsoplans supersession and product discontinuation. In addition to these planning functions, DRP enablesan efficient review of the planning results and, if required, a multilevel approval process.

- Deployment and Inventory BalancingDeployment controls the distribution of incoming goods within the BOD on the basis of currentdemand. It uses priority tiers, sequence rules, and fair share distribution to distribute the goods in themost useful way. The inventory balancing service balances excess and shortage at the individuallocations, and thereby ensures that stock within a BOD is evenly distributed.

There is a separate Implementation Guide (IMG) for planning services in Service Parts Planning.

Analytics and Monitoring

Analytics and monitoring for service parts planning and delivery takes place in SAP APO as well as inSAP ICH and SAP NetWeaver usage type Business Intelligence. It includes the following functions:

- Inbound Delivery MonitorYou can use the inbound delivery monitor to automatically monitor the processing times for theindividual sub-steps of the delivery. The inbound delivery monitor considers both deliveries fromyour supplier to a location, as well as stock transfers from one location within the BOD to another.The automatic monitoring functions of the inbound delivery monitor are in SAP APO and the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 75

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

resulting reports are in SAP NetWeaver usage type Business Intelligence.

- Shortage AnalysisThis function gives you and your suppliers a quick overview of critical situations, for exampleshortages. The SPP Alert Monitor displays alerts that show unplanned situations. You and yoursuppliers can see the relevant alerts and can then influence the planning if necessary. Shortageanalysis is integrated in the Web user interface of SAP ICH.

- Supplier Delivery Performance Rating (SDPR)The SDPR evaluates the performance of your suppliers on the basis of various criteria, for exampletime and quantity accuracy. You can provide your suppliers with direct access to these results. SDPRis integrated in both SAP ICH and SAP NetWeaver usage type Business Intelligence.

- Service Fill MonitorYou can use the service fill monitor to analyze your goods issue activities. It displays the servicelevel you were able to offer your customers, and during service loss analysis, it analyses why salesorders could not be on time or completed. The analysis function of the service fill monitor is in bothSAP APO and SAP NetWeaver usage type Business Intelligence.

See also

For more information about Service Parts Planning (SPP), see the SAP Library under mySAP SupplyChain Management -> Supply Chain Management -> Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Service Parts Planning (SPP).

3.4.9 SCM-APO-PPS Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

3.4.9.1 Project Manufacturing and Make-to-Order Manufacturing (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the planning of multi-level networks of orders for sales and project orders inProduction Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) is more effectively supported.Until now, system behavior was as follows:

- When integrating the ERP routing into the SCM production data structure (PDS), the systemcalculated planning and process-related minimum intervals from the data of the routing. Theplanning and process-related minimum interval was copied from the production data structure (inother words, the master data) when planned orders were created in SAP SCM.

- You were not able to change these minimum intervals in the SCM system in the order.

In SAP SCM 5.0, the calculation of the planning and process-related minimum intervals during the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 76

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

integration of the ERP routing in SAP SCM has not changed, however you can now manually changeplanning-related minimum intervals in the SCM system, in other words, in the order.

As of the current release you can achieve leeway in scheduling by changing planning-related minimumintervals for relationships between orders operations and inserting planning-related offsets at requirementsbetween different orders. You can then reduce this leeway, if necessary.

By analyzing the critical path (using a heuristic) in a network of orders, you can identify bottlenecks andshorten the network at suitable points.If planning-related minimum intervals and planning-related offsets have been completely reduced andparts of the network still lie in the past, you can use the heuristic for forward scheduling to achieve acompact network and to calculate a new end date/completion date.

The following (new or enhanced) functions support the process of project manufacturing:

- New HeuristicsYou can use the following heuristics in project manufacturing:

- Heuristic for calculating the critical path ( SAP_PMAN_001) to identify operations for whichthere is no float, or for which the float is too small.

- Heuristic for infinite forward scheduling (SAP_PMAN_002), if the end date of the projectcan no longer be met.

- Heuristic for infinite backward scheduling (SAP_PMAN_003), to schedule the network oforders starting from the end date and working backward.

For more information, see Heuristics and Critical Path.

- Mass Maintenance and Display of Planning-Related Minimum Intervals in the DetailedScheduling Planning BoardYou can process planning-related minimum intervals between activities of different operationsmanually, in the detailed scheduling planning board, or using mass maintenance.You can also visualize planning-related minimum intervals.

- Mass Maintenance and Insertion of Planning-Related Offsets for Requirements in the DetailedScheduling Planning BoardAs with the planning-related minimum interval between activities, you can maintain a new"planning-related minimum interval" for the interval between requirement and start of the activity.This is called the planning-related offset.By doing this, you can create leeway in scheduling. You can also edit the planning-related offset inmass maintenance.

- Earliest and Latest Start and End Dates of Operations within an OrderThe system can determine the earliest and latest start and end dates of operations, taking into accountprocess-related minimum intervals and offsets.

- Network Alert at Operation LevelFor project orders only you see network alerts at operation level in the order view, and not, as untilnow, at order level.

- Selection Function in the Detailed Scheduling Planning Board (Hierarchical)You can use the hierarchy to make selections in the network.You can individually select preceding and succeeding orders or select all preceding orders or allsucceeding orders relating to the order.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 77

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Details about Capacity Requirements Added to Resource Utilization Report The resource utilization report has been enhanced in such a way that you can also see details aboutcapacity requirements in the detail view for resource utilization. You can see the proportions of thecapacity requirements used by planned orders, production orders and so on. This information isadditionally grouped in a list, according to order priority, status of the activity, and order type.

- Display of the Operation Dates in a Different FormatThe times of the operations are no longer displayed in seconds, but in the format: DD/HH:MM:SS.

- New Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)

- BAdI: Mass Maintenance of Planning-Related Minimum Intervals and Planning-RelatedOffsets (/SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_01),You can, for example, reduce or increase the planning-related minimum interval betweenactivities or the planning-related offset between requirement (input node) and activity. TheBAdI is active as a default, the default implementation already contains the most commonmethods.

- BAdI: Critical Path Heuristic (/SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_02)You can exclude pegging areas when scheduling the network.The BAdI is called when the critical path is calculated.

- BAdI: Fill with Customer-Specific Data ( /SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_03)You can enhance tables of the critical path and the planning-related minimum intervals withadditional data.You can display customer-specific data in the list of the critical path and in the maintenance ofthe planning-related minimum intervals.

- Scope of Functions

Heuristics and Critical Path

- Heuristic for Calculating the Critical Path (SAP_PMAN_001)You can determine all operations of a network of orders with floats (the interval between the latestand the earliest start date) that are smaller than a particular threshold value. These operations areregarded as critical. When you execute the heuristic you can display these operations as a list, in aseparate window, or in the detailed scheduling planning board. In the detailed scheduling planningboard, the operations that belong to the critical path are selected and displayed with the selectioncolor that has been defined.

- Heuristic for Infinite Forward Scheduling (SAP_PMAN_002)You can use this heuristic if it is no longer possible to meet the end date of the project or the salesorder because, for example, the network of orders lies partially in the past, and planning-relatedminimum intervals and planning-related offsets have been used up, with the result that you have tocalculate a new end date.The heuristic schedules the network again and determines a new feasible situation.

- Heuristic for Infinite Backward Scheduling (SAP_PMAN_003)You can use this heuristic to schedule the network of orders working backwards from the end date.You use this heuristic to achieve a compact network once you have reduced planning-relatedminimum intervals or planning-related offsets along the critical path.

Planning-Related Minimum Intervals and Planning-Related Offsets

You can change planning-related minimum intervals and planning-related offsets either manually in the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 78

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

detailed scheduling planning board or in mass maintenance. Mass maintenance is carried out using theBAdI /SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_01.

Visualization of relationships and pegging relationships in the detailed scheduling planning board

In the planning board profile, you can define that relationships or pegging relationships are visuallyhighlighted in certain "critical" planning situations:

- Relationships are highlighted if the net interval falls below the planning-related minimum interval.

- Pegging relationships are highlighted if the requirement at this pegging relationship lies before thereceipt.

You can edit the planning board profile in Customizing for Supply Chain Planning under ProductionPlanning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Detailed Scheduling -> Settings for the DetailedScheduling Planning Board -> Maintain Planning Board Profiles.For more information about new features in the detailed scheduling planning board, see the release noteDetailed Scheduling Planning Board (Enhanced).

Earliest and Latest Start and End Dates of Operations within an Order

These dates are displayed in the detailed scheduling planning board in the detailed data for operations ofan order and in order processing.This data is only determined and displayed if you select the indicatorDisplay Earliest/Latest OperationDates in Customizing for Supply Chain Planning under Production Planning and DetailedScheduling(PP/DS) -> Global Settings -> Maintain Global Parameters and Defaults.

Constraints

- The critical path is calculated infinitely.

- Sequence-dependent setup activities are not recommended in a process with infinite schedulingbecause the results determined by the heuristic for calculating the critical path may not be correct..

- A network of orders in SAP SCM consists of sales or projects orders, planned and production orders,and purchase requisitions, that are linked by means of pegging relationships.You should note that ERP collective orders - as before - are not transferred to SAP SCM as"complete objects" and are only available with the same scope of functions as in previous releases.This means that the order is integrated without fixed links between receipts and requirements.

- The planning-related offset at requirements between orders in SAP SCM is not copied from themaster data, but must be created or edited in the SCM system. When planned orders are created inSAP SCM the system proposes only planning-related and process-related minimum intervalsbetween operations from the production data structure. The data of the production data structure isfilled during transfer from the ERP system from the routing data (wait time, move time and queuetime) (SAP Note 604878).

Recommendation

It is recommended that fixed pegging is used for the process.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 79

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For more information see the SAP Library for SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAPAPO) under Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Project Manufacturing andMake-to-Order Manufacturing.

For more information about the integration of project orders, see the Release Note for SAP SCM 4.1Project Orders (New).

3.4.9.2 BAPI for Production Planning Run (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the new method ExecutePlanningRun for the Business ObjectPPDSServiceAPS (Production Planning & Detailed Scheduling Services).

You can use this method to execute a production planning run for a particular report variant. The systemexecutes the same steps as it does in the transaction Production Planning Run (/SAPAPO/CDPSB0;Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Production Planning -> Automated Production Planningand Optimization -> Production Planning Run).

3.4.9.3 Characteristics-Dependent Planning: Reorganization (New)

Use

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can use the following new reports to reorganize your master data forcharacteristics-dependent planning (CDP):

- Report /SAPAPO/MC01_CL400_CHAR_REMOVE, for deleting characteristics.You access the report under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APO Administration ->Reorganization -> Production Planning -> Remove Characteristic from Class in the SAPEasy Access menu.

- Report /SAPAPO/CONFR_CFGREL_MAINTAIN, to convert the configuration relevance ofproductsYou can also use the report as a tool for deleting a characteristics or the class assignment of aproduct as the report carries out a where-used list and various consistency checks.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 80

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You access the report under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APO Administration ->Reorganization -> Production Planning -> Change Configuration Relevance for Products inthe SAP Easy Access menu.

- Report /SAPAPO/CONFR_PROD_CONS to check the consistency of classification/configurationdata in the product master.

3.4.9.4 Changes to Header Quantity for Released Manufacturing Orders(Changed)

Use

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can change the header quantity in released manufacturing orders in SAPAPO if no goods movements (goods issue and receipt) and confirmations have been carried out for theorder in the ERP system (must be at least ERP 2.0).

If you have carried out goods movement, the GM Executed indicator is displayed in the order processingview. The indicator is set by the system.

The header quantity cannot be changed after a cancellation has been carried out because cancellations areregarded as goods movements in the ERP system. The indicator remains set in SAP APO after thecancellation.

Goods movements can only be carried out in the ERP system if the production order has been released;this means that the GM Executed indicator is only displayed for released manufacturing orders in SAPAPO. If you cancel all goods movements, you can reset the release status in the ERP system. Since theindicator for goods movement also remains set in SAP APO after the cancellation has been carried out,the manufacturing order may not be released; however, the system will still display that goods movementhas been carried out. In this case, the quantity can be changed because the order is not yet released.

The indicator is not displayed for the following:

- For planned orders

- When no information about goods movement was provided by the system (if ERP release is lowerthan Release 2.0).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 81

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.5 CTP and Multilevel ATP Check (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can now use the following enhancements:

- Create Fixed Pegging for Multilevel ATP CheckAs of SAP SCM 5.0, the multilevel ATP check was enhanced in such a way that the system createsfixed pegging relationships between the sales order and the assigned receipt element whenconverting ATP tree structures. You can also create fixed pegging relationships across multiplelevels, resulting in a pegging structure.You must have chosen the option Create Fixed Pegging Relationships in the Fix. Pegging inCTP/ATP field in the PP planning procedure.This new function is advantageous in that fixed assignments between the requirements and receiptelements are retained after the tree structures are converted. This is necessary if you change theconfirmed sales order again due to a date shift, for example, and must therefore carry out anotheravailability check. The system can then create new receipt elements for this new check that are moresuitable for the changed planning situation (quantity and dates/times). See also: Create New ReceiptElements for Make-to-Stock Production.

- Create New Receipt Elements for Make-to-Stock ProductionPreviously, you could only use the function Re-Create Receipt Elements in CTP processing and themultilevel ATP check for make-to-order production. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also use thisfunction if you are working with make-to-stock production strategies.

Prerequisites

- You must be using fixed pegging. You must set the option Create Fixed PeggingRelationships in the Fix. Pegging in CTP/ATP field in the PP planning procedure.

- The receipt element must be assigned to exactly one sales order item. To do so, you must havedefined the exact lot size for the product that is to be checked. The system will then createexactly one receipt element for the requirement and assign this receipt element to the peggedrequirement.

- In the check instructions, you must have set the Re-Create Receipt Elements indicator to beable to use the new function.

AdvantagesThe advantages of recreating receipts for a new ATP/CTP check due to changes made to an existingsales order include the following:

- When changing the desired date, such as bringing forward the date, the system creates a newreceipt element that fits the desired date. The system can then confirm the new date (as long asthere is enough available capacity). The superfluous receipt element is deleted.Previously, this action was not possible. Even if you could change the date in the sales order,the ATP/CTP checks could only confirm the sales order for the previous date.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 82

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- When the desired quantity is increased in the sales order, the system creates a new receiptelement at the new order quantity. The superfluous receipt element is deleted.Previously, this action was not possible. The system would always create a new receipt elementfor the new quantity so that two receipts would be assigned to the sales order.

Restrictions

- During CTP processing:If the receipt elements are fixed (PP-firmed, input-firmed, or activity-firmed), then the systemcan no longer delete the receipt elements. The ATP check considers the receipt elements thatcannot be replaced with new receipt elements.

- During the multilevel ATP check:If the indicator for the multilevel ATP check has been set for the receipt element, and you alsoset the conversion indicator, the order cannot be deleted and will be considered by the ATPcheck.

- In both cases:You cannot use this new function if you are using collaborative management of schedulingagreement releases (CMDS).

- Direct Production with Receipt RedistributionIf you have chosen the Direct Production option in the Start Production field in the checkinstructions, then the system will distribute surplus receipt elements on the checked customerrequirements via a net requirements calculation during the CTP check. If the quantity is notsufficient, then planning creates a receipt element for the checked customer requirements.Assignments that the system has already made for the previous availability checks are retained. Thismeans that if there was a suitable receipt element or stock for the new requirement, the system doesnot assign the available receipt element or requirement to the new requirement as the receiptelement/stock is already assigned to a different requirement. In this case, the system has created anew receipt element that was not suitable.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can now use the function Direct Production with Receipt Redistribution. Ifyou have set the relevant indicator in the PP procedure, then the system checks if there is sufficientstock or a receipt element that fits in regards to the date for a new customer requirement, and thenassigns it to the new requirement. The system will also do this if the receipt element or the stock hadalready been assigned to a different requirement. Planning must have created a new receipt elementfor the other requirement. This will result in a more suitable confirmation date.

Restrictions:

- In direct production, the system carries out a net requirements calculation instead of the ATP check for the availability check. The system cannot use the scope of the checkand theATP horizon here.

- In the PP planning procedure, you cannot assign the following ABAP classes in the ABAPClass for CTP/ATP Process field:/SAPAPO/CL_EOGL_CTP/SAPAPO/CL_RRP_FIX_ONLY

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 83

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


The IMG activity Maintain Planning Procedures now includes information on the Direct Production withReceipt Redistribution indicator.

3.4.9.6 Underdelivery Tolerance in Net Requirements Calculation

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define that no additional procurement element (such as a planned order) isgenerated when the quantity to be delivered lies within the underdelivery tolerance for the sales orderitem. You use this function for materials with make-to-order production in net requirements calculationduring the planning run, or in the CTP check.

To use this function, proceed as follows:

- Set the Underdel. Tol. indicator in the product master for the lot-sizing procedure.

- Specify an underdelivery tolerance in the sales order item.

- Alternatively, you can set the Underdel. Tol. indicator in the planning heuristic if the heuristicsettings are to be used.

3.4.9.7 Withdrawal from Alternative Plant (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0,

the planning process Withdrawal from Alternative Plant from the ERP system was implemented in SAPAPO. In SAP APO, you can now plan components that have the special procurement key 70 in theERP system. The secondary requirement from an assembly is now generated directly in the issuinglocation during processing. The order that is used to cover the secondary requirement is also created in theissuing location. The system then posts the goods issue for the component directly in the issuing location.

You can only use this process in SAP APO if you are working with production data structures (PDS). Youcan also display the issuing location in the component lists in the PDS. If no plant is displayed for a

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 84

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

component, then the plant was withdrawn from the planning plant.

Note that if you change the issuing plant in the ERP system, the production data structure is notautomatically regenerated in SAP APO. You must generate the PDS in SAP APO manually in order tochange the issuing plant in SAP APO as well.

You can combine the Withdrawal from Alternative Plant planning process with other processes:

- Phantom AssemblyIf a component is used as a phantom assembly in the issuing location, the system will also explodethe BOM of this phantom assembly for the issuing location. All components for the phantomassembly are withdrawn from the issuing location. There is one exception: If a component for aphantom assembly is to be withdrawn from another location, the system will not withdraw thecomponent from the location of the phantom assembly.

- MRP AreasYou can also combine the Withdrawal from Alternative Plant process with MRP areas that youhave created in the issuing location. The withdrawal can then be carried out at the MRP area level.

- Discontinuation/Product InterchangeabilityNote that you can only execute the heuristic for the supersession chain in the issuing locationbecause the secondary requirement for the component to be replaced is only located in the issuinglocation; here, the requirement can only be transferred to the subsequent product.

Restrictions

- You cannot use the Withdrawal from Alternative Plant planning process if you are usingintegrated Product and Process Engineering (iPPE) or the production process model (PPM) becausethe issuing location is not contained in the BOM data for iPPE or the PPM.

- The issuing location in SAP APO must be either a production plant or a distribution center. It is notpossible to withdraw components from other location types, such as vendor or customer.

- Supply Network Planning (SNP) does not support the Withdrawal from Alternative Plant planningprocess.

See also

For more information on withdrawals from an alternative plant, see the SAP Library under SAP ERPCentral Component --> Logistics --> Production Planning and Control --> MaterialRequirements Planning (MRP) --> Special Planning Processes --> Multi-Plant/Site Planning -->Withdrawal from Alternative Plant.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 85

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.8 PP/DS Horizon: Field Extended to 4 Places

Use

The input field for the PP/DS horizon on the PP/DS tab page in the product master and in the planningversion has increased from three to four places. This enables you to also process projects with a longduration in SAP APO production planning and detailed scheduling.

3.4.9.9 Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the strategy Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly in ERP and inSAP SCM. You use this strategy to move the stocking level for assemblies/components in the BOMstructure. You can use this strategy if you want start producing an important assembly only when therelevant sales order is received, but must procure the required components beforehand. In ERP, you mustthen assign the strategy 52 Planning without Final Assembly/ without MTO in the material master ofthe finished product, and the strategy 74 Planning without Final Assembly at Assembly Level for theassembly. After the data has been transferred via the APO Core Interface (CIF) , you can also view thedata in SAP SCM.

The transfer of information between ERP and SAP SCM was set up in such a way that the planninginformation can also be exchanged between the systems at the dependent requirements level. You cancarry out multilevel planning in either SCM or ERP. Requirements consumption in the planning segmentis also possible in both systems; however, this can only be triggered by the system that you selected forplanning.

Restrictions

- Multilevel planning without final assembly does not support stock transfers.

- The data is only transferred between SCM 5.0 and ERP2005. If you want to use the SCM systemwith ERP2004 or an R/3 system, you must install SAP Notes 771819 and 771820. Both notesinclude the required enhancements for the plug-in interface (to exchange information at thedependent requirements level).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 86

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For additional information on Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly, see the SAP Library forERP2005 under SAP ERP Central Component -->Logistics --> Demand Management -->Planning Strategies --> Strategies for Make-to-Stock Production --> Planning without FinalAssembly/ without MTO (52) and Demand Management --> Planning Strategies --> Strategiesfor Planning Components --> Planning without Final Assembly at Assembly Level (74).

3.4.9.10 Production Planning Run (Enhanced)

Use

Production Planning Run: Initial Screen

As of Release SCM 5.0, the initial screen for the planning run has changed.

The individual planning steps are specified on tab pages. The planning steps are written on the tab pagesso that it is easy to navigate between each tab page.

You can also display a list of all the planning steps on the right side of the subscreen with the tab pages todirectly call a planning step, or you can call the planning step overview in the application toolbar.

You can delete a planning step directly on the tab page.

Business Add-In (BAdI) to further restrict selected objects

You can use the BAdI Change Selection Data in the Production Planning Run (/sapapo/cdps_pp_run) tofurther restrict the objects for each planning step.

3.4.9.11 Integration of PP/DS Processes in BI Process Chains (New)

Use

You can use the process chain maintenance from the Business Information Warehouse to define your ownprocesses for production planning and to execute the processes in the background at a specific time.

You can create process chains in the SAP menu under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Production Planning -> Automated Production Planning and Optimization -> Maintain ProcessChains.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 87

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.12 Consider Assembly Scrap for Make-to-Order Production (Changed)

Use

As of Release SCM 5.0, the assembly scrap will also be considered by the system for make-to-orderproduction (see SAP Note 806363).

3.4.9.13 Simulation Version: Change when Calling (Enhanced)

Use

New Menu Path.

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can find the simulation versions under the following menu path:

Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Production Planning -> Interactive Production Planning-> Detailed Scheduling -> Simulation Version.

Maintenance of Simulation Version

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can carry out maintenance to the simulation version using the resourceplanning table as well as the detailed scheduling planning board. As of Release SCM 5.0, the resourceplanning table is available and constitutes a tabular tool with which you can execute planning.

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can call the simulation version with the following functions:

- Simulation Version -> Detailed Scheduling Planning Board Maintenance or GraphicMaintenance pushbutton

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 88

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Simulation Version -> resource planning table maintenance or tabular maintenancepushbutton

Object selection

As of Release 5.0, you can change the work area sets on the initial screen of the detailed schedulingplanning board or the resource planning table, and call the planning tables with temporary settings. Youcan also add further sets in the application and potentially adapt these sets to the initial screen.

The simulation version is loaded with the selection conditions that were available when saving thesimulation version.

See also

Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Object Selection

Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Change Menu Path

Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Changes

3.4.9.14 SCM-APO-PPS-PPT Product Planning Table

3.4.9.14.1 Changes in the Product Planning Table (Changed)

Use

Several changes were made in the product planning table to improve usability.

Product Planning Table: Display Quantity in Chart Product View: Quantity Graphic

You can alternatively view the information that is displayed as a graphic on the Quantity Graphic chartfor the individual receipt and requirements components on the Product View: Single Elements andProduct View: Periodic charts.

For continuous consumption and continuous receipts, the system displays additional information in thegraphic that are not displayed on the charts described above. If you are working in a barrier-free mode, thesystem displays an ALV Grid Control for the graphic that contains the same information as the actualgraphic.

Product Planning Table: Period Views for Product, Resource, and Production

In the toolbar for the period views for the product, resource, and production, you can use the ColorLegend pushbutton to display the color descriptions that were defined for the color profile underAdvanced Planning and Optimization -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Product Planning Table -> Set Layout.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 89

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.14.2 Flag Processed Products in Planning (Enhanced)

Use

In the product planning table, product overview, and product view, you can flag processed products if youhave checked and resolved the alert situation for the products, for example:

- In the product planning table and the product view, the Processed pushbutton is now available inthe navigation tree.You can also set the indicator for resources in the product planning table.

- In the product overview, you can flag processed products in the Processing Status column by eitherselecting a product directly with a double-click or by selecting the product and then choosing theChange Processed Status function.

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can configure the processing indicator so that it can either only be resetmanually or so that it is reset automatically when you log off or at the start of a new day. You can makethis setting in the product planning table separately for products and resources. To do so, choose in themenu of the product planning table, product view, or product overview Settings -> ProcessingIndicator.

3.4.9.15 SCM-APO-PPS-DST Detailed Scheduling Planning Board

3.4.9.15.1 Project Manufacturing and Make-to-Order Manufacturing (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the planning of multi-level networks of orders for sales and project orders inProduction Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) is more effectively supported.Until now, system behavior was as follows:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 90

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- When integrating the ERP routing into the SCM production data structure (PDS), the systemcalculated planning and process-related minimum intervals from the data of the routing. Theplanning and process-related minimum interval was copied from the production data structure (inother words, the master data) when planned orders were created in SAP SCM.

- You were not able to change these minimum intervals in the SCM system in the order.

In SAP SCM 5.0, the calculation of the planning and process-related minimum intervals during theintegration of the ERP routing in SAP SCM has not changed, however you can now manually changeplanning-related minimum intervals in the SCM system, in other words, in the order.

As of the current release you can achieve leeway in scheduling by changing planning-related minimumintervals for relationships between orders operations and inserting planning-related offsets at requirementsbetween different orders. You can then reduce this leeway, if necessary.

By analyzing the critical path (using a heuristic) in a network of orders, you can identify bottlenecks andshorten the network at suitable points.If planning-related minimum intervals and planning-related offsets have been completely reduced andparts of the network still lie in the past, you can use the heuristic for forward scheduling to achieve acompact network and to calculate a new end date/completion date.

The following (new or enhanced) functions support the process of project manufacturing:

- New HeuristicsYou can use the following heuristics in project manufacturing:

- Heuristic for calculating the critical path ( SAP_PMAN_001) to identify operations for whichthere is no float, or for which the float is too small.

- Heuristic for infinite forward scheduling (SAP_PMAN_002), if the end date of the projectcan no longer be met.

- Heuristic for infinite backward scheduling (SAP_PMAN_003), to schedule the network oforders starting from the end date and working backward.

For more information, see Heuristics and Critical Path.

- Mass Maintenance and Display of Planning-Related Minimum Intervals in the DetailedScheduling Planning BoardYou can process planning-related minimum intervals between activities of different operationsmanually, in the detailed scheduling planning board, or using mass maintenance.You can also visualize planning-related minimum intervals.

- Mass Maintenance and Insertion of Planning-Related Offsets for Requirements in the DetailedScheduling Planning BoardAs with the planning-related minimum interval between activities, you can maintain a new"planning-related minimum interval" for the interval between requirement and start of the activity.This is called the planning-related offset.By doing this, you can create leeway in scheduling. You can also edit the planning-related offset inmass maintenance.

- Earliest and Latest Start and End Dates of Operations within an OrderThe system can determine the earliest and latest start and end dates of operations, taking into accountprocess-related minimum intervals and offsets.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 91

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Network Alert at Operation LevelFor project orders only you see network alerts at operation level in the order view, and not, as untilnow, at order level.

- Selection Function in the Detailed Scheduling Planning Board (Hierarchical)You can use the hierarchy to make selections in the network.You can individually select preceding and succeeding orders or select all preceding orders or allsucceeding orders relating to the order.

- Details about Capacity Requirements Added to Resource Utilization Report The resource utilization report has been enhanced in such a way that you can also see details aboutcapacity requirements in the detail view for resource utilization. You can see the proportions of thecapacity requirements used by planned orders, production orders and so on. This information isadditionally grouped in a list, according to order priority, status of the activity, and order type.

- Display of the Operation Dates in a Different FormatThe times of the operations are no longer displayed in seconds, but in the format: DD/HH:MM:SS.

- New Business Add-Ins (BAdIs)

- BAdI: Mass Maintenance of Planning-Related Minimum Intervals and Planning-RelatedOffsets (/SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_01),You can, for example, reduce or increase the planning-related minimum interval betweenactivities or the planning-related offset between requirement (input node) and activity. TheBAdI is active as a default, the default implementation already contains the most commonmethods.

- BAdI: Critical Path Heuristic (/SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_02)You can exclude pegging areas when scheduling the network.The BAdI is called when the critical path is calculated.

- BAdI: Fill with Customer-Specific Data ( /SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_03)You can enhance tables of the critical path and the planning-related minimum intervals withadditional data.You can display customer-specific data in the list of the critical path and in the maintenance ofthe planning-related minimum intervals.

- Scope of Functions

Heuristics and Critical Path

- Heuristic for Calculating the Critical Path (SAP_PMAN_001)You can determine all operations of a network of orders with floats (the interval between the latestand the earliest start date) that are smaller than a particular threshold value. These operations areregarded as critical. When you execute the heuristic you can display these operations as a list, in aseparate window, or in the detailed scheduling planning board. In the detailed scheduling planningboard, the operations that belong to the critical path are selected and displayed with the selectioncolor that has been defined.

- Heuristic for Infinite Forward Scheduling (SAP_PMAN_002)You can use this heuristic if it is no longer possible to meet the end date of the project or the salesorder because, for example, the network of orders lies partially in the past, and planning-relatedminimum intervals and planning-related offsets have been used up, with the result that you have tocalculate a new end date.The heuristic schedules the network again and determines a new feasible situation.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 92

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Heuristic for Infinite Backward Scheduling (SAP_PMAN_003)You can use this heuristic to schedule the network of orders working backwards from the end date.You use this heuristic to achieve a compact network once you have reduced planning-relatedminimum intervals or planning-related offsets along the critical path.

Planning-Related Minimum Intervals and Planning-Related Offsets

You can change planning-related minimum intervals and planning-related offsets either manually in thedetailed scheduling planning board or in mass maintenance. Mass maintenance is carried out using theBAdI /SAPAPO/CDPS_PMAN_01.

Visualization of relationships and pegging relationships in the detailed scheduling planning board

In the planning board profile, you can define that relationships or pegging relationships are visuallyhighlighted in certain "critical" planning situations:

- Relationships are highlighted if the net interval falls below the planning-related minimum interval.

- Pegging relationships are highlighted if the requirement at this pegging relationship lies before thereceipt.

You can edit the planning board profile in Customizing for Supply Chain Planning under ProductionPlanning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Detailed Scheduling -> Settings for the DetailedScheduling Planning Board -> Maintain Planning Board Profiles.For more information about new features in the detailed scheduling planning board, see the release noteDetailed Scheduling Planning Board (Enhanced).

Earliest and Latest Start and End Dates of Operations within an Order

These dates are displayed in the detailed scheduling planning board in the detailed data for operations ofan order and in order processing.This data is only determined and displayed if you select the indicatorDisplay Earliest/Latest OperationDates in Customizing for Supply Chain Planning under Production Planning and DetailedScheduling(PP/DS) -> Global Settings -> Maintain Global Parameters and Defaults.

Constraints

- The critical path is calculated infinitely.

- Sequence-dependent setup activities are not recommended in a process with infinite schedulingbecause the results determined by the heuristic for calculating the critical path may not be correct..

- A network of orders in SAP SCM consists of sales or projects orders, planned and production orders,and purchase requisitions, that are linked by means of pegging relationships.You should note that ERP collective orders - as before - are not transferred to SAP SCM as"complete objects" and are only available with the same scope of functions as in previous releases.This means that the order is integrated without fixed links between receipts and requirements.

- The planning-related offset at requirements between orders in SAP SCM is not copied from themaster data, but must be created or edited in the SCM system. When planned orders are created inSAP SCM the system proposes only planning-related and process-related minimum intervalsbetween operations from the production data structure. The data of the production data structure isfilled during transfer from the ERP system from the routing data (wait time, move time and queuetime) (SAP Note 604878).

Recommendation

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 93

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

It is recommended that fixed pegging is used for the process.

See also

For more information see the SAP Library for SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAPAPO) under Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Project Manufacturing andMake-to-Order Manufacturing.

For more information about the integration of project orders, see the Release Note for SAP SCM 4.1Project Orders (New).

3.4.9.15.2 Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Object Selection (Enhanced)

Use

Changing the Selection Screen

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the user interface of the initial screen has been changed. In addition to the work area,the sets of the products, resources, and orders are entered on their own tab pages.

You can change, delete, or add sets. You can also save these changes directly on the initial screen. Youcan either overwrite an existing work area or create a new work area.

Extended Selection

You can carry out an additional selection for products and resources using the Extend Selection...function in the detailed scheduling planning board. This is not possible for orders.

Each time you call the Extend Selection... function in the detailed scheduling planning board, you canspecify a new set for resources or products.

If you want to save all the sets that were loaded during the application as a result of the entries made onthe initial screen in a new work area, choose Planning Board -> Save Selection in the detailedscheduling planning board. A dialog box appears in which all sets are displayed. You cannot change thesets in the dialog box. When you confirm the dialog box, another dialog box appears in which you canenter a name for a new work area. You can also overwrite the work area specified.

If you want to make changes to the sets, exit the detailed scheduling planning board and return to theinitial screen. The entries made for the sets that were selected during the application are retained evenafter exiting the detailed scheduling planning board. You can edit the sets on the initial screen.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 94

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Changes to the User Interface

Simulation Version: Change when Calling

Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Menu Path Changed

3.4.9.15.3 Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Menu Path Changed (New)

Use

Since detailed scheduling has been enhanced with the resource planning table, the menu path for thedetailed scheduling planning board as well as for calling the simulation version has been changed.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can find all menu entries for detailed scheduling under Advanced Planningand Optimization -> Production Planning -> Interactive Production Planning -> DetailedScheduling.

See also

Detailed Scheduling: Resource Planning Table


Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Changes to the User Interface


3.4.9.15.4 Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Changes to the User Interface(Enhanced)

Use

Displaying a Selection Area

As of SAP SCM 5.0, when you call the detailed scheduling planning board for the first time, a selectionarea is displayed in which all the selected products and resources are listed. You can use the selection areato show and hide products and resources.

You can control the selection area display via Settings -> User Settings.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 95

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Defining a Customer-Specific Application Toolbar

You can define a customer-specific application toolbar for the detailed scheduling planning board inCustomizing under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> ProductionPlanning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Detailed Scheduling -> Settings for the DetailedScheduling Planning Board -> Maintain Planning Board Profiles under Toolbar: DisplayedFunctions.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can enter a pushbutton text that is displayed in the detailed scheduling planningboard with the pushbutton. Up to now you could only assign the function to an icon.

You can also define pushbuttons for heuristics and include them in the customer-specific toolbar. To doso, assign a pushbutton text or an icon to a heuristic in Customizing under Advanced Planning andOptimization -> Supply Chain Planning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling(PP/DS) -> Detailed Scheduling -> Heuristics in Detailed Scheduling -> Maintain Heuristics. Youthen assign the heuristic to the toolbar.

See also

Define Functions for the Toolbar in the DS Planning Board

Heuristics in the Context Menu

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also assign heuristics to the context menu. You can call the heuristics in thedetailed scheduling planning board with a right mouse click. In Customizing, you must add the heuristicsthat are in the planning table profile to the context menu. The context determines whether or not aheuristic is displayed.

Setting or Deleting the Conversion Indicator

You can set or delete the conversion indicator for planned orders and purchase requisitions directly in thedetailed scheduling planning board. To do so, choose

- Functions -> Order -> Set Conversion Indicator or

- Functions -> Order -> Delete Conversion Indicator

This function is possible for one or more orders.

Goto Receipts View

In addition, you can call the receipts view for selected objects via Goto -> Receipts View. You can setthe conversion indicator in the receipts view as well.

Two-Colored Product Stock and Fill Level Display

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define in Customizing that the product stock and fill level curves aredisplayed in different colors, depending on whether positive or negative values are displayed.

For products, you can define in Customizing in the planning board profile whether or not the shortage isto be displayed in color.

a) Select the corresponding profile and double-click Chart. A list of charts appears.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 96

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

b) Then select the row for the product stock chart and choose Details.

c) A series of tab pages is displayed in the details for the product stock chart. You can see theheadings of all the tab pages via the icon to the right of the tab pages.

d) Choose Histogram Data.

e) You define whether the curve is in color or not via the One Color Curve indicator.

You can also set this indicator for resources in the curve data in the planning board profile under Chart ->Resource Utilization. In the Displayed Objects screen area, select the Fill Lvl indicator.

See also

Maintain Planning Board Profiles

Selection Function Changed in Detailed Scheduling Planning Board

The selection procedure in the detailed scheduling planning board is now as follows:

- To select a block: select a row and while holding down the SHIFT key, select the last row of theblock.

- To select several individual rows: select a row and while holding down the CTRL key, select theother rows.

In Customizing, you can reset the selection procedure to the system behavior before SAP SCM 5.0 in thedetailed scheduling planning board on the detail screen under Further Settings by setting the indicatorSelection Proc.

See also

Maintain Planning Board Profiles

See also


Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Menu Path Changed


3.4.9.16 SCM-APO-PPS-PVW Product View

3.4.9.16.1 Changes in the Product Planning Table (Changed)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 97

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Several changes were made in the product planning table to improve usability.

Product Planning Table: Display Quantity in Chart Product View: Quantity Graphic

You can alternatively view the information that is displayed as a graphic on the Quantity Graphic chartfor the individual receipt and requirements components on the Product View: Single Elements andProduct View: Periodic charts.

For continuous consumption and continuous receipts, the system displays additional information in thegraphic that are not displayed on the charts described above. If you are working in a barrier-free mode, thesystem displays an ALV Grid Control for the graphic that contains the same information as the actualgraphic.

Product Planning Table: Period Views for Product, Resource, and Production

In the toolbar for the period views for the product, resource, and production, you can use the ColorLegend pushbutton to display the color descriptions that were defined for the color profile underAdvanced Planning and Optimization -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) ->Product Planning Table -> Set Layout.


Use





______________________________________________________________SAP AG 98

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.16.3 Product View: Enhanced Table Display (Enhanced)

Use

Until now, you could choose between a simple (Table Control) and an enhanced table display (ALV GridControl) on the following charts:

- Elements tab in the product view and the Product View: Single Elements chart in the productplanning table

- Periods tab in the product view and the Product View: Periodic chart in the product planning table

- Detail display for the Periods tab in the product view and the Product View: Periodic chart in theproduct planning table

- Resource View: Periodic in the product planning table

- Detail display for Resource View: Periodic in the activity list for order processing

- Production View: Periodic in the product planning table

- Production View: Elements in the product planning table

- Receipts view

- Requirements view

- Pegged requirements when displaying the context for an order

You can make settings for the list display under Settings -> User Settings on the General tab via theExtended Table Display indicator.

As of Release SCM 5.0, only the Extended Table Display indicator is used in the standard.

You can only use the Elements tab in the product view to switch from the Enhanced Table Display (ALVGrid) to the simple view (Table Control) via the User Settings. The settings are retained when thefunction is accessed again.

With the extended table display, you can print, sort, export, and define the layout. You can only carry outadditional functions, such as defining additional table columns, creating separate button profiles, ordetermining the colors for table rows in the extended table display (see Release Info Product View:Changed Functions).

See also

Product View: Changed Functions

Pegging Structure: Display Alerts and Sort Function

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 99

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.16.4 Pegging Structure: Display Alerts and Sort Function (New)

Use

The Pegging Structure tab can be found on the Order Context screen in the order processing view.

Filter for Nodes and Alerts

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can now define filters for nodes and alerts to in order to improve the layoutof the pegging structure.

You can make the following settings using the Filter Nodes and Alerts functions:

- Pegging Alerts for Current Context OnlyYou can use this filter to hide alerts that have no effect on the current pegging relationship.Previously, the system would always display all alerts for an element with several peggingrelationships, regardless of the pegging relationship causing the alert. This filter function allows youto display only those alerts that are relevant for the current pegging relationship. If there is no alertfor a pegging relationship, then the system will not display an alert.

- Only Nodes with Errors, Warnings, InfosYou can use this filter to hide all receipts and requirements without alerts for an order structure. Youcan choose three variants:

- Display nodes with errors, warnings, infos

- Display nodes with errors and warnings

- Display nodes with errors

You can, for example, combine the filter Pegging Alerts for Current Context Only with the filter OnlyNodes with Errors, Warnings, Infos.

Expand to Alert:

You can use the Expand to Alert function to expand the subtree to the nodes that have alerts. If, forexample, you have defined network alerts for requirements, you can quickly determine why a networkalert was issued.

You can choose from three variants:

- Expand to error, warning, info

- Expand to error, warning

- Expand to error

You can combine this function with the filter function.

Sort Function for Pegging Structure

Until now, the system would list open secondary requirements that were not yet linked to a receipt at theend of the pegging structure. As of Release SCM 5.0, the system lists the open secondary requirementsdirectly under the relevant order so that you can recognize them immediately. The system only then lists

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 100

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the receipts that are linked via a pegging relationship.

You can use the method Determine Individual Columns for Pegging Structure(RRP_USEX_COLS_FILL_04) in the Business Add-In (BAdI) Order View Enhancements(/SAPAPO/RRP_IO_COL) to define your own sort sequence. The structure RRP_STRUC_STR wasenhanced with three fields: SORT1, SORT2, and SORT3. In the standard delivery, the system fills theSORT1 field so that the secondary requirements are displayed before the receipts. You can then sort thefields according to your requirements. Sorting is always carried out at the hierarchy level.

3.4.9.16.5 Visualization Profiles for Characteristics

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system also displays the characteristic value assignments for CDP-relevantproducts. Previously, the system could only display characteristic value assignments for orders. The datafrom the product master has always been displayed for VC-relevant products.

You must define a visualization profile to display characteristic value assignments, for example, underDefine Visualization Profiles for MMP.

3.4.9.17 SCM-APO-PPS-POV Product Overview


Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 101

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




3.4.9.18 SCM-APO-PPS-SCF Scheduling Functions

3.4.9.18.1 Create/Delete Fixing and Planning Intervals (New)

Use

Until now, you could only manually create and delete fixing and planning intervals from the detailedscheduling planning board. As of SCM 5.0 SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the heuristic SAP_DS_02 tocreate and delete fixing and planning intervals. You can use this heuristic to create, delete, andreplace a fixing or a planning interval for a resource.

This heuristic can be included in the production planning run and can be accessed interactively from theDS planning board.

The heuristic also has additional functions:

- Deactivate sequence-dependent setup activitiesTo ensure a stable planning situation in the short-term horizon, you can deactivatesequence-dependent setup activities in the fixing interval that is to be created. The setup timedetermined from the setup matrix is then retained if the operation sequence on a resource changesdue to confirmations.

- Fix operationsOperations in the fixing interval are fixed, meaning the operations are protected from any potentialchanges made by detailed scheduling. The associated orders are not date fixed or PP-fixed. Thismeans that the orders can be changed at any time by production planning in an MRP run. To protectthese operations / orders from changes by production planning, you can use the Fix Operations fieldin the heuristic settings to define that the operations in the selected fixing interval are date fixed

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 102

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

and PP-fixed.

See also

Release Information Setup Matrix Enhancements

3.4.9.18.2 Setup Matrix (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the setup matrix has been enhanced with the following functions:

- Setup Transitions Without Setup Key ChangeIn the setup matrix, the new setup transition type I (Setup Transition Without Setup KeyChange) was implemented. This setup transition type is used to show the setup transitionbetween two identical setup keys. This is always the case if two orders were manufactured with thesame product on a resource.When determining the setup duration for sequence-dependent setup activities, the system proceedsas follows:

- The system first looks for an exception setup transition if an activity is assigned a setup key.

- If there is no exception setup transition, the system will look for a setup transition withoutsetup key change for the setup group to which the setup key belongs.

- If this setup transition type does not exist, the system will use the standard setup transition.

For more information, see Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) in the SAPLibrary under PP/DS Process -> Interactive Planning -> Detailed Scheduling Topics ->Detailed Scheduling -> Setup Matrix.

- Consider Rate of Resource Utilization for Setup ActivitiesUntil now, the system considered the rate of utilization you defined at the resource for orderscheduling (also when calculating the duration for setup). The system divided the setup time by therate of utilization (in percent).As the setup is generally independent of the rate of resource utilization, you can now use the report/SAPAPO/TSTREAM_EFF_CHANGE to determine for all clients that the system does not take therate of resource utilization into account when calculating the setup duration by choosing the relevantsetting in the Utilization for Setup field. Note that the user requires authorization to change allresources in order to successfully execute the report. To do so, use the authorization objectC_APO_RES.If you want to change system behavior with this report, note that the rate of utilization is changed forall resources in all planning and simulation versions. This will trigger rescheduling of the existingorders and is used to retransfer the orders to the R/3 system.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 103

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

ExampleNote the following example:The setup time calculated by the system from the setup matrix is 60 minutes. The processingduration is 5 minutes for each piece. The order quantity should be 100 pieces. You have defined50% as the rate of resource utilization.The system proceeds as follows during scheduling, depending on the settings made:

- Calculate the operation duration taking into account the rate of resource utilization forsetup timesOperation duration = Setup time/Utilization % + (Processing time x Order quantity)/Utilization%Operation duration = 60min/ 50% + (5min x 100 pcs)/ 50% = 120min + 1000 min= 1120 min

- Calculate the operation duration without taking into account the rate of resource utilizationfor setup timesOperation duration = Setup time + (Processing time x Order quantity)/Utilization%Operation duration = 60 min + (5min x 100 pcs)/ 50% = 1060 min

- Deactivate Sequence-Dependent Setup ActivitiesIn the short-term horizon, the planning situation is often influenced negatively when confirmationsare carried out. This is because the orders are confirmed in a sequence that deviates from what wasspecified for planning. The system creates a new sequence because of these confirmed activities, andgenerates new setup times for the sequence-dependent activities. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can nowdeactivate the sequence-dependent activities using the heuristic SAP_DS_02 Create Fixing andPlanning Intervals. This allows for a more stable planning situation as the system no longer changesthe setup times in the short-term horizon if the operation sequence has changed because ofconfirmations, for example.Note that you can also deactivate the sequence-dependent setup activities in optimization.Optimization must take the fixing interval into account and cannot reschedule the deactivatedsequence-dependent setup activities.To display deactivated sequence-dependent setup activities in color in the DS planning board, theplanning table profiles have been adjusted in the standard delivery. If you are working with one ofthese planning table profiles, the system will change how the setup activities are displayed as soonas they are either activated or deactivated.You can use the heuristic SAP_DS_04 to reactivate sequence-dependent setup activities that lieoutside of the planning time fence.

For more information, see Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) in the SAPLibrary under PP/DS Process -> Interactive Planning -> Detailed Scheduling Topics ->Detailed Scheduling -> Setup Matrix -> Deactivation of Sequence-Dependent SetupActivities.

- Integration of Setup Keys and Setup GroupsPreviously, you could not transfer setup key and setup group data from the ERP system to SAPSCM. The user had to maintain this data in both systems.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can create setup group keys and setup groups in the ERP system, andtransfer this data using the APO Core Interface.You can only integrate setup keys and groups if you are using SAP SCM with mySAP ERP 2005.Restrictions

- If you delete setup keys/groups in ERP, the system will not transfer this information. You must

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 104

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

delete this data manually in the SAP SCM system.

- You can only assign one setup key to a setup group in SAP APO.

For more information, see Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) in the SAPLibrary under PP/DS Process -> Interactive Planning -> Detailed Scheduling Topics ->Detailed Scheduling -> Setup Matrix-> Integration of Setup Groups.

- Generating Setup MatrixesAs of SAP SCM 5.0, you can create setup matrixes for characteristic values, and combine the setupmatrixes with one another. The system uses a generation report to generate a setup matrix from thespecified characteristic matrixes.You can only use the function with an R/3 system as of 4.6C and a Plug-In 2004/ 2005, or withmySAP ERP 2004 and mySAP ERP 2005.

You should use generated setup matrixes in scenarios where the resource setup status is determinedby a few characteristics. The resource must be set up when the characteristic/characteristic valueschange as the product is to be produced with very specific characteristics. Therefore, the productcharacteristics determine the setup times of the resource.Frequently, certain characteristics are combined and influence the setup status of a resource. Thecomplete sequence-dependent setup time of an operation is then determined by all relevantcharacteristics. You can the use rules to determine that the system generates a setup matrix for veryspecific characteristics matrixes. You also use the rules to define how the system behaves whencalculating the setup times and setup times.You can use the BAdI /SAPAPO/CDPS_MATGEN to influence how the system creates the namesfor the setup groups, and how the setup times/setup costs are to be calculated.

The SAP Easy Access Menu was enhanced with the following functions under Master Data ->Application-Specific Master Data ->Production Planning -> Setup Group/Setup Matrix:

- Maintain Setup Matrices for Characteristic Values

- Maintain Rules for Generating Setup Groups

- Maintain Rules for Generating Setup Matrices

- Generate Setup Matrices

- Display Flagged Setup Matrices

Restrictions

- You can only use generated setup matrixes if you are working with production data structuresthat are generated from the classic R/3/ ERP master data.

- You can only display and use setup groups and matrixes in SAP SCM. You cannot transferthem to the connected R/3 or ERP system.

- You can only use the classic setup group or the generated setup group in an operation.

For more information, see the SAP Library under Production Planning and DetailedScheduling (PP/DS) -> PP/DS Process -> Interactive Planning -> Detailed SchedulingTopics -> Detailed Scheduling -> Setup Matrix-> Generation of Setup Matrixes.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 105

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.18.3 Strategy Profile (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following parameters for the strategy profile were enhanced:

- Scheduling ModeThe new scheduling mode Infinite Sequencing allows the system to reschedule only selectedoperations with their dependent operation. The selected operations are scheduled without gaps anddo not take the existing capacity situation into account for the requested date on the resource(infinite).The new scheduling mode is available in the expert view and the DS view of the strategy profile.You can use infinite sequencing for single and multi-activity resources.Dependent operations are scheduled infinitely, independent of the settings you defined in thestrategy profile.

RestrictionsYou cannot use infinite sequencing if you are using operations with sequence-dependent setupactivities.

- Scheduling SubmodeThe scheduling submode for Scheduling Dependent Operations Infinitely was changed as of SAPSCM 5.0. The reason for this is that dependent operations must retain their scheduling status; thismeans that a dependent operation that is deallocated must remain deallocated when the operationselected by the user is rescheduled. This was implemented in SAP SCM 5.0.The scheduling submode Find Slot in Sched. Mode 'Find Slot', Otherwise Infinitely was alsochanged. The scheduling status of the dependent operations is retained here.The following scheduling submodes are available in the DS view as of SAP SCM 5.0:

- Schedule Dependent Operations Infinitely

- Deallocate Dependent Operations

- Find Slot in Sched. Mode 'Find Slot', Otherwise Infinitely

The following scheduling submodes are available in the expert view:

- Schedule Dependent Operations InfinitelyThe system schedules all dependent operation infinitely when this scheduling submode is used.The system infinitely schedules a dependent operation that was deallocated beforerescheduling; the scheduling status is also changed here.

- Schedule Dependent Operations According to Scheduling Mode

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 106

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For additional information on the scheduling mode Infinite Sequencing, see the SAP Library underSAP Supply Chain Management (SCM)--> SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAPAPO) --> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -->PP/DS Process -->Interactive Planning --> Detailed Scheduling Topics --> Detailed Scheduling --> ControllingDetailed Scheduling --> Detailed Scheduling Strategy --> Settings for Selected Operations -->Scheduling Mode --> Infinite Sequencing.

You can also find more information on the scheduling mode in the SAP Library under DetailedScheduling --> Controlling Detailed Scheduling --> Detailed Scheduling Strategy --> Settings forDependent Operations --> Scheduling Submode.

3.4.9.19 SCM-APO-PPS-FP Fixed Pegging

3.4.9.19.1 Fixed Pegging in Backorder Processing (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify that the system should not only create a fixed pegging relationshipdirectly during the ATP check between the customer demand and the receipts element assigned to it, butalso during backorder processing (BOP). During backorder processing, the system runs a new ATP checkin the background for all sales orders to update the confirmations after a PP/DS planning run. In so doing,the system automatically creates a fixed pegging relationship between a sales order and the receiptselement that was assigned in backorder processing.

Backorder processing is executed in the background. You should have the final result checked by theproduction planner responsible for ATP.

Prerequisites

You are working with a Check Mode in which Characteristic evaluation is set in theproduction typefield. With this setting, the system executes an ATP check based on Production Planning and DetailedScheduling, which in turn is a prerequisite for automatically creating fixed pegging relationships.

You are using one of the following CTP classes:

- /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_CTP

- /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_FIX

Both classes have been enhanced so that the system can create fixed pegging relationships in the ATPcheck and in backorder processing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 107

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Fixed Pegging in the ATP and CTP Process

3.4.9.19.2 CTP and Multilevel ATP Check (Enhanced)

Use




Prerequisites




Advantages

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 108

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The advantages of recreating receipts for a new ATP/CTP check due to changes made to an existingsales order include the following:



Restrictions




- Direct Production with Receipt RedistributionIf you have chosen the Direct Production option in the Start Production field in the checkinstructions, then the system will distribute surplus receipt elements on the checked customerrequirements via a net requirements calculation during the CTP check. If the quantity is notsufficient, then planning creates a receipt element for the checked customer requirements.Assignments that the system has already made for the previous availability checks are retained. Thismeans that if there was a suitable receipt element or stock for the new requirement, the system doesnot assign the available receipt element or requirement to the new requirement as the receiptelement/stock is already assigned to a different requirement. In this case, the system has created anew receipt element that was not suitable.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can now use the function Direct Production with Receipt Redistribution. Ifyou have set the relevant indicator in the PP procedure, then the system checks if there is sufficientstock or a receipt element that fits in regards to the date for a new customer requirement, and thenassigns it to the new requirement. The system will also do this if the receipt element or the stock hadalready been assigned to a different requirement. Planning must have created a new receipt elementfor the other requirement. This will result in a more suitable confirmation date.

Restrictions:


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 109

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




3.4.9.19.3 Planning Procedure for Fixed Pegging (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the planning procedure in PP/DS Customizing was enhanced with the followingfields:

- ABAP Class for Fixed Pegging

- Consider Batches

- Consider Characteristics

You can use these new fields to implement industry-specific requirements for maintaining fixed peggingrelationships more easily. The following methods of BAdI /SAPAPO/DM_FIXPEG are thereforesuperfluous:

- CONSIDER_BATCHES

- CONSIDER_CHARACTERISTICS

- PRESORT_RECEIPTS_AND_DEMANDS

- RECALCULATE_PEGGING

If you are already using fixed pegging and have implemented these BAdI methods, you can still continueto work with them. The implemented logic is then still valid for all products in the system.

If you are working with these new fields in the planning procedure</, the settings are only valid forthose products that are assigned the relevant planning procedure.

If you have set the indicators in Customizing or have specified an ABAP class, then the system willoverwrite the settings you made in the BAdI.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 110

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.19.4 Fixed Pegging in the ATP and CTP Process (Enhanced)

Use

Create Fixed Pegging Relationships at Finished Product Level

Previously, you needed to carry out the heuristic SAP_PP_019 Create Fixed Pegging Relationshipsin the ATP and CTP process several times a day after confirming the sales order. This fixed theassignments between the requirement and receipt elements created by the ATP or CTP check. Theconfirmation situation may have also changed by the time the heuristic was carried out because theheuristic was normally executed in a separate planning step.

As of Release SCM 5.0, the PP planning procedure was enhanced in such a way that the system nowautomatically creates fixed pegging relationships between customer requirements and receipt elements inan ATP and CTP process, after you have saved the confirmed sales order. This fixes the assignment thatthe ATP/CTP check created at the finished product level. A confirmed sales order item is therefore fixedto the relevant receipt element. With this procedure, you no longer need to execute the heuristicSAP_PP_019 at the finished product level because the system has already created the fixed peggingrelationships automatically.

You can use this new function by choosing the Create Fixed Pegging Relationships option in theFixed Pegging in CTP/ATP field. You can only select this option for planning procedures with the actionStart Product Heuristic Immediately (such as planning procedure 3), or with the action CreatePlanning File Entries (such as planning procedure 4). In order for the system to automatically createfixed pegging relationships at the finished product level, you must assign a relevant ABAP class to theplanning procedure. The following table provides a few examples of possible setting combinations youcan make:

PP Procedure ABAP Class Fix.Pegging Use

3 /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_CTP Create Fixed Peg. Relatshp CTP Process

3 /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_FIX Create Fixed Peg. Relatshp CTP Process

4 /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_FIX Create Fixed Peg. Relatshp ATP Process

Create Fixed Pegging for Multilevel Planning

If you carry out multilevel planning for the CTP process, you can define that the system also creates fixedpegging relationships for important assemblies/components in the multilevel CTP check.

The following prerequisites must be met to create multi-level fixed pegging relationships in the CTPprocess:

- You have created a planning procedure for the finished product using the action Start ProductHeuristic Immediately and entered the ABAP class /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_CTP. You have alsoselected the option for creating fixed pegging in the Fixed Pegging in CTP/ATP Processes field.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 111

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- You have created a planning procedure for important assembly groups/components by defining theevent Create or Change Dependent Stock Transfer Reqmt in PP/DS in combination withone of the following actions:

- Cover Dep./Stk Tr. Reqmnt Immediately

- Cover Dep./Stk Tr. Reqmnt Immediately, If Possible

- Cover Dep./Stk Tr. Reqmnt Immediately with Existing Receipts

You have selected the option Create Fixed Pegging Relationships or Create Fix. PeggingRelatshps in ATP Checking Horizon Only in the Fixed Pegging in Multilevel Planningfield in the planning procedure you created.

The process looks as follows during a CTP check:

1. Create a sales order and execute a CTP check for the finished product.

2. The system creates a planned order for the finished product.

3. The system determines the components to which the planning procedure is to be applied.

4. The system checks the components and creates a planned order with the missing quantity.

5. The system adjusts the dates and times of the planned order for the finished product, and determinesthe confirmation date.

6. The system confirms the sales order.

7. After the sales order has been saved, the system automatically creates fixed pegging relationshipsbetween the assignments that the system created during the CTP check:

- Between the sales order item and the planned order(s) at the finished product level.

- Between the secondary requirement and the planned order that the system created for thecomponent at the finished product level.

Create Fixed Pegging Using BAdI /SAPAPO/RRP_IO_CHECK

The system can also create fixed pegging relationships in multilevel planning at the component levelusing the BAdI Extend Multilevel Planning (CTP) /SAPAPO/RRP_IO_CHECK. You do not needto specify that fixed pegging relationships are to be created in the planning procedure.

Restrictions

- You can only use the CTP/ATP check when creating fixed relationships if you have assigned acheck mode to the product to be checked using the production type Characteristic Valuation.

- Only sales orders, customer quotations and inquiries, and scheduling agreements are supported. Youcannot use the ATP check when creating fixed pegging relationships for planned and manufacturingorders.

- The multilevel ATP check in combination with the availability check is not supported. Onlyimportant components that were planned with the planning procedure 3 can be checked using a CTPcheck.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 112

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The data to be checked in SAP APO are not locked during a CTP check or multilevel planning withplanning procedure 3. Checks that are run in parallel can therefore influence the results of a separateCTP check. This restriction is independent of the enhancements made to fixed pegging in the CTPprocess.


The PP planning procedure was enhanced with the following fields in Customizing for ProductionPlanning and Detailed Scheduling:

- The Fixed Pegging in CTP/ATP field was added at the planning procedure level.The option Do Not Create Fixed Pegging Relationships is set as the default.

- The Fixed Pegging in Multilevel Planning field was added at the events level.The option Do Not Create Fixed Pegging Relationships is set as the default.

3.4.9.20 SCM-APO-PPS-LPP Length-Based Planning

3.4.9.20.1 Cutting Receipts (Changed)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can cover requirements in Long Products Planning (LPP) andAvailable-to-Promise (ATP) by cutting receipts.


You can use the BAdI /SAPAPO/EOGL_REC_SRT to change the sort order of stocks and receipts. Formore information, see Customizing for Advanced Planning and Optimization under Supply ChainPlanning -> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) -> Business Add Ins (BAdIs) forPP/DS -> Sorting LPP Receipts Before Requirement Coverage.

3.4.9.20.2 Length Plan

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 113

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the function module /SAPAPO/EOGL_LC_GET_RESULT to triggerthe creation of a length plan, in addition to the length calculation. After this function module is executed,the system reexplodes the production data structure (PDS) with the function module/SAPAPO/RRP_EXPLODE. The system carries out the length calculation again to create the length plan.The results are not updated in the system. You cannot access or display the length plan on the userinterface because the length plan data is only available for further processing in internal tables. You canuse these internal tables to integrate the length plan in the print output for the production version.

See also

For more information, see the documentation for the function module/SAPAPO/EOGL_LC_GET_RESULT.

3.4.9.20.3 Consideration of Length Allowances for Operation Durations

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, length allowances are taken into consideration in long products planning whenoperation durations are calculated.

3.4.9.21 SCM-APO-PPS-MMP Model Mix Planning

3.4.9.21.1 Model Mix Planning (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, model mix planning/sequencing has been enhanced with the followingfunctions:

Consider Minimum Quantities

Until now, you could only specify a maximum quantity for quantity restrictions. You can now use the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 114

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

field Minimum for the quantity restriction in constraint processing. Here, you can specify a minimumquantity, in which at least one specific characteristic value combination is to be scheduled. For example,you can define that at least 10 blue vehicles must be scheduled per shift.

Note that only the LP procedure and genetic algorithm can take the specified minimum quantity intoconsideration.

You can specify either a minimum or maximum quantity or both for a restriction. The system considersthe specified quantities in one of the following ways:

- Maximum OnlyIf you specify a maximum quantity in the Maximum field, the system will only consider themaximum quantity.

- Minimum OnlyIf you specify a minimum quantity in the Minimum field, the system will only consider theminimum quantity.

- Minimum and MaximumIf you specify quantities in both fields, the system will take both the minimum and maximumquantity into consideration. The minimum quantity specified must be smaller than or equal to themaximum quantity. If this is not the case, the system will issue a corresponding error message.

- No Quantity SpecifiedIf you do not specify a quantity in the Minimum and Maximum fields, the system will set bothquantities to 0. In this case, the system cannot schedule any orders with the characteristic valueassignment you defined on the Dependencies tab page.

The following APIs were also enhanced for constraint processing:

- /SAPAPO/RET_API_CREATE

- /SAPAPO/RET_API_CHANGE

Consider Line Priorities for Genetic Algorithm

If you carry out multiline planning in the short-term planning horizon, you must use the geneticalgorithm. In the procedure profile of the genetic algorithm, you can now define that the geneticalgorithm considers the priorities of alternative lines. Until now, the system could not take the linepriorities defined in the iPPE line design into account. The system would then distribute the orders to bescheduled evenly on all the lines in a group of alternative lines. If you have set the Consider LinePriorities indicator in Customizing for the procedure profile, the system will try to schedule the orderswith the highest priority on the line, taking into account the restrictions and the requirements date/time.

The following prerequisites must be met for the system to consider line priorities:

- You have set the Planning Segment indicator for the group of alternative lines in the iPPE LineDesign.

- You have defined the lines for the part of line network in the iPPE Line Design, and specified thepriority for alternative lines. The system uses this priority to schedule the orders on the lines.

- You have created production versions for the products to be manufactured. In the Line Structurearea, you have also specified the line network and the part of line network on which theproduct is to be manufactured.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 115

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- You have set the Consider Line Priorities indicator in Customizing for Model Mix Planning inthe procedure profile of the genetic algorithm.

For more information on multiline planning and considering line priorities, see the SAP Library underSAP Supply Chain Management (SCM)--> SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -->Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS) --> PP/DS Process --> Automated ProductionPlanning and Optimization --> Model Mix Planning --> Maintaining Master Data --> Procedures -->Genetic Algorithm (Multilines) --> Multiline Planning with Genetic Algorithm While Considering LinePriorities.

Optimize Partial Sequences

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can now optimize a specific number of orders you selected within a shift forsequencing. Previously, the smallest quantity of orders for which you could carry out optimization fromthe sequence schedule was specified by the shift. If you carried out optimization again in sequencing, thenthe entire order sequence (all orders scheduled in a shift) were transferred to optimization. However, it isbetter to optimize a specific partial quantity of orders that are scheduled in a shift. As of SAP SCM 5.0,you can select the required partial sequence and execute optimization for these orders only. You canoptimize partial sequences in addition to sequencing orders that were scheduled in an entire shift, day, orin a model mix planning run. This improves planning results for the selected partial quantity.

This procedure offers the following advantages:

- Performance in sequencing is improved as only those orders selected by the user and not the entireorder sequence in a shift or day have to be transferred to optimization.

- Quality of optimization results is improved as smaller order sequences lead to fewer restrictionviolations.

- Optimization runtime is shorter due to smaller order sequences.

Restrictions

- When optimizing partial sequences, the system cannot consider quantity and position restrictionsas these restriction types are always defined with reference to a shift or a day.

- The system takes the remaining four restriction types into account during optimization. However,restrictions may be violated where the selected orders border one another. This can affect orders inthe optimized partial sequence as well as those orders that are scheduled directly before or after theoptimized partial sequence. A partial sequence that violates certain restrictions can influence thequality of the entire order sequence in a period (shift or several days) negatively. However,inconsistencies can also occur when optimizing the entire shift. Restrictions may also be violated forthose orders where the shifts border one another.

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management (SCM)--> SAPAdvanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) --> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling(PP/DS) -->PP/DS Process Model Mix Planning --> Execute Model Mix Planning --> InteractiveSequencing --> Optimization in Sequencing --> Optimization of Partial Sequences.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can make customer-specific settings for the layouts of the four charts insequencing, and assign these layouts to the desired lines. This allows you to define a separate layout foreach line and chart, and to influence the list display according to the requirements of the individual lines.

In previous releases, you could only make user-specific adjustments to the layout. This means that exactlyone line-dependent layout was available for each chart. You can use this new function to create aline-specific layout and assign it to the corresponding line. The transaction for assigning a layout to a line

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 116

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

is located in the menu for Model Mix Planning.

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management (SCM)--> SAPAdvanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) --> Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling(PP/DS) --> PP/DS Process -->Automated Production Planning and Optimization --> Model MixPlanning --> Execute Model Mix Planning --> Interactive Sequencing --> Define User and Line-SpecificLayouts.


The IMG activity Define Genetic Algorithm was enhanced with the Consider Line Priorities field. Theindicator is not set in the standard profiles of the genetic algorithm.

3.4.9.22 SCM-APO-PPS-RPM Planning Matrix

3.4.9.22.1 Rapid Planning Matrix (Enhanced)

Use

- Introduction of RPM Time SeriesAs of SAP SCM 5.0, the system can generate RPM time series following an RPM run for thedependent requirements determined by the RPM. Up to now, the system had to read each of theserequirements from the matrix when displaying the component requirements calculated. So that thesystem can display component requirements quicker, static time series, in which the dependentrequirements are stored as the sum per period, were introduced for SAP SCM 5.0. This enables datato be read noticeably quicker than previously.Note that only the component requirements that have the Collective Req. indicator can be stored inthe RPM time series. The dependent requirements of these components are summarized according tothe settings in the period profile.In the product view, you can display the summarized demands of a component per period. For eachRPM requirement, the RPM, from which the dependent requirement is calculated, is shown in theReceipt/Requirement Element column. If you double click on the name of the RPM, an overviewlisting the pegged orders appears.The system outputs single records for components for which you have defined individual customerrequirements. These components are saved as input nodes in the end product order.

- Long-Term Planning Matrices RemovedFor SAP SCM 5.0, the long-term planning matrices have been removed due to the introduction ofRPM time series. It is therefore also no longer possible to make settings for the long-term planning

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 117

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

matrices in the additional data for the RPM product.

- Integration of Pegging and the Alert MonitorUp to now, pegging could not consider requirements calculated by the matrix. Since determiningalerts is based on pegging relationships that the system creates between the requirement and receiptelements, the system could therefore not determine correct alerts.As of SAP SCM 5.0, pegging can also consider requirements from the RPM. The dynamic peggingrelationships, which the system has created between a requirement and a suitable receipt element, aredisplayed in the Pegging Overview .The system can now also determine quantity alerts and display them in the product view. You cancall the alerts for missing components in the product view of the RPM product. You can displayalerts for missing or late receipt elements in the product view of a component.Due to the aggregation of RPM requirements, it can however occur that the system has assignedalerts to an aggregated requirement but not to the individual order, and vice versa.The Alert Profile was extended by the Trigger RPM Requirement indicator.

- Use of OptimizationAs of SAP SCM 5.0, the functions of PP/DS optimization are also available for the receipt elementsof the RPM requirements. You can perform optimization for these orders. During optimization, thesystem now notes pegging relationships and can consider delay costs.

- Restrictions:

- Fixed pegging is not possible.

- Calculated pegging quantities are not saved continuously.

- Continual input/output is not possible.

- You cannot reschedule RPM orders using the Forward Scheduling and EnhancedBackward Planning heuristics.

- Not all navigation possibilities in the PP/DS transactions are available for the RPMrequirements.

- You cannot display the RPM requirements in the product view on the ATP tab page. Onlyfixed components can be displayed and checked.

- The system cannot consider aggregated RPM requirements in the detailed scheduling planningboard.


The settings for generating RPM time series have been added to Customizing for the RPM matrix in theIMG activity Maintain Global Settings. In the default Customizing, the RPM time series are activated. Itis therefore not necessary to make any Customizing settings to use this new function.

In the transaction MDRPM Control Data for RPM Products , you must define when you want the system

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 118

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

to create time series for RPM requirements in the Use RPM Time Series field. SAP recommends thesetting Create RPM Time Series for Components After RPM Runs.

3.4.9.23 SCM-APO-PPS-HEU Heuristics

3.4.9.23.1 Capacity-Driven Order Creation (New)

Use

As of Release SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the heuristic Capacity-Driven Order Creation. You can usethis heuristic to create a new planned order, or adjust the quantity of an existing planned order so as toensure the best possible utilization of the resource. You can access the heuristic from one of the followingapplications:

- Detailed scheduling planning board

- Resource planning board

Restrictions

- The order quantity is adjusted by taking into account the capacity of the selected resource. If an orderreserves additional resources, the system will not take the capacity of the resources into accountwhen adjusting the quantity.

- The heuristic can only be used for resources with time-continuous capacity (single andmulti-resources). Bucket resources cannot be scheduled with this heuristic.

- The heuristic does not aim for 100% capacity utilization; this means that after you have carried outthe heuristic, capacity gaps may still remain in the selected time period.

- You cannot use the heuristic if a variable continuous consumption has been maintained in thesource of supply of the product for multi-resources.

- You cannot include the heuristic in a production planning run.

- For more restrictions, see the documentation on the heuristic.


You can find the heuristic in Customizing for Production and Detailed Scheduling in the IMG activityMaintain Heuristics under SAP_PP_CDOC.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 119

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.23.2 Create/Delete Fixing and Planning Intervals (New)

Use

Until now, you could only manually create and delete fixing and planning intervals from the detailedscheduling planning board. As of SCM 5.0 SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the heuristic SAP_DS_02 tocreate and delete fixing and planning intervals. You can use this heuristic to create, delete, andreplace a fixing or a planning interval for a resource.

This heuristic can be included in the production planning run and can be accessed interactively from theDS planning board.

The heuristic also has additional functions:

- Deactivate sequence-dependent setup activitiesTo ensure a stable planning situation in the short-term horizon, you can deactivatesequence-dependent setup activities in the fixing interval that is to be created. The setup timedetermined from the setup matrix is then retained if the operation sequence on a resource changesdue to confirmations.

- Fix operationsOperations in the fixing interval are fixed, meaning the operations are protected from any potentialchanges made by detailed scheduling. The associated orders are not date fixed or PP-fixed. Thismeans that the orders can be changed at any time by production planning in an MRP run. To protectthese operations / orders from changes by production planning, you can use the Fix Operations fieldin the heuristic settings to define that the operations in the selected fixing interval are date fixedand PP-fixed.

See also

Release Information Setup Matrix Enhancements

3.4.9.23.3 PP/DS Heuristics (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following new heuristics are available:

- New explosion (SAP_PP_021)You can now interactively call the new explosion and execute it for just one order. It is alwaysnecessary to re-explode an order if you have made changes to the master data or have changed theorder quantity. Up to now, the system redetermined the scheduling dates of the operations duringevery new explosion. This was often superfluous and not desired, since not all bill of materialchanges influence the scheduling situation of the operations.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 120

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify in the Heuristic Settings that the system keeps the modes anddates of the scheduled operations during a new explosion. That way the planning situation remainsstable.

- Multilevel planning of individual orders (SAP_PP_022)This new service heuristic enables multilevel planning of an order with consideration of thelow-level codes. From the detailed scheduling table, you can interactively select resources andactivities or directly select an order. The system determines the dependent orders and executesmultilevel planning. To do this, the system works with the heuristic that you assigned in the heuristicsettings of SAP_PP_022. We recommend that you use the rescheduling heuristics bottom-up ortop-down.

The following heuristics have been enhanced for SAP SCM 5.0:

- Rescheduling heuristics bottom-up and top-down (SAP_PP_009 and SAP_PP_010)These heuristics have been enhanced so that you can interactively select an order or an activity (fromthe detailed scheduling table, for example) for which you want the system to execute rescheduling.This is a single-level process. If you want to execute multilevel rescheduling for an entire ordernetwork, you must include the heuristic in the service heuristic described above.

In addition, the heuristic settings have been enhanced with the safety time field. You can specifyhere whether or not you want the system to use the safety time you defined in the product master, orif you only want the system to use the safety time as long as it does not cause scheduling violations.

- Manual order change (SAP_PP_001)Up to now, you were not able to make heuristic settings in the heuristic for manual order change. Asof SCM 5.0, the following setting options are available:

- Retain Mode on New Explosion

- Retain Operation DatesWith these indicators, you can ensure that the system will not change the mode and will keepthe operation dates during a new explosion in interactive planning. This was not possible up tonow, which meant that if the quantities were changed, the operations were rescheduled, forexample.

- Create Planning File Entry for ComponentWith this setting, you can ensure that the system creates a planning file entry for all thecomponents of the order.

- In the following heuristics, the Heuristic Settings have been enhanced with the Retain Mode onNew Explosion and Retain Operation Dates on New Explosion indicators:

- SAP_PP_002 Planning of standard lot sizes

- SAP_PP_003 Planning of shortage quantities

- SAP_PP_004 Planning of standard lot sizes in 3 horizons

- SAP_PP_005 Part period balancing

- SAP_PP_013 Groff reorder procedure

- SAP_PP_017 Planning of standard lot sizes for manufacture of co-products

- SAP_PP_C001 Planning of standard lot sizes for conti- I/O

- SAP_PP_SL001 Planning of standard lot sizes with shelf life

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 121

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.9.23.4 Enhanced Backward Scheduling (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the heuristic SAP_DS _02 Enhanced Backward Scheduling. Youcan use the heuristic after an infinite MRP run. The heuristic carries out backward scheduling to create aproduction plan taking into account available capacity and trying to make sure that the order dates/timesare in line with the requested delivery dates/times.

The heuristic does not carry out sequencing, but looks for available capacity for the orders to bescheduled.

You can call the heuristic interactively from the DS planning board, or can execute the heuristic in thebackground by including it in a production planning run.

You can use the BAdI Enhance Backward Scheduling to influence how the heuristic runs.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling ->PP/DS Process -> Basic Functions -> Detailed Scheduling -> Detailed Scheduling Heuristics ->Enhanced Backward Scheduling.

3.4.9.24 SCM-APO-PPS-RPT Resource Planning Table

3.4.9.24.1 Detailed Scheduling: Resource Planning Table (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the resource planning table is available as an additional planning tool in detailed

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 122

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

scheduling.

The resource planning table is an alternative to the detailed scheduling planning board. In the resourceplanning table, the information regarding the capacity utilization of resources is displayed in tabular form,unlike in the detailed scheduling planning board, which is a graphical tool.

You call the resource planning table from the SAP Easy Access mySAP Supply Chain Management screenunder Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Production Planning -> Interactive ProductionPlanning -> Detailed Scheduling -> Resource Planning Table.

See also

Detailed Scheduling Planning Board: Menu Path Changed (New)

3.4.10 SCM-APO-ATP Global Available-to-Promise

3.4.10.1 SCM-APO-ATP-BF Basic Functions

3.4.10.1.1 Advice Code (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, global available-to-promise (ATP) supports advice codes for stock transport ordersand stock transport requisitions from SAP ECC Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security.

The system supports the following advice codes for stock transport orders:

- no product substitutions

- complete quantities only

- complete packaging units only

- no delayed confirmation

For stock transport requisitions, the system supports the advice code complete quantities only. Theother advice codes are automatically fulfilled for stock transport requisitions.

System requirements

SAP ECC Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security.

The enterprise extension must be activated.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 123

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


To specify the advice code, in Customizing for global ATP, choose specify advice code.

3.4.10.2 SCM-APO-ATP-RND Rounding

3.4.10.2.1 Rounding (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, Global Available-to-Promise supports the following rounding options:

- Rounding to pack sizesYou can round requirement quantities or confirmed quantities up or down to pack sizes. Rounding topack sizes ensures that packaging materials do not have to be broken up. Packaging materials thathave complete contents make storage and transportation easier.

- Rounding to sales unitsYou can round confirmed quantities down to sales units. Rounding to sales units ensures that youdeliver the products to the customer in the sales unit they require.

System Requirements

- Rounding to pack sizesSAP CRM 5.0

- Rounding to sales unitsSAP ECC Enterprise Extension Defense Forces & Public Security.The Enterprise Extension must be activated.

See also

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Rounding in Global ATP.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 124

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.10.3 SCM-APO-ATP-PSS Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock

3.4.10.3.1 Parameter-dependent ATP safety stock (new)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can exclude the parameter-dependent ATP safety stock (PASS) from the ATP scopeof check during a product availability check. The PASS is a variable safety stock calculated by the systemusing the following values:

- a percentage portion of the safety stock

- a percentage portion of the forecasted requirement

With the PASS, you can (flexibly) protect a certain stock quantity independently of various parameters.You can choose any field in the field catalog as a parameter. If, for example, you have chosen the ordertype as a parameter of the PASS, then the PASS ensures that the system does not confirm the total stockfor all sales orders or stock transfers . This ensures that stock is always available, for example, for rushsales orders.


You make settings for the PASS in Customizing for the global ATP check under Product AvailabilityCheck -> Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock.

Furthermore, you must ensure that the Safety Stock (CB) category is not within the check scope of theavailability check in Check Control.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability Check Basic Methods -> ProductAvailability Check -> Parameter-Dependent ATP Safety Stock.

3.4.10.4 SCM-APO-ATP-PRD ATP in Conjunction With Production

3.4.10.4.1 Availability Check for Kits (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can execute the availability check for kits. The system then explodes the bill ofmaterial of the kits and executes an availability check for the kit components. The rules-based ATP checkcan determine substitutions for kit components. The availability check for kits corresponds to a simplifiedproduction, since the picking of kit components already represents production.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 125

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

System requirements

SAP CRM 5.0


To activate production for a kit in Customizing for Global ATP, you must make the following settings:

- in maintain check mode choose the product type kit check

- in maintain check instructions, start production

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability Check Enhanced Methods ->Multi-Step ATP Check - Capable-To-Promise (CTP) by Comparison -> Availability Check forKits.

3.4.10.4.2 CTP and Multilevel ATP Check (Enhanced)

Use




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 126

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Prerequisites




AdvantagesThe advantages of recreating receipts for a new ATP/CTP check due to changes made to an existingsales order include the following:



Restrictions




- Direct Production with Receipt RedistributionIf you have chosen the Direct Production option in the Start Production field in the checkinstructions, then the system will distribute surplus receipt elements on the checked customerrequirements via a net requirements calculation during the CTP check. If the quantity is notsufficient, then planning creates a receipt element for the checked customer requirements.Assignments that the system has already made for the previous availability checks are retained. Thismeans that if there was a suitable receipt element or stock for the new requirement, the system doesnot assign the available receipt element or requirement to the new requirement as the receiptelement/stock is already assigned to a different requirement. In this case, the system has created a

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 127

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

new receipt element that was not suitable.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can now use the function Direct Production with Receipt Redistribution. Ifyou have set the relevant indicator in the PP procedure, then the system checks if there is sufficientstock or a receipt element that fits in regards to the date for a new customer requirement, and thenassigns it to the new requirement. The system will also do this if the receipt element or the stock hadalready been assigned to a different requirement. Planning must have created a new receipt elementfor the other requirement. This will result in a more suitable confirmation date.

Restrictions:





3.4.10.4.3 Fixed Pegging in the ATP and CTP Process (Enhanced)

Use

Create Fixed Pegging Relationships at Finished Product Level

Previously, you needed to carry out the heuristic SAP_PP_019 Create Fixed Pegging Relationshipsin the ATP and CTP process several times a day after confirming the sales order. This fixed theassignments between the requirement and receipt elements created by the ATP or CTP check. Theconfirmation situation may have also changed by the time the heuristic was carried out because theheuristic was normally executed in a separate planning step.

As of Release SCM 5.0, the PP planning procedure was enhanced in such a way that the system nowautomatically creates fixed pegging relationships between customer requirements and receipt elements inan ATP and CTP process, after you have saved the confirmed sales order. This fixes the assignment thatthe ATP/CTP check created at the finished product level. A confirmed sales order item is therefore fixedto the relevant receipt element. With this procedure, you no longer need to execute the heuristicSAP_PP_019 at the finished product level because the system has already created the fixed pegging

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 128

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

relationships automatically.

You can use this new function by choosing the Create Fixed Pegging Relationships option in theFixed Pegging in CTP/ATP field. You can only select this option for planning procedures with the actionStart Product Heuristic Immediately (such as planning procedure 3), or with the action CreatePlanning File Entries (such as planning procedure 4). In order for the system to automatically createfixed pegging relationships at the finished product level, you must assign a relevant ABAP class to theplanning procedure. The following table provides a few examples of possible setting combinations youcan make:

PP Procedure ABAP Class Fix.Pegging Use

3 /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_CTP Create Fixed Peg. Relatshp CTP Process

3 /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_FIX Create Fixed Peg. Relatshp CTP Process

4 /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_FIX Create Fixed Peg. Relatshp ATP Process

Create Fixed Pegging for Multilevel Planning

If you carry out multilevel planning for the CTP process, you can define that the system also creates fixedpegging relationships for important assemblies/components in the multilevel CTP check.

The following prerequisites must be met to create multi-level fixed pegging relationships in the CTPprocess:

- You have created a planning procedure for the finished product using the action Start ProductHeuristic Immediately and entered the ABAP class /SAPAPO/CL_RRP_CTP. You have alsoselected the option for creating fixed pegging in the Fixed Pegging in CTP/ATP Processes field.

- You have created a planning procedure for important assembly groups/components by defining theevent Create or Change Dependent Stock Transfer Reqmt in PP/DS in combination withone of the following actions:

- Cover Dep./Stk Tr. Reqmnt Immediately

- Cover Dep./Stk Tr. Reqmnt Immediately, If Possible

- Cover Dep./Stk Tr. Reqmnt Immediately with Existing Receipts

You have selected the option Create Fixed Pegging Relationships or Create Fix. PeggingRelatshps in ATP Checking Horizon Only in the Fixed Pegging in Multilevel Planningfield in the planning procedure you created.

The process looks as follows during a CTP check:

1. Create a sales order and execute a CTP check for the finished product.

2. The system creates a planned order for the finished product.

3. The system determines the components to which the planning procedure is to be applied.

4. The system checks the components and creates a planned order with the missing quantity.

5. The system adjusts the dates and times of the planned order for the finished product, and determinesthe confirmation date.

6. The system confirms the sales order.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 129

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

7. After the sales order has been saved, the system automatically creates fixed pegging relationshipsbetween the assignments that the system created during the CTP check:

- Between the sales order item and the planned order(s) at the finished product level.

- Between the secondary requirement and the planned order that the system created for thecomponent at the finished product level.

Create Fixed Pegging Using BAdI /SAPAPO/RRP_IO_CHECK

The system can also create fixed pegging relationships in multilevel planning at the component levelusing the BAdI Extend Multilevel Planning (CTP) /SAPAPO/RRP_IO_CHECK. You do not needto specify that fixed pegging relationships are to be created in the planning procedure.

Restrictions

- You can only use the CTP/ATP check when creating fixed relationships if you have assigned acheck mode to the product to be checked using the production type Characteristic Valuation.

- Only sales orders, customer quotations and inquiries, and scheduling agreements are supported. Youcannot use the ATP check when creating fixed pegging relationships for planned and manufacturingorders.

- The multilevel ATP check in combination with the availability check is not supported. Onlyimportant components that were planned with the planning procedure 3 can be checked using a CTPcheck.

- The data to be checked in SAP APO are not locked during a CTP check or multilevel planning withplanning procedure 3. Checks that are run in parallel can therefore influence the results of a separateCTP check. This restriction is independent of the enhancements made to fixed pegging in the CTPprocess.


The PP planning procedure was enhanced with the following fields in Customizing for ProductionPlanning and Detailed Scheduling:

- The Fixed Pegging in CTP/ATP field was added at the planning procedure level.The option Do Not Create Fixed Pegging Relationships is set as the default.

- The Fixed Pegging in Multilevel Planning field was added at the events level.The option Do Not Create Fixed Pegging Relationships is set as the default.

3.4.10.5 SCM-APO-ATP-SCH Time and Scheduling Functions

3.4.10.5.1 Using Dynamic Route Determination (new)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 130

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the global ATP check can execute scheduling using dynamic route determination.

See also

For more information, see the following:

- the release information Dynamic Route Determination

- the SAP Library of SAP SCM under SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) ->Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Transportation and Shipment Scheduling ->Scheduling with Dynamic Route Determination

3.4.10.5.2 Transportation and Shipment Scheduling (Extended)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the condition technique for configurable process scheduling to:

- Determine a process alias

- Define time durations, working times and time zones


For the system to be able to use the condition technique to determine a process alias for configurableprocess scheduling, you must make the settings for the IMG activities under Transportation andShipment Scheduling -> Scheduling Using Configurable Process Scheduling in Customizing forGlobal ATP.

See also

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Transportation and Shipment Scheduling ->Scheduling Using Configurable Process Scheduling.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 131

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.10.6 SCM-APO-ATP-RBA Rules-Based ATP Check

3.4.10.6.1 Quantity conversion with various BUoMs (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the rules-based ATP check can convert the quantity of the input product if the baseunits of measure (BUoMs) of the input product and the substitute product are different.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability Check Enhanced Methods ->Rules-Based Availability Check -> Quantity Conversion with Different BUoMs.

3.4.10.6.2 Consolidation Location (new)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can transfer products from different locations to a consolidation location and thendeliver them from there to your customers. This enables you to deliver to your customers from onelocation and, if desired, on one date or at one time.

A consolidation location also facilitates export business. For example, you can transfer products fromlocations that cannot deliver abroad to a consolidation location which processes the export and deliversthe products to the customer.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability Check Enhanced Methods ->Rules-Based Availability Check -> Consolidation in a Consolidation Location.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 132

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.10.6.3 External Exclusions (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can transfer a list of exclusions (locations, products und location products) fromthe OLTP system to the Global Available-to-Promise check. The system transfers this list with the BAPIBAPI_APOATP_CHECK. Die locations, products and location products from this list do not receive aconfirmation.

system requirements

SAP CRM as of Release 5.0

3.4.10.6.4 Substitutions from the Product InC and Location InC Master Data(New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can specify that the rules based ATP check for an input location product determinesproduct substitutions and substitute locations from the product substitution schema of the master data forproduct and location interchangeability. Using the product and location interchangeability master data,you can also take one-to-many substitutions into account in the ATP check.

System Requirements

SAP CRM 5.0 is required for one-to-many substitutions to be taken into account.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability Check Enhanced Methods ->Rules-Based Availability Check -> Substitutions from the Interchangeability Master Data.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 133

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.10.6.5 Multi-Item Single Delivery Location (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the rules-based ATP check can determine a common location for a delivery group ofitems: the multi-item single delivery location (MISL). All requirements of this delivery group aredelivered from this location.

With an MISL, you can minimize transportation costs, since all requirements are delivered from thislocation.

System requirements

SAP CRM 5.0 or SAP ERP 2005


To activate the MISL, in Customizing for Global ATP, choose deactivate and activate multi-item singledelivery locations.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization (SAP APO) -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability CheckEnhanced Methods -> Rules-Based Availability Check -> Multi-Item Single Delivery Location.

3.4.10.6.6 Maximum Number of Substitutions in Rules (enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify to which of the following entities the maximum number ofsubstitutions corresponds:

- Location product

- Location

See also

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 134

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Settings for Global ATP -> Settings for theRules-Based Availability Check -> Integrated Rule Maintenance -> Create Rule.

3.4.10.6.7 Override Input Location (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the Global ATP check can take an override input location from SAP CRM and theinput location into account. Using only input location, the system continues to determine the appropriatesubstitution group in the location determination schema of a rule. To prevent this, the system inserts theinput location in the first position of the substitution group, so that availability in this location is checkedfirst.

Thus, you can use the override input location to determine which location is checked first by the systemfor product availability.

System requirements

SAP CRM 5.0

See also

For more information, see the SAP library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Settings for Global ATP -> Settings for theRules-Based Availability Check -> Integrated Rule Maintenance -> Create LocationDetermination Schema.

3.4.10.6.8 Preselection of Appropriate Substitutions (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can choose the most appropriate substitutions from the substitution list of therules-based ATP check..


You activate the preselection of appropriate substitutions in the following IMG activities:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 135

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Assign Rule Strategy or Rule Strategy Sequence

- Maintain Check Instructions

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization (SAP APO) -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Availability CheckEnhanced Methods -> Rules-Based Availability Check -> Preselect Appropriate Substitutions.

3.4.10.6.9 Rule Type (enhanced)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can inclusively and exclusively assign the rule type alternative to a rule as well as therule types. An alternative rule defines substitution locations. During a rules-based ATP check, the systemtakes these into account as alternatives for locations that were excluded from the substitution list.

See also

For further information, see the SAP library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Settings for Global ATP -> Settings for theRules-Based ATP Check -> Integrated Rule Maintenance -> Create Rule.

3.4.10.6.10 Rule strategy (enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following enhancements are available:

- Rule strategy type: inclusive or exclusive rule strategiesYou can determine whether a rule strategy is inclusive or exclusive. In the rules of an inclusive rulestrategy, you define products and locations that are transferred to the ATP check as substitutes. In therules of an exclusive rule strategy, you define products and locations that the system is to removefrom the substitution lists of inclusive rule strategies.Inclusive and exclusive rule strategies can negate the need to define numerous conditions and rules.This is the case, particularly when you define exclusions of exclusions (exclusive rules in exclusiverule strategies) or alternatives to exclusions (alternative rules in exclusive rule strategies).

- Maximum number of substitutions and the entity to which they relate.You can determine the maximum number of substitutions for rule strategies. You can also determine

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 136

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the entity to which the maximum number of substitutions relates for rule strategies. The rules-basedATP check takes the maximum number of substitutions and their entity into account for all rulesdetermined for this rule strategy.


To determine the rule strategy type, the maximum number of substitutions and their entity, inCustomizing for the global ATP check, choose Maintain Rule Strategy.

See also

For more information, see the SAP library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Global ATP Settings -> Settings for theRules-Based Availability Check -> Condition Technique -> Maintain Rule Strategy.

3.4.10.6.11 Rule Strategy Sequence (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can group rule strategies into a rule strategy sequence. A rule strategy sequencedefines which rule strategies the system evaluates during a rules-based ATP check and in what sequence.This grouping and common evaluation of inclusive and exclusive rule strategies can save you fromdefining numerous conditions and rules.


To create rule strategy sequences, choose Maintain Rule Strategy Sequence in Customizing for GlobalATP.

To define activation parameters for determining rule strategy sequences, choose Assign Rule Strategy orRule Strategy Sequence in Customizing for Global ATP.

See also

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Settings for Global ATP -> Settings for theRules-Based Availability Check -> Condition Technique -> Rule Strategy Sequence.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 137

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.10.6.12 Validity of Exclusions of an Exclusive Rule (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define a validity period for the exclusions (locations, products or locationproducts) of an exclusive rule.

The system does not automatically delete the exclusions with validity periods from the substitution lists ofthe inclusive rules; the system uses the validity areas of the exclusions to calculate new validity periodsfor the substitutions in this list.

The system does automatically delete exclusions that do not have validity periods from the substitutionlists of the inclusive rules.

See also

For more information, see the following topics in the SAP Library for SAP SCM:

- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) ->Settings for Global ATP -> Condition Technique -> Rule Strategy Sequence -> Example forAdjusting Validity Periods

- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) ->Settings for Global ATP -> Integrated Rule Maintenance -> Creating Product SubstitutionProcedures -> Validity Period in Rules

3.4.10.6.13 Validity Periods for Substitutions (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also define the time as well as the date for the validity period ofsubstitutions.

See also

For more information about validity periods, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Advanced Planningand Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Settings for Global ATP ->

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 138

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Settings for the Rules-Based Availability Check -> Integrated Rule Maintenance -> CreatingProduct Substitution Procedures -> Validity Period in Rules.

3.4.10.7 SCM-APO-ATP-BOP Backorder Processing

3.4.10.7.1 Backorder processing (enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following enhancements are available:

- Parallelizing backorder processingBackorder processing can execute various steps in parallel. By using parallel execution in backorderprocessing, you can reduce the overall runtime of backorder processing.

- Stock transport ordersBackorder processing takes the requirement quantity, the requirement date/time and productsubstitutions for stock transport orders into account.

- Stock transport requisitionsBackorder processing takes stock transport requisitions into account. Here, only the one-timedelivery on desired date result mode is taken into account.

- Filter type SAP_ODLThe filter type SAP_ODL uses the following order due list types to determine the backorderprocessing worklist:

- Order due lists with items that can lose their confirmation

- Order due lists with items that the system determined using the ODL monitor.


For parallelizing backorder processing, you have to set up a server group.


To make settings for parallelizing backorder processing, in Customizing for the global ATP check, chooseParallelizing Backorder Processing.

See also

For more information about parallelizing backorder processing, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM underAdvanced Planning and Optimization -> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> BackorderProcessing -> Parallelizing Backorder Processing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 139

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.10.8 SCM-APO-ATP-ODL Order Due List

3.4.10.8.1 Order Due Lists (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can create order due lists (ODL). In an ODL, the system accepts the followingorder item types:

- Order items that can submit their confirmation

- Order items that are to receive a confirmation

- Order items that belong to the backorder processing worklist

For example, the system uses order items from ODLs for the following event-driven quantity assignmentevents:

- Quantity assignment to order due lists

- Reassignment of order confirmations

The last two ODL types can also be used to get the backorder processing worklist with the filter typeSAP_ODL.


To make settings for ODLs, in Customizing for the global ATP check, choose one of the following IMGactivities:

- Configure order due lists (ODL monitor)

- Configure order due lists (obtain confirmation)

- Configure order due lists (give up confirmation)

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Order Due Lists.

3.4.10.9 SCM-APO-ATP-EQA Event-Driven Quantity Assignment (EDQA)

3.4.10.9.1 Event-driven quantity assignment (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use event-driven quantity assignment (EDQA) to react promptly to changes

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 140

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

in product availability. You can, for example, assign new product quantities (or product quantities thathave become available once again) to backorders, or from lower to higher priority orders.

A change in the ATP quantity triggers the following events:

- Reassignment of order confirmations

- Quantity assignment to order due lists

- Push deployment

- Backorder processing


Use the report delete process data (/SAPAPO/EDQA_DEL), to delete redundant process data.


To make settings for EDQA, in Customizing for the global ATP check, choose the IMG activities underEvent-Driven Quantity Assignment.

Furthermore, you must make the SAP Business Workflow standard setting for EDQA processes. For moreinformation, see the implementation guide (IMG) of SAP SCM under Maintain Standard Settings.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library of SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization-> Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Event-Driven Quantity Assignment.

3.4.10.10 SCM-APO-ATP-TPO Third-Party Order Processing

3.4.10.10.1 Third-Party By Source Determination and Product Allocation (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can perform third-party order processing with Global ATP by source determinationor product allocation. In third-party order processing, you do not supply the customer yourself, insteadyou commission another supplier (third-party order processing by source determination) or retailer(third-party order processing by product allocation) to deliver the products required by the customer.

Third-party order processing allows you to ensure that the demand is confirmed as quickly as possible,without having to put up with reversals or backlogs.

System Requirements

SAP CRM 5.0

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 141

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You must activate third-party order processing by source determination in the Check Instructions. Youmust also create a requirements profile for third-party order processing.

For third-party order processing by product allocation, you must activated the rules-based ATP check andproduct allocation in the check instructions.

See also

For more information, see SAP Library for SAP SCM under Advanced Planning and Optimization ->Global Available-to-Promise (Global ATP) -> Third-Party Order Processing in Global ATP.

3.4.11 SCM-APO-OPT Optimization

3.4.11.1 SCM-APO-OPT-PPS Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

3.4.11.1.1 Underdelivery Tolerance in Net Requirements Calculation

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define that no additional procurement element (such as a planned order) isgenerated when the quantity to be delivered lies within the underdelivery tolerance for the sales orderitem. You use this function for materials with make-to-order production in net requirements calculationduring the planning run, or in the CTP check.

To use this function, proceed as follows:

- Set the Underdel. Tol. indicator in the product master for the lot-sizing procedure.

- Specify an underdelivery tolerance in the sales order item.

- Alternatively, you can set the Underdel. Tol. indicator in the planning heuristic if the heuristicsettings are to be used.

3.4.11.1.2 Explanation Log (New)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 142

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the options for evaluating the results of an optimization run were enhanced andimproved.

In addition to the optimization log that contains the technical data for the optimization run, you can alsouse an explanation log. In the explanation log, you can display explanations about the optimizationresults to better understand and evaluate these results.

You must have set the Explain Result indicator on the Expert Settings tab page in the optimizationprofile for the system to create an explanation log after the optimization run. To display the rescheduledactivities and the solutions found in the explanation log, you must also set the Log Result and LogInterim Solution.

The following information is displayed:

- DelaysOn this tab page, you can view the orders that are delayed. The system also displays the duration ofthe delay, the missing product quantity and resources or components that caused the delay.

- FixingsOn this tab page, you can view the fixed activities. The fixing reasons are also specified.

- DeallocationsOn this tab page, you can view the activities that were deallocated in the optimization run. Thecauses that led to the activity deallocation are also specified.

- ReschedulingsOn this tab page, you can view the activities that were rescheduled in the optimization run.

- SolutionsOn this tab page, you can view information about the quality of the solution found, such as theduration, the makespan, and the total setup times.

See also

Additional release notes for PP/DS optimization:

PP/DS Optimization (Enhanced)

Optimization Profile (Enhanced)

3.4.11.1.3 PP/DS Optimization (Enhanced)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 143

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the optimization has been enhanced with the following new functions:

- Order PrioritizationPreviously, the system handled all order types in the same way. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use thePrioritization of Orders indicator on the Order Processing tab page in the optimization profile, andATP categories to define which orders are to be given preference by optimization whenscheduling. For example, you can define that production orders are to be given preference overplanned orders during scheduling, and that the production orders are grouped according to priority:ExampleYou have defined that production orders should be given preference over other order types inoptimization when scheduling, by selecting the relevant ATP category. Additionally, you havespecified the value 2 as the order priority.Optimization Results:The system first groups the existing orders together according to the selected ATP category. Bothpartial quantities are then divided according to their order priority. The system creates four ordergroups:

- Production orders with order priority 1 or 2 are contained in group 1, and are categorized as themost important.

- Production orders with an order priority higher than or equal to 3 are contained in group 2 andare categorized as important.

- All other order types with order priority 1 or 2 are located in group 3, and are categorized asless important.

- All other order types with an order priority higher than or the same as 3 are located in group 4,and are categorized as unimportant.

- Consider Planned Delivery TimesYou can use the Consider Planned Delivery Times indicator in the optimization profile to define thatthe system considers the in-house production and planned delivery times for the relevantcomponents when optimizing all components that were produced in-house or procured externally,and for which the system has not yet created sufficient receipt elements. This prevents higher-levelorders from being scheduled too early for missing components.Additionally, the method SET_AFTER_DATA_DOWNLOADS in BAdI /SAPAPO/CDPS wasenhanced with the tables ET_PEGID_AVAILDATE and ET_BANF_SCHED_TIME. You can usethese tables to change the planned delivery times and in-house production times for the missingcomponents and influence the optimization results.

- Compact SchedulingCompact scheduling allows you to reduce order lead times. The lead time of an order is an importantindicator for evaluating the quality of production plans that were generated automatically. You canuse this function to reduce order lead times and generate an improved production plan. Shorter leadtimes also reduce storage costs and wait times.However, you can only implement compact scheduling successfully if the orders to be optimized arenot assigned any fixed activities. If the order are assigned fixed activities, you must use a differentoptimization function, such as order prioritization. To use compact scheduling, you must set theCompact Scheduling indicator on the Basic Settings tab page in the optimization profile.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 144

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

Optimization Profile (Enhanced)

Explanation Log (New)

3.4.11.1.4 Optimization Profile (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following usability improvements were made in the optimization profile forPP/DS optimization:

- Tab page reorganizationThe optimization parameters were grouped according to topic, and redistributed on the individual tabpages. Some fields were deleted.For additional information, see the IMG documentation on the optimization profile.

- New functions for automatically defining technical parameters

- Deliver standard optimization profiles for specific scenarios

The changes are described below in more detail:

Reorganization of Tab Pages

Basic Settings

This tab page contains all basic parameters that are defined by the production planner.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following fields were added to the tab page:

- Backwards Scheduling

- Compact Scheduling (new function)

The Total Lead Time field was renamed Makespan.

The following fields were removed from this tab page:

- Optimization Procedure

- Backward Pegging

- Parameter for Message Output

These three parameters can now be found on the Extended Settings tab page.

Order Processing

- The field Do Not Consider Subsequent Orders was added to the Lower Levels area (new function).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 145

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- To define processing for operations that were already released, you can use the following options inaddition to the option Fix Released Operation:

- Reschedule Released OperationThis option allows optimization to reschedule operations that have already been released.Fix All Operations of an OrderIf you choose this option, the system will fix all operations of an order. At least one of theseoperations must already be released.

- The Observe Latest Start or End Dates field was deleted.

Resource Processing

The Consider Storage Properties field was deleted. The function Consider Storage Properties forResources is no longer available.

Horizon This tab page was redesigned. You can define the start and the end of the optimization horizon aswell as the start of the optimized plan in relation to the start date of the optimization run. You can alsodefine absolute values here.

Additional Strategies

- The additional settings Resource Selection Unchanged and Freely Selectable Resources forbackwards scheduling were removed.

- Decomposition was enhanced with the Automatic Decomposition option.

Multi-Agent Optimization

This tab page was completely deleted. You can now find the settings for parallel optimization on theExpert Settings tab page.

Expert Settings

- The Extended Settings tab page was renamed Expert Settings as of SAP SCM 5.0.

- The Runtime Distribution tab page was enhanced with the parameters for automatic runtimedistribution.

- LogPreviously, you could only specify the maximum number of new messages and the messagetypes. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can make additional settings for logging the optimization resultsand other results. See also: Optimization Log (Enhanced)

- The Skip Data Consistency Check field was deleted. The system now carries out a consistencycheck for optimization in the very first step.

Automatic Settings for Technical Parameters

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system can now automatically determine the parameters for the following

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 146

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

technical processes:

- DecompositionHere, the system determines when it will execute decomposition, and how large the number ofactivities is to be combined into a partial problem (determine the window size).

- Runtime DistributionHere, the system determines how the runtime is distributed on the different optimization phases.

The automatic parameterization is already defined in the standard profiles. However, you can choose tomanually select and define these parameters yourself.

Standard Optimization Profiles for Selected Scenarios

SAP delivers the following new standard profiles for PP/DS optimization:

- SAP_SHORT: Short-Term OptimizationThis optimization profile contains the basic settings for optimization in the short-term planninghorizon, such as the next shift or the following week. In the short-term planning horizon, it isimportant to create a feasible plan and aim for high resource utilization.

- SAP_MID: Medium-Term OptimizationThis optimization profile contains the basic settings for optimization in the medium-term planninghorizon, such as the following two to four weeks or the following month. In the medium-termplanning horizon, it is important to plan according to requirements, and obtain information aboutpossible capacity bottlenecks.

- SAP_BOTTOMUP: Do Not Consider Requirement DatesThis optimization profile contains the basic settings for level-by-level planning of raw materials upto the finished product. This procedure is useful for reconciling different product levels or plants ifplanning for the first (lowest) production level is important.

- SAP_TOPDOWN: Do Not Consider Receipt DatesThis optimization profile contains the basic optimization settings for level-by-level planning usingthe planned independent requirements up to the raw materials on the lowest BOM level. Thisprocedure is useful for reconciling different production levels or plants if the requirements areimportant for planning, and when no capacity or material bottlenecks are to be expected in the lowerlevels.

See also

PP/DS Optimization (Enhanced)

Explanation Log (New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 147

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.11.2 SCM-APO-OPT-SNP Supply Network Planning

3.4.11.2.1 Explanation Tool and Result Indicators for Optimization Results(New)

Use



Result Indicators



- Warehouse stock




Explanation Tool





______________________________________________________________SAP AG 148

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.11.2.2 Automatic Cost Generation for SNP and Deployment Optimizer (new)

Use

Costs play an essential role for optimization-based planning in Supply Network Planning (SNP). Theoptimizer selects the plan with the lowest total costs from all the permitted production and distributionplans.

Up to now you have been able to specify the costs for planning to the optimizer by defining the actualcosts or control costs in the master data. For the planner, however, the conversion of business goals intocontrol costs is not easy.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can easily generate all the control costs (that is, the cost model) relevant to theoptimizer by using the automatic cost generation function. The system generates these costs automaticallybased on the business goals you have defined. The system takes the following goals into account:

- Maximization of the service level

- Demand and product priorities

- Procurement priorities for sources of supply

The system also ensures the following properties of the generated cost model:

- The model has no anomalies (such as not covering a demand because of too low penalty costs fornon-delivery).

- The model is stable (in other words, the costs are independent of the period length, for example).

- The model is coherent (that is, the transportation costs increase proportionally to the transportationlength, for example).

In addition, you can use this function to quickly and easily create an optimization-based production plan.To create a finite (capacity-based) production plan, you only have to make a few extra settings (such asthe consideration of capacities).


You define the automatic cost generation and the business goals in the SNP or deployment optimizerprofile. You activate the function via a new indicator in the header data of the Customizing transaction.You define the goals on the new Automatic Cost Generation tab page.

See also

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 149

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can find further information in the SAP Library under Supply Network Planning -> SupplyNetwork Planning Run -> Optimization-Based Planning -> Automatic Cost Generation.

3.4.12 SCM-APO-CPR Collaborative Procurement

3.4.12.1 SCM-APO-CPR-SCH Procurement Scheduling Agreement

3.4.12.1.1 Enhancements in the Procurement Scheduling Agreement (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0 the following additional functions are available:

- For APO scheduling agreements, you can define whether you want to reconcile cumulativequantities on the basis of the quantities that have actually been received (goods receipts) or on thebasis of the quantities promised by the vendor. Alternatively, you can define that no cumulativequantities should be transmitted.You make these settings in the additional data of the scheduling agreement item in the linked ERPsystem. This data is transferred to SAP APO during integration and displayed in the master data ofthe external procurement relationship.

- When the scheduling agreement release is created, the system checks the release status of thescheduling agreement item. (You can only use this function in the Service Parts Planning Scenario(SPP).)

- You can use the new Smart Form /SAPAPO/SF_SARELEASE_TEMP_SPP to output releases. Thiscontains additional fields, such as inbound delivery date and pickup date.The corresponding IDocs (message type DELINS) have been enhanced.Up to SAP APO 4.1 you could define in the release creation profile whether the date that wastransmitted was the inbound delivery date or the pickup date. As of SAP SCM 5.0 both aretransferred at the same time.

See also

For more information about the determination of cumulative quantities, see the SAP Library for mySAPSCM under SAP Advanced Planner and Optimizer (SAP APO) -> Production Planning and DetailedScheduling (PP/DS) -> Collaborative Management of Procurement and Sales Scheduling Agreements ->Procurement Using an APO Scheduling Agreement -> Enhancement: Reconciliation of CumulativeQuantities, Release Creation and Output.

For more information about Service Parts Management, see the SAP Library under SAP AdvancedPlanner and Optimizer (SAP APO) ->Service Parts Planning (SPP).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 150

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Additional information can be found in the SAP Library for SAP ERP Central Component under Logistics-> Logistics - General (LO) -> Service Parts Management (LO-SPM) and in the release note Service PartsPlanning (LO-SPM).

3.4.13 SCM-APO-INT Interfaces

3.4.13.1 Saving and Deleting CIF Cockpit Performance Data (New)

Use

Depending on the setting in the user profile, the CIF cockpit evaluates the performance measurements incertain intervals. You can use the Save and Delete CIF Cockpit Performance Data(/SAPAPO/CC_SAVE_PERF_DATA ) program to save these evaluations over a certain period of time.You can then have the system display the saved evaluations in the CIF cockpit. The smallest evaluationinterval for saving and displaying saved performance data is one hour.

We recommend that you schedule this program as a background job that runs every night. If you enter thelast two days as the evaluation period, you can be sure that you will not lose any evaluation data.

During each program run, the program also deletes the saved data records that have reached the minimumage for deletion.


To schedule the program as a background job, in Customizing for Integration, choose Basic Settings forData Transfer -> CIF Cockpit -> Save CIF Cockpit Performance Data. For more information, seeDefine Variant.

3.4.13.2 Collaborative Planning: Displaying Alerts Using Integrated ITS (New)

Use

Up until now, the only option available to you when using the Alert Monitor functions via a Web browserin Collaborative Planning, was to use the standalone version of the SAP Internet Transaction Server(ITS). As of SAP SCM 5.0 and SAP NetWeaver 2005, usage type Application Server, you can also call theAlert Monitor functions using the integrated ITS. One of the advantages of using integrated ITS is a farlower total cost of ownership (TCO).

You can execute the following transactions in the integrated ITS:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 151

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Display alerts (transaction /SAPAPO/AMON0, ITS service AMON)This service displays the alerts of a particular alert profile or of a stored alert situation in the ITS. Ifthe alert originates from the Demand Planning (DP) or Supply Network Planning (SNP)applications, you can jump to a service of Collaborative Supply and Demand Planning (CLPSDPservice) to change the planning data that calls the alert. Here, each alert has a corresponding linkassigned to it. The CLPSDP service must be installed and activated in the ITS.You can also execute the corresponding transaction in the SAP GUI for HTML.

- Alert overview (transaction /SAPAPO/AMON3, ITS service AMON_STATIST)This service displays the alert overview. The alerts are grouped according to priorities. From thisoverview, you can jump directly to the corresponding details by way of a link. The link to theCLPSDP service is not supported.You can also execute the corresponding transaction in the SAP GUI for HTML.

You can also execute both of these services in the ITS Standalone.

To be able to execute these Alert Monitor functions in the integrated ITS, the ICF service AMON orAMON_STATIST must be activated in the ITS by using transaction SICF, and the required files must bepublished internally. For more information, see SAP Note 678904 and the SAP Library (see below).

If you are using the Alert Monitor functions in the ITS Standalone, the required files for the serviceAMON or AMON_STATIST must be published for the corresponding ITS. For more information, seeSAP Note 325149 and the SAP Library (see below).


As of SAP SCM 5.0, the ITS services CLPAMON and AMON_LIST are obsolete, as the functions ofthese services have been integrated into the two new services mentioned above.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply ChainCollaboration -> Collaborative Planning - Installation and Settings.

3.4.13.3 SCM-APO-INT-EXT Interface to External Systems

3.4.13.3.1 Business and Interface Objects and BAPI Methods (Changed)

Use

The following information describes changes made in SAP SCM 5.0 to business and interface objects andto the Business Application Programming Interfaces (BAPIs) or ALE interfaces (message types)contained therein that belong to the following components:

- SCM-APO-MD Master Data

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 152

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- SCM-APO-SNP Supply Network Planning (SNP)

- SCM-APO-PPS Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

- SCM-APO-VS Vehicle Scheduling

- SCM-APO-FCS Demand Planning

The technical names of the objects affected in the Business Object Repository (BOR) are:

- BUS10502

- BUS10503

- BUS10300

- BUS10500

- BUS10001 - BUS10002

- BUS 10014

- BUS11201

- BUS10009

- BUS10015

- BUS10017

- Transaction /SAPAPO/BP3

- BUS10030

The relevant interface objects (if they exist) have the same numbers, for example, the interface objectIF10502 belongs to business object BUS10502.

Use of IDocs/ALE Interfaces and the Function Modules Belonging to the BAPI Methods

Changes to the BAPI methods also have an effect on the relevant ALE interfaces or message types. If youuse IDoc message types that call the relevant BAPI methods for these business objects, read the releaseinformation for the relevant BAPI methods.

Example

You use the message type SOAPS_SAVEMULTIPLE. Since this message type is derived from BAPIBUS10501.Save.Multiple (Sales Order APS), the changes to BUS10501.SaveMultiple also affect themessage type SOAPS_SAVEMULTIPLE.

Changes to the BAPI methods also affect the underlying function modules. For example, a change tomethod "SalesOrderAPS.SaveMultiple" also affects the function moduleBAPI_SLSRVAPS_SAVEMULTI that is used.

Changes That Only Affect Methods Belonging to Certain Business Objects/Interface Objectswith These Components or Their Methods and ALE Message Types

The new and changed business objects and BAPIs are listed. For more information, see the documentationfor the individual BAPIs.

Note that certain BAPIs in the list have not yet been released. You can use these BAPIs but incompatiblechanges might still be possible.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 153

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

If you use the relevant function modules for the BAPIs instead of the BAPIs, the changes also apply tothese function modules.

Transaction Data Objects

BUS10502 (Procurement Order APS)

You can use the new method CreateFromSNP to create or change purchase requisitions for SupplyNetwork Planning (SNP) or Deployment. In the case of method SaveMultiple2, the means of transportfield was added. Event generation control was added to the method. Event generation control was alsoadded to the method DeleteMultiple.

IF10502 (interface object for procurement order APS)

BUS10503 (Manufacturing Order APS)

The PDS function was added to method CreateFromTemplate. The profile for global SNP settings wasadded to the method CreateFromSNP.

IF10503 (interface object for manufacturing order APS)

BUS10300 (Vehicle Scheduling Planning Services)

The order split function was added to the methods GetOrderSets, UnplanOrders, and UpdateShipments .

BUS10500 (PPDSServiceAPS)

You can use the new method ExecutePlanningRun to start a planning run in Production Planning/DetailedScheduling (PP/DS).

Master Data Objects

BUS10001 (Product APS)

Compatible enhancement (new fields) in methods SaveMultiple2, GetList2 , and RequestList2.

IF10001 (interface object for product APS)

Compatible enhancement (new fields) in method ReceiveList2.

BUS10002 (Location APS)

Compatible enhancement (new fields) in methods SaveMultiple2, GetList2, and RequestList2.

IF10002 (interface object for location APS)


BUS10014 (Production Data Structure APS)

New methods: SaveMultiple, DeleteMultiple, GetList, and RequestList.

IF10014 (interface object for production data structure APS)

New method ReceiveList.

BUS11201 (Transportation Lane APS)


IF11201 (interface object for transportation lane APS)


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 154

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

BUS10009 (Quota Arrangement APS)


IF10009 (interface object for quota arrangement APS)

Compatible enhancement (new fields) in method ReceiveList2

BUS10015 (Location Product Hierarchy APS)

New methods: GetDetail, SaveNodes, RemoveNodes, and RequestDetail.

IF10015 (interface object for location product hierarchy APS)

New method ReceiveNodes.

BUS10017 (Product Hierarchy APS)

New methods: GetDetail, SaveNodes, RemoveNodes, and RequestDetail.

IF10017 (interface object for product hierarchy APS)

New method: ReceiveNodes.

Transaction "/SAPAPO/BP3"

New transaction for sending master data to external systems.

Objects in Demand Planning

BUS10030 (Planning Book APS)

The functions Fixing Key Figures and Distinguishing Between Zero Value and Initial Value were addedto the methods GetDetail2 and ChangeKeyFigureValue2.

3.4.13.3.2 Collaborative Planning: Logging Function (changed)

Use

Until now, the exchange of planning book data between collaboration partners in Collaborative Supplyand Demand Planning using transactions Send Time Series (/SAPAPO/CLP_PUSH) and Read TimeSeries (/SAPAPO/CLP_PULL) was automatically logged in the background for the Data ExchangeMonitor (transaction /SAPAPO/CLX_DEX). If you were not using the Data Exchange Monitor, you couldonly set this function to inactive and therefore improve performance by making a modification.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the logging function is no longer activated by default.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 155

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.4.13.4 SCM-APO-INT-MD Master Data

3.4.13.4.1 Integration of Shipping Points (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 and SAP ECC 6.0, shipping points are integrated via APO Core Interface (CIF).Shipping points in the ERP system as created as locations of the type shipping point in SAP APO. As aprerequisite, the shipping point must be contained in an active integration model.


To change the transfer data, you can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Change Shipping Point DataBefore Sending to SAP APO in Customizing on the ERP side. For more information, see theImplementation Guide (IMG) for the ERP system under Integration with Other SAP Components ->Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Application-Specific Settings and Enhancements ->Enhancements to Plant, Vendor, Customer, and Shipping Point -> BAdI: Change Shipping Point DataBefore Sending to SAP APO.

3.4.13.5 SCM-APO-INT-STK Stock

3.4.13.5.1 Integration of Stocks (Changed)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following changes have been made to the integration of stocks function:

Improved Data Consistency Due to a New Anchor Table for Stocks

The anchor table for stocks /SAPAPO/DM_STCK has been replaced by the new anchor table/SAPAPO/STOCKANC in the SAP liveCache. This does not effect the standard function for stockintegration. However, if you used to access the old anchor table /SAPAPO/DM_STCK usingcustomer-specific coding such as customer exits, you must change your coding accordingly. If you do not,

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 156

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

you will not see any current stock data, since stock changes are posted in the anchor table/SAPAPO/STOCKANC in the SAP liveCache as of SAP SCM 5.0. For more information, see SAP Note837744.

Improved Performance Due to Update Counter for Stocks

As of SAP SCM 5.0 with SAP R/3 Plug-In 2004.1 or SAP ECC 6.0, there is a program available inSAP-R/3 and SAP-ECC to specify that the APO Core Interface (CIF) no longer uses the queue name totransfer stock postings, but rather the update counter. That way free work processes are used moreefficiently, meaning the system can process more transfers in parallel. In addition, it is ensured that thestock postings are processed in the right sequence even if they are transferred in different logical units ofwork (LUWs) of the CIF.

In SAP R/3 Plug-In 2004.1 you activate the update counter for stock transfers using the programCIFACTSC, and in SAP ECC 6.0 you use the program CIFACTSTKUC.

3.4.13.6 SCM-APO-INT-PPS PP/DS - Production Process Order

3.4.13.6.1 Changes to Header Quantity for Released Manufacturing Orders(Changed)

Use

As of Release SCM 5.0, you can change the header quantity in released manufacturing orders in SAPAPO if no goods movements (goods issue and receipt) and confirmations have been carried out for theorder in the ERP system (must be at least ERP 2.0).

If you have carried out goods movement, the GM Executed indicator is displayed in the order processingview. The indicator is set by the system.

The header quantity cannot be changed after a cancellation has been carried out because cancellations areregarded as goods movements in the ERP system. The indicator remains set in SAP APO after thecancellation.

Goods movements can only be carried out in the ERP system if the production order has been released;this means that the GM Executed indicator is only displayed for released manufacturing orders in SAPAPO. If you cancel all goods movements, you can reset the release status in the ERP system. Since theindicator for goods movement also remains set in SAP APO after the cancellation has been carried out,the manufacturing order may not be released; however, the system will still display that goods movementhas been carried out. In this case, the quantity can be changed because the order is not yet released.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 157

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The indicator is not displayed for the following:

- For planned orders

- When no information about goods movement was provided by the system (if ERP release is lowerthan Release 2.0).

3.4.13.7 SCM-APO-INT-RP Requirements Planning/Planned Order

3.4.13.7.1 Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the strategy Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly in ERP and inSAP SCM. You use this strategy to move the stocking level for assemblies/components in the BOMstructure. You can use this strategy if you want start producing an important assembly only when therelevant sales order is received, but must procure the required components beforehand. In ERP, you mustthen assign the strategy 52 Planning without Final Assembly/ without MTO in the material master ofthe finished product, and the strategy 74 Planning without Final Assembly at Assembly Level for theassembly. After the data has been transferred via the APO Core Interface (CIF) , you can also view thedata in SAP SCM.

The transfer of information between ERP and SAP SCM was set up in such a way that the planninginformation can also be exchanged between the systems at the dependent requirements level. You cancarry out multilevel planning in either SCM or ERP. Requirements consumption in the planning segmentis also possible in both systems; however, this can only be triggered by the system that you selected forplanning.

Restrictions

- Multilevel planning without final assembly does not support stock transfers.

- The data is only transferred between SCM 5.0 and ERP2005. If you want to use the SCM systemwith ERP2004 or an R/3 system, you must install SAP Notes 771819 and 771820. Both notesinclude the required enhancements for the plug-in interface (to exchange information at thedependent requirements level).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 158

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

See also

For additional information on Multilevel Planning without Final Assembly, see the SAP Library forERP2005 under SAP ERP Central Component -->Logistics --> Demand Management -->Planning Strategies --> Strategies for Make-to-Stock Production --> Planning without FinalAssembly/ without MTO (52) and Demand Management --> Planning Strategies --> Strategiesfor Planning Components --> Planning without Final Assembly at Assembly Level (74).

3.4.13.8 SCM-APO-INT-PUR Purchasing/Purchase Requisition, Purch.Order, Stock Transfer

3.4.13.8.1 Integration of Stock Transport Orders (Enhanced)

Use

Until now, stock transport orders that are transferred in an integrated system landscape via APO CoreInterface (CIF) between SAP SCM and an ERP system were rescheduled in the respective target system.This can lead to the situation where the stock transport order dates/times differ in the two systems.

As of SAP SCM 5.0 and SAP ECC 6.0 (ERP system), you can configure in Customizing for therespective system in which the stock transport order was created that stock transport orders are not to berescheduled when transferred to the target system. Instead, the target system adopts certain dates/timesfrom the source system.

When you prevent rescheduling from the ERP system, shipment scheduling must be active. To activateshipment scheduling, set the Shipment Scheduling indicator in Customizing for purchasing in the ERPsystem under Purchase Order -> Set Up Stock Transport Order -> Assign Delivery Type and CheckingRule.

- When the stock transport order is transferred from SAP SCM, the ERP system adopts the followingdates/times:

- Goods issue start date/time as the material staging date

- Goods issue end date/time as the goods issue date

- Transportation end date/time as the delivery date

- Goods receipt end date/time as the delivery end dateThe transportation start date/time and the goods receipt start date/time are only available in SAPSCM in this case and not in the ERP system.

- When the stock transport order is transferred from the ERP system, SAP SCM adopts the followingdates/times:

- Material staging date as the goods issue start date/time

- Goods issue date as the goods issue end date/time and the transportation start date/time

- Delivery date as the transportation end date/time and the goods receipt start date

- Delivery end date as the goods receipt end date/time

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 159

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

If you want to use this function, set the No Rescheduling indicator in the relevant IMG activity in SAPSCM and in the ERP system. By default, the indicator is not set.

Note the following restrictions:

- This indicator applies only to stock transport orders and not to standard purchase orders, standardpurchase requisitions, or stock transport requisitions.

- Capacities must be planned infinitely.

- When rescheduling is suppressed, SAP SCM only takes into account resources in SNP stocktransfers. Resources in all other stock transport orders are not taken into account.

- When rescheduling is suppressed, the goods issue end date/time and the transportation startdate/time are identical in SAP SCM, as are the transportation end date/time and the goods receiptstart date/time.


In Customizing for SAP SCM, choose Suppress Rescheduling of Stock Transport Orders in TargetSystem.

In Customizing in the ERP system, choose Integration with Other SAP Components -> AdvancedPlanning and Optimization -> Application-Specific Settings and Enhancements -> Settings andEnhancements for External Procurement -> Outbound Processing and Purchasing Data -> Suppress Rescheduling of Stock Transport Orders in the Target System.

3.4.13.9 SCM-APO-INT-CCR CIF Compare/Reconcile

3.4.13.9.1 CIF Comparison/Reconciliation: Processing of Change Pointers(New)

Use

When you perform the CIF comparison/reconciliation of transaction data, we recommend that you havealready processed any existing change pointers. In the results screen of the comparison, you can see ifchange pointers still exist for individual inconsistencies in the Change Pointer column. Until now, youhad to have found and processed the relevant change pointer in the transaction Publish Orders(/SAPAPO/C5).

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the Change Pointer pushbutton is available to you in the results screen of thecomparison. You can use this pushbutton to directly process selected change pointers. The systemautomatically deletes these change pointers after they have been processed. You can use this pushbutton

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 160

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

to delete change pointers that are no longer relevant.

If you rectify the inconsistency for which a change pointer exists using the CIF comparison/reconciliationand not the Change Pointer pushbutton, the change pointer remains although the inconsistency has beenrectified. If you want to make sure that the change pointer is deleted in this case too, set the Deletion ofChange Pointers After Processing indicator in the selection screen for the CIF comparison/ reconciliation.The indicator is not set by default.

3.4.13.9.2 Parallel Processing in the CIF Comparison/Reconciliation (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can convert the data access for the CIF comparison/reconciliation to parallelprocessing in the SAP APO system and/or ERP system, and thus improve performance. By default,parallel processing is not configured.

To configure parallel processing, in the selection screen for the CIF comparison/reconciliation underParallel Processing, choose the required parallel processing profile for SAP APO or the connectedpartner system. You can only select those profiles that you have created already in Customizing.


To create a parallel processing profile, in Customizing for Integration, choose Basic Settings for DataTransfer -> CIF Comparison/Reconciliation of Transaction Data -> Maintain Parallel ProcessingProfiles.

For more information, see Maintain Parallel Processing Profiles.

3.4.14 SCM-APO-LCA SCM liveCache Applications

3.4.14.1 Checks for Consistency Comparison in liveCache and APO Database(New)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 161

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use a check for block planning and activities for the consistency comparisonin the liveCache and the APO database under Advanced Planning and Optimization -> APOAdministration -> liveCache/ LCA Routines -> Tools -> liveCache Consistency Check.

You can use the BAdI Additional Customer-Specific Checks for OM17 (/SAPAPO/OM_SYNC) to carryout additional customer-specific checks for the consistency comparison.

3.5 SCM-BAS SCM Basis

3.5.1 Structural Changes in IMG for SCM Basis

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the structure of the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SCM Basis has changed. Toimplement these changes in the project IMGs, you must regenerated the project IMGs.

Newly added IMG activities

Configure Parameters

Define Parameters for Master Data Locking Concept

Physical Inventory -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Influencing Physical Inventory Processing(Enhancement Spot with 20 BAdIs)

Pack -> Packaging Specification

- Define General Packaging Specification Parameters

- Maintain Structure of Packaging Specification

- Define Level Type

- Define Element Type

- Define Level Set

- Define Work Step Type

- Define Packaging Material Types

- Assign Packaging Material Type to Element Type

- Assign Workstep Type to Packaging Material Type

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 162

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Determination of Packaging Specifications

- Create Field Catalog

- Define Condition Tables

- Define Access Sequences

- Define Condition Types

- Define Determination Procedure

- Create Condition Maintenance Group

- Business Add-Ins for Packaging Specifications

- BAdI: Adjust User Interface for Packaging Specification

- BAdI: Adjust Results of Condition Technique Determination

- BAdI: Adjust User Interface for Work Steps

- BAdI: Validations of Packaging Specification Changes

- BAdI: Enhancements for Search Helps

Pack -> Handling Units

- Define HU Types (/SCMB/THUTYP)

- Define Identification Types (/SCMB/TIDART)

- Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Basis Enhancements for Handling Units

- BAdI: Handling Unit Header Data

- BAdI: Nesting and Unpacking of Handling Units

- BAdI: Product-Specific Checks During Packing/Unpacking

- BAdI: Automatic Packing by Packaging Specification

Planning Service Manager

- Configure Planning Service Manager

Data Management Layer -> Triggers

- Activate Triggers

Newly added IMG Structures

Data Management Layer

EH&S Services

Changed IMG Activities

Pack -> Packaging Specifications

- Define Group for Packaging Specifications

Pack -> Handling Units

- Define Packaging Material Types

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 163

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Transferred IMG activities

The IMG activity Define Physical Inventory Area was previously located under Physical Inventory ->Basic Settings -> Application-Specific Settings -> Physical Inventory Area. Now it is locateddirectly under Physical Inventory -> Basic Settings.

The complete structure of Time Series Data Management has been moved from the IMG for theInventory Collaboration Hub to the IMG for the SCM Basis.

Deleted IMG activities

Physical Inventory -> Basic Settings -> Features of Calling Application -> External NumberRange for Planning Objects -> Define Number Range for Planning ObjectsThe entire path from Features of Calling Application has been deleted.

Physical Inventory

-> Basic Settings -> User-Specific Parameters ->

- Determine Grouping Parameters

- Assign User to Tolerance Group

The User-Specific Parameters node has also been deleted.

Physical Inventory -> Basic Settings -> Application-Specific Settings ->

- Define Priorities of Physical Inventory Procedures

- Define Number Range for Physical Inventory Documents

- Define Reason for Physical Inventory

The Application-Specific Settings node has also been deleted.

Physical Inventory -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) ->

- BAdI: Static Checks of Inbound Documents

- BAdI: Physical Inventory Customizing

- BAdI: Read Physical Inventory Master Data

- BAdI: Physical Inventory Quantity Conversion

3.5.2 SCM-BAS-AMO Alert Monitor

3.5.2.1 Alert Types: Changes

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 164

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Use

Requirement/Receipt Alerts

In the Alert Monitor, you can hide alerts of the type Product Too Early and Receipt Date Too Early. Todo so, select the indicator Hide Alerts of Type "Product/Receipt Date/Time Too Early".

To set the indicator, on the SAP Easy Access mySAP Supply Chain Management screen chooseAdvanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Monitoring -> Current Settings -> SetAlert Monitor.

Under Application-Specific Alert Profile choose the PP/DS tab page. Scroll down to theRequirement/Receipt Alerts subscreen. There you can set the indicator.

The Alert Monitor hides the Product Too Early and Receipt Date Too Early alerts under the followingconditions:

- The receipt covers more than one requirement.

- At least one of these requirements falls within the alert threshold, meaning that it does not cause analert.

- At least one of these requirements falls outside the alert threshold, meaning that it causes an alert ifthe indicator is not set. If the indicator is set, the alert is not displayed.

Overwriting the Standard Priority for Resource Activities

In Customizing, you can assign standard priorities to the individual alert types under SCM Basis -> AlertMonitor -> Maintain Prioritization of Alert Types.

However, the standard priority for PP/DS resource alerts can be overwritten in two cases:

- In an overload situation, overload/underload alerts are displayed for a resource and for each resourceactivity involved (and for all that have the same resource and time interval of the resource) if thealerts are displayed for the entire order.In this case, the alerts are displayed at activity level as information (white).

- If the alert is not displayed for the resource itself, the alerts are displayed for the activities with thestandard priority (red).You can display the alerts if you call the Alert Monitor in the navigation tree of the order processingview.

In the case of alerts for Supply and Demand Planning, the alert macros from the planning books alwaysoverwrite the standard priority.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 165

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.5.2.2 New Features in Alert Monitor (New)

Use

Alert Overview

In the Alert Monitor, you could previously display the alerts for individual applications (such asProduction Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS)) or for individual alert types.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the Alert Overview by Objects function is additionally available. You can use thisfunction to display all the alerts for a certain object (e.g. a location or product) beyond the limits of theindividual applications.

You will find the alert overview in the SAP menu under the following paths:

- Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Supply Chain Monitoring -> Alert Monitor -> AlertOverview by Objects

- SAP Basis -> Alert Monitor -> Alert Overview by Objects.

In the user-specific display hierarchy, you can specify which information on the alerts for a certain objectis to be displayed.

Improved Maintenance of User-Specific Display Hierarchy

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can maintain the user-specific display hierarchy via Drag&Drop. Note that whenadopting objects from the Possible Nodes per Alert View column using Drag&Drop, you must positionthe cursor on the user name. The objects can also be moved to the other column in each case bydouble-click. The system automatically sorts the objects into the correct position in the hierarchy.

In the Alert Monitor, you will find the user-specific display hierarchy under Environment. In the AlertOverview by Objects, it is located under Alert Monitor.

New Features in the Alert Monitor Window

Filtering by priority

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can filter the alert display according to alerts with a certain priority. Click on therelevant symbol in the upper part of the screen. The system will then display just the alerts with theselected priority for the alert views and alert types selected.

Setting the duration for the suppression of alerts

In the standard system, an alert that you wanted to suppress was automatically suppressed for two weeks.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can specify in the Alert Monitor the point in time until which an alert is to besuppressed. If you suppress the alert, you get a popup in which you can enter this point in time.

Sending of alerts by e-mail or SMS

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can send alerts from within the display by e-mail or SMS. Select the alert andchoose the corresponding symbol.

Connection of New Applications

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following applications are connected to the Alert Monitor:

- SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 166

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- SAP Forecasting and Replenishment (SAP F&R)

Alert Types in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS)

For more information, refer to Alert Types: Changes.

3.5.2.3 Adoption of Selections in Alert Profiles After Upgrade (New)

Use

Previously, you were only able to use the selections with which you specified in alert profiles which alertsare to be displayed after an upgrade to a higher Release if you implemented the SAP Note 770855.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can invoke the conversion report AMO_PROFILE_UPGRADE in the systemusing transaction SE38. To be able to use the selections you maintained in SAP SCM 4.0 or a lowerRelease in SAP SCM 5.0 following an upgrade, run this report once. It is not necessary to manuallychange the alert profiles.

3.5.3 SCM-BAS-PAK Packing Basics

3.5.3.1 Packaging specification (enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use a packaging specification to define the packing levels for a product inorder to put away or transport the product. In the printed version, a packaging specification serves asinstructions for the worker in the warehouse so that this worker can carry out the individual stepsaccording to your specifications.

You can do the following to packaging specifications:

- create, copy and activate

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 167

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- find

- distribute in several systems.


Check whether the packaging specifications that you have created for SCM 4.10 are converted completelyby the XPRA /SCWM/SCM_BAS_PAK_IPPE_XPRA.


Make the following settings in Customizing for SCM Basis under Packing --> Packaging Specification:

1. Define the number range for packaging specifications

2. Define general packing parameters

3. Define a group of packaging specifications

In addition, we recommend the following optional settings under Maintain structure of packagingspecification:

- Define level type

- Define element type

- Define level set

See also

Packaging specification determination

3.5.3.2 Packaging specification determination (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can use the condition technique to find packaging specifications based on thebusiness characteristics you have defined. After you have checked or made settings for condition tables,access sequences, condition types, and determination procedures, you can assign the packagingspecifications to these business keys.

The following processes use the packaging specification determination:

- In Extended Warehouse Management (EWM)

- automatic packing in the inbound delivery

- packaging material determination during warehouse order creation

- packaging material determination in the outbound delivery

- packaging material determination during deconsolidation

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 168

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- slotting

- warehouse-internal processes (such as determination of palletization data, determination of theoperative unit of measure)

- In Service Parts Planning (SPP)

- ATP rounding rules

- deployment rounding rules


In the SAP Standard, the Customizing for packaging specification determination for the above processesare preconfigured in EWM.


You can make enhancements for your own processes in the customer namespace, for the followingsettings in Customizing:

- Create field catalog

- Define condition tables

- Define access sequences

- Define condition types

- Define determination procedure

For more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SCM Basis under Packing -> PackagingSpecification -> Determination of packaging specifications.

3.5.4 SCM-BAS-MD Master Data

3.5.4.1 Master Data Locking Concept (new)

Use

To prevent data inconsistencies caused by concurrent accesses, the master data locking concept wasintroduced as of SAP SCM 5.0. Concurrent accesses are:

- Individual maintenance

- Mass maintenance

- Data transfer via Business Application Programming Interface (BAPI)

- Data transfer via Core Interface (CIF)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 169

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The master data locking concept includes all maintenance types and ensures that these maintenance typeslock each other out in the case of parallel access to a master data object. The lock time and theperformance loss associated with it is minimal. The maintenance types have a default lock priority thatdefines which maintenance type the system gives priority to in the case of parallel access, or whichmaintenance type can remove the lock from another maintenance type. In addition to the lock priority, thelock behavior is also controlled by the processing mode of the system (individual or mass processingmode).

The master data locking concept applies to products and location products.

Lock priority

The maintenance types have the following lock priorities:

- Highest priority: Data transfer via BAPI and CIF

- Medium priority: Mass maintenance

- Lowest priority: Individual maintenance

Individual processing mode

In the individual processing mode, the system sets the locks during dialog processing and postingindividually for master data objects just being processed. In individual processing, the system always usesthe individual processing mode. In mass maintenance and during data transfer via CIF or BAPI, thesystem only uses up to a certain number of lock requests set in Customizing. In the individual processingmode, a parallel individual or mass maintenance is possible. Individual and mass maintenance have thesame priority in the individual processing mode.

If you process a master data object in individual maintenance, access to this object is locked to other usersduring the dialog and processing time. Users attempting parallel access to the same master data object canonly save their changes once you have ended your maintenance. However, if parallel access occurs via amaintenance type with higher lock priority, this maintenance type can remove the lock for yourmaintenance. In this case, you will get an error message with the next screen change, and you will not beable to save your changes. You have to start the maintenance transaction again and repeat your changesuntil the lock is back in place and you can save the changes.

Mass processing mode

In the mass processing mode, the system collects the lock requests up to a certain block size set inCustomizing, and then processes these in parallel work processes.

The system uses the mass processing mode in mass maintenance and for data transfers via CIF or BAPI asof a certain number of lock requests.

In the mass processing mode, parallel accesses via mass maintenance and CIF or BAPI transfers lock eachother out, regardless of whether the master data objects to be maintained overlap or not.

Here you have to differentiate between a general lock and a restricted general lock. In the general lock, theuser can no longer save changes in a maintenance type of lower priority, regardless of whether themaintenance type of higher priority affects the same master data objects or not. In the restricted generalmaintenance, the user can still save changes to different master data objects. However, no new access tothis maintenance object is possible for the duration of the lock.

One exception is parallel data transfers via CIF and/or BAPI. Here, a parallel maintenance of differentmaster data objects is possible, in other words, these maintenance types do not lock each other out.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 170

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

CIF parallelizes the data transfer and ensures via the queued Remote Function Call (qRFC) that the masterdata objects are transferred as serialized. This is not automatically the case in BAPI transfers, so the usermust therefore ensure that the same master data objects are not processed in parallel through differentBAPI accesses.

For an overview of system behavior depending on maintenance type and processing mode, see LockPriorities in Individual and Mass Processing Mode.


In the Define Parameters for Master Data Lock Concept IMG activity, you can make the followingsettings:

- You can switch off the master data locking concept for mass maintenance, for CIF transfers, and forBAPI transfers. If you exclude all maintenance types from the master data locking concept, thesystem behaves as in SAP SCM 4.1 or earlier.

- With the Block Size parameter, you can set as of which number of lock requests the system switchesfrom individual to mass processing mode.

- You can control the performance via the Block Size, Number of Parallel Work Processes, and Blocksper Parallel Work Process parameters.

See also

For more information about the master data locking concept, see the SAP Library under SAP SupplyChain Management (SAP SCM) -> SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization (SAP APO) -> Master Data-> General Master Data Functions -> Master Data Locking Concept.

3.6 SCM-EWM Extended Warehouse Management

3.6.1 Extended Warehouse Management (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) for warehousemanagement with SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM). EWM focusses on service parts executionand enables the following in particular:

- Process and stock visiblity

- Planning of warehouse processes

- Efficient flow of distribution processes and warehouse processes

This enables you to execute goods issue activities and goods receipt activities, as well as flexibly plan and

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 171

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

coordinate these activities. In addition, EWM particularly supports the work processes between multiplewarehouses and business partners. In this way, for example, you can remove from stock certainsubprocesses to systems of logistics service providers, as well as manage the differences betweenfinancial owners and physical owners.

EWM helps you meet the following requirements in the Spare Parts Procurement area:

- Processing of large volumes of warehouse quantities and document items

- Processing of fast-moving and slow-moving items that compete for the same warehouse space

- Consideration of the correctness and perfect scheduling of sales orders

- Consideration of a large number of product differences:

- Size

- Weight

- Model year

- Series number

- Country of origin

- Batch

- Evaluation

- Scheduling and execution of complex cross-docking and order fulfillment processes

- Integration of external logistics service providers in goods receipt and goods issue for value-addedservices and packing of products

- Detailed packing logistics and shipping logistics by supporting master bill of lading, and differentoptions for packing of products

- Control of work processes within and outside of the warehouse. These include:

- Warehouse order creation

- Waves

- Deconsolidation

- Resource management

- Order for value-added services

- Kitting

- Labelling

- Management of work processes outside of the door

- Yard management

- Consideration of external suppliers, and stock removal to consolidators and freight carriers withportals

- Support in the safe handling and storage of hazardous substances and in the correct transportation ofdangerous goods through EH&S Services

Main Objects

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 172

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Warheouse numberIn EWM, the entire physical warehouse complex is grouped under one warehouse number.

- Storage typeA storage type represents a storage space, a storage facility, or an area for storage that is part of awarehouse complex. The storage type is determined by its organizational form, warehousetechnology, and space requirements.

- Storage areaThe storage area structures the storage type and enables different strategies for putaway.

- Storage binA storage area consists of several storage bins that are themselves the smallest division of thestorage space.

- Warehouse doorA warehouse door is the location of a warehouse number at which goods arrive or depart thewarehouse.

- Staging areaA staging area is used for temporary storage. It is typically located close to the warehouse doors andis assigned to these doors.

- Activity areaAn activity area is a logical area of the warehouse complex that groups storage bins based onspecific warehouse activities. Examples of an activity area include putaway, picking, or physicalinventory.

- Work centerA work center is a physical unit in the warehouse at which warehouse activities such as packing,distributing, and weighing are executed.

- ProductThe Product master record has a warehouse number-dependent view that contains all the datarelevant for warehouse processing. This data includes the putaway or stock removal strategies.

- Hazardous substanceThe hazardous substance includes the data necessary for warehouse processing of hazardoussubstances, such as an inspection prior to putaway.

- Packaging specificationThe packaging specification is a master record that defines the packing structure for a product that isrequired to put away or transport the product. This typically includes information about in whichquantities, with which packing material, and in which sequence a product is to be packed.

- RouteA Route is a sequence of legs that are connected by transshipment locations. The route represents thebasis for different trips.

- Warehouse taskA warehouse task is a document used to execute goods movements. A warehouse task can be basedon logical or physical goods movements or changes to stock. These include putaways and stockremovals, internal movements, posting changes, goods receipt postings or goods issue postings.

- Warehouse orderA warehouse order groups the different warehouse tasks together to create optimal work packages. A

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 173

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

warehouse order can then be assigned to an executing resource.

- Order for value-added services (VAS order)This order is an instruction for warehouse processing to execute a value-added service (VAS) forone or more products or items of an order. This can occur either with or without document reference.

- Handling unitA handling unit is comprised of the packing material, such as load carrier or packaging material, andthe received goods. It always represents a combination of products and packing materials.

- VehicleA vehicle is a concrete example of a specific means of transport, for example, a tractor withsemitrailer having license plate GX-23122. A vehicle can include one or more transportation units.

- Transportation unitWithin transportation processing, a transportation unit represents the smallest loadable unit of avehicle that is used to transport goods. In Yard Management, you can use the transportation unit forinventory management and for increased transparency.

- ResourceA resource is a user, or equipment for conducting work in the warehouse. To obtain increasedtransparency over the warehouse stock, it can also be an inventory-managing unit.

Main Processes

- Goods receipt processThe goods receipt process includes all process steps for the physical acceptance and putaway ofgoods. In particular, you can execute the following process steps with EWM:

- DeconsolidationYou can efficiently deconsolidate inbound deliveries in putaway. EWM monitors the productsduring the entire putaway process.

- Packing for putawayBy packing at the work center, you can pack products into handling units (HUs), and HUs intofurther HUs. You have various options for selecting orders when packing, so that every usercan optimally process his or her own worklist.

- ReturnsIn the goods receipt process, you can receive goods and packagings that are to be accepted dueto a returns delivery.

- Goods issue processThe goods issue process includes all process steps for the physical removal of goods from stock. Inparticular, you can execute the following process steps with EWM:

- PackingIn the goods issue process, you can pack the goods according to the requirements of yourcustomers, prior to the outbound delivery.

- Wave managementUsing wave management, you can conduct an efficient and automated planning of warehouseorders for picking, packing, and sending.

- KittingIn the goods issue process, you can create components for a kit. These kits are always deliveredcomplete and assembled.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 174

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Warehouse-internal processesYou can control your warehouse-internal processes efficiently with EWM, via the following processsteps:

- SlottingWith slotting, you can use your locations to full capacity and achieve improved picking andputaway. Slotting allows you to evaluate the optimization level of the product storage in aparticular bin.

- Warehouse reorganization and replenishmentWith warehouse reorganization, you can improve the bin occupancy in the warehouse throughstock transfers to optimal bins. The process step is based on slotting. With replenishment, youcan optimize the filling from the reserve storage areas.

- Physical inventoryWith the physical inventory procedure, you can execute a physical initial entry of stockbalances for products and HUs of a warehouse or for storage areas for a defined point in time,for the purposes of settlement and control of stocks.

- Cross-processes

- Quality managementYou can execute a quality inspection for products during confirmation of warehouse tasks andputaway. In this way, you can improve the quality of the products and better monitor productquality.

- Yard managementWith yard management, you can control and monitor the arrival, management, and departure ofvehicles from the warehouse property.

- Cross-dockingCross-docking provides you with greater transparency and enhanced process support forprocessing goods that are brought directly from goods receipt to goods issue without putaway.

- MonitoringIncreased transparency from the initial goods acceptance, across the entire goods receipt process,through to picking and goods shipment.

- Radio Frequency support (RF support)Through the direct radio data transmission support, you can execute the individual processes withinthe warehouse in such a way that a direct posting of the activities occurs at the place of the physicalwarehouse activity. All warehouse activities such as putaway, posting change, and picking, can beexecuted by scanning the respective bar codes and through simple control by the user using mobiletransactions, without any special knowledge of EWM. You can personalize these menus and picturesand change them flexibly.


To be able to use the EWM functions, check and maintain all of the activities summarized under EWM inthe Implementation Guide (IMG) that are relevant for you. Here, you can activate and maintain every areaindividually for EWM, according to the attributes of the functionality you are using.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 175

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In addition, the following IMG activities in Customizing for SCM Basis in EWM are important:

- IMG activities for packingFor more information, see Packaging Specification and Packaging Specification Determination.

- IMG activities for EH&S ServicesFor more information, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP Supply Chain Managementunder SCM Basis -> EH&S Services.

- You can use Business Configuration Sets (BC Sets) to create entries in Customizing. TheCustomizing settings are assembled in a process-oriented manner to BC Sets. For information aboutthe existing BC Sets, see EWM BC SETs.

See also

- For detailed information about this topic, see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management-> Extended Warehouse Management.

- For detailed information about IMG activities, see the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP SupplyChain Management under Extended Warehouse Management.

3.6.2 SCM-EWM-TM Transportation Management

3.6.2.1 Structural Changes in IMG for SAP SCM in the Area of Transportation

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the structure of the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP Supply ChainManagement (SAP SCM) has changed. The area Transportation Management has been added. For theIMG activities for this component, see Extended Warehouse Management -> Goods Issue Process ->Transportation Management.

To copy these changes to the project IMGs, you must regenerate the project IMGs.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 176

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.7 SCM-ECT Execution

3.7.1 Structural Changes in IMG for SAP SCM in the Area of Execution

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the structure of the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP Supply ChainManagement (SAP SCM) has changed. The area Execution has been added.

It comprises the following components:

- SCM-ECT-DLPFor the IMG activities for this component, see Extended Warehouse Management -> Cross-ProcessSettings -> Delivery Processing.

- SCM-ECT-LIMFor the IMG activities for this component, see SCM Basis -> Logistics Inventory ManagementEngine (LIME).

To copy these changes to the project IMGs, you must regenerate the project IMGs.

3.8 SCM-EM Event Management

3.8.1 Visibility Processes in SAP Event Management (Extended)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the returnable transport item visibility process is also available as an additionalvisibility process.

SAP delivers predefined processes for process visibility that describe part of a business process. Processesare modular and can occur in multiple business processes. To map an entire business process, you cancombine or enhance visibility processes on a project basis.

The implementation of a visibility process includes preconfigured system settings for the entire visibilityprocess.

You can use this visibility process to manage, load, and unload returnable transport items (RTIs) in SAPAuto-ID Infrastructure (SAP AII) as well as to track their current location and evaluate stocks and cycletimes. In this way, you gain transparency across your stocks of RTIs and can automate processes, reduce

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 177

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

stocks, shorten cycle times, and recognize possible bottlenecks early on.

See also

For more information about the visibility process for returnable transport items, see under help.sap.com-> Documentation -> mySAP Business Suite -> mySAP Supply Chain Management -> SAP Auto-IDInfrastructure -> Supported Processes and Functions -> RFID-Supported Processing of ReturnableTransport Items.

For more information about visibility processes, see under help.sap.com -> Documentation -> mySAPSupply Chain Management -> SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) -> SAP Event Management(SAP EM) -> Visibility Processes.

For more information about the availability of visibility processes, see the SAP Note 677373.

3.8.2 Structure Changes in IMG for SAP EM

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the structure of the Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP EM has changed. Tocopy these changes to the project IMGs, you must regenerate the project IMGs.

New IMG Activities

- Under Event Management -> General Settings in SAP Event Management ->

- Activate Seasonal Procurement Process

- Under Event Management -> Solutions and Scenarios ->

- Assign Document Flow to a Scenario

- Under Event Management ->

- Interface to Document Flow

- Under Event Management -> Interface to Document Flow ->

- Integration with Document Flow

- Define Document Flow Groups

- Define Functions for Interface to Document Flow

- Define Conditions for Updating Document Flow

- Under Event Management -> Archive and Delete SAP EM Objects ->

- Define Residence Times for Document Flow


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 178

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Under Event Management -> General Settings in SAP Event Management -> Solutions andScenarios, the IMG node Assign WCL Transactions is now called Assign Web InterfaceTransactions.

- Under Event Management, the IMG node Event Messages and Status Queries is now calledEvent Messages, Status Queries, and Web Interface.

- Under Event Management -> Web Interface, the IMG node

- Define WCL Transactions is now called Define Web Interface Transactions.

- Assign User Profiles and WCL Transactions to Users is now called Assign UserProfiles and Web Interface Transactions to Users.

- Under Event Management, the IMG node Archive and Delete Event Handlers and EventMessages is now called Archive and Delete SAP EM Objects.

3.8.3 SCM-EM-MGR Event Manager

3.8.3.1 SCM-EM-MGR-ISQ Information System and Queries

3.8.3.1.1 Connection to Document Flow (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can display the dependencies of business objects in the Web interface. To dothis, SAP Event Management (SAP EM) generates networks in document flow with preceding andsucceeding documents, and updates these networks. You can define in Customizing whether SAP EM is toupdate an event handler and its corresponding network or an event message and its correspondingnetwork.

If SAP EM has archived and deleted all event handlers that belong to a network, you can delete thecorresponding network.


You can schedule an automatic deletion of networks as a background job.

In the SAP menu for SAP Supply Chain Management, choose Event Management -> Administration ->Processing Control -> Schedule Background Jobs for Event Management.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 179

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


If you want to use the update of the document flow so that SAP EM generates or updates a correspondingnetwork for an event handler, you must have made the following settings in Customizing:

- Assign Scenario to Document Flow




- Define Document Categories for Document Flow

- Maintain Object Link Model

If you want to delete a document flow, you must define the settings for deleting the document flow.

See also

For more information, see the

- SAP Library under mySAP Supply Chain Management -> Event Management -> SAP EventManagement Infrastructure -> Monitoring and Evaluating Processes -> Connection to DocumentFlow.

- Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP Event Management under Interface to Document Flow.

- Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP Event Management under Archive and Delete SAP EMObjects -> Define Settings for Deleting Document Flow.

3.8.3.1.2 Web Interface (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following enhancements to the Web interface are available.

- Display document flow networksSAP Event Management (SAP EM) uses document flow to map the hierarchical relationship betweenbusiness objects. You can have the Web interface display the network for an event handler as well asthe selected or aggregated status.For more information, see Connection to Document Flow.

- Display indexed parametersSAP EM uses a concept for indexed values to save multiple values for a parameter. A fieldcontaining indexed values provides a link to a dialog box. SAP EM displays the indexed values for aparameter in tabular format in this dialog box. You can configure the display of indexed parametersin SAP EM in such a way that the Web interface displays only a subset of the possible values for aninfo or control parameter.

- Send changes for multiple info or control parameters in an event messageIn the Web interface, you can change multiple entries at the same time in the event handler detailoverview and send these changes to SAP EM in an event message. In this way, you can also changemultiple info or control parameters, for example, multiple partner header data, at the same time.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 180

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Search independently of lowercase or uppercaseYou can configure a field in such a way that you can enter information in the field in eitherlowercase or uppercase. If the parameter is set, the Web interface internally converts each user inputto uppercase. It then sends this user input to SAP EM.By default, this parameter is not set in SAP EM. This means that an enhancement is not critical.

- Language support when logging on with Single Sign-OnIf your system administrator has configured multiple logon languages in the connection to the Webinterface, you can use these in the Web interface. For example, if you log on to a portal with SingleSign-On, you are offered a choice of the configured logon languages when you subsequently log onto the Web interface and you can change your logon language for the Web interface.

- Display status icons for process overviewThe Web interface displays both a status icon for event handlers in the event handler list as well as astatus icon for each event handler set. This enables you to recognize critical processes immediately.

- Display expected eventsSAP EM sorts the expected events within the list of consolidated events. It now puts expected eventsthat contain neither a particular planned date nor any actual dates at the end of the list. The Webinterface displays this list correspondingly.

- Display event reasonsThe Web interface displays a dropdown box containing the event reasons that belong to an eventcode. This allows you to send event reasons, for example, a traffic jam as the reason for a delay, inan event message.


- If you want to have the system display a document flow network, you must set the Document Flowindicator in the user profile in Customizing for SAP Event Management under Define User Profiles.

- If you want to use indexed parameters, you must define the number for displaying indexedparameters in Customizing for SAP Event Management under Configure Fields for User Profiles.

- If you want to permit changes to multiple info or control parameters in an event message, you mustdefine the relevant row numbers in Customizing for SAP Event Management under Define UserProfiles in the dialog structure Event Message Profile -> Event Reporting Items -> EventReporting Details. You also use this field to regroup the fields according to row number to ensurethat the data remains consistent.

- If you want to allow users to enter data in both lowercase and uppercase, you must set the CaseInsensitive indicator for the selection fields in the user profile in Customizing for SAP EventManagement.

- If you want to use status icons for the process overview, you must first define status icons inCustomizing for SAP Event Management. Then you define an event handler set profile to which youassign the status icon schema.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 181

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- If you want to use event reasons, you must first define these for the corresponding internal eventcodes and internal event code groups. Then you have to assign the internal event reasons to one ormore scenarios.

3.8.3.2 SCM-EM-MGR-EVP Event Processing

3.8.3.2.1 Connection to the Alert Framework (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also specify the language for the alerts that SAP Event Management (SAPEM) sends as parameters to the Alert Framework. This allows you to log on to the ERP system or to SAPEM in one language and then send the alert texts to the Alert Framework in another language.


If you want to specify the language information for the message texts that SAP EM sends to the AlertFramework in an alert, you must define the relevant parameter in the ALERT_CREATE activity, forexample, EN for English. To do this, from the IMG for SAP Event Management, choose the activityDefine Rule Sets, and enter the required language in the Language parameter in the ALERT_CREATEactivity. Enter one of the following options as the parameter value:

- A constant

- Metadata as the control or info parameter that contains the language, for example,<CTRL-SHIP_TO_PARTY _LANGU>

3.8.3.3 SCM-EM-MGR-CON Control Processing

3.8.3.3.1 Activate Seasonal Procurement Process (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can monitor overdue events for the seasonal procurement process. You set theSeasonal Procurement indicator which controls the display of particular selection fields specific toseasonal procurement in the expected event monitor.


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 182

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

When you set the Seasonal Procurement indicator, you must note the following:

In addition to displaying selection fields specific to the seasonal procurement process, the indicator alsocontrols whether SAP EM performs a check of terminated queued Remote Function Calls (qRFCs) withspecial prefixes. These terminated qRFCs were constructed in a previous monitor run for event handlersbelonging to the seasonal procurement process. When SAP EM processes these qRFCs, it can be the casethat when executing automatic activities, a direct data backflow occurs from the application system toSAP EM. This backflow can result in changes to the expected events for event handlers which in turn canaffect the selection of overdue expected events in the monitor.


If you want to use the selection fields specific to seasonal procurement in the expected event monitor, youmust set the Seasonal Procurement indicator in Customizing for SAP EM under Activate SeasonalProcurement Process.

See also

For more information, see the report documentation for report /SAPTRX/EE_MONITOR.


Use


If SAP EM has archived and deleted all event handlers that belong to a network, you can delete thecorresponding network.







______________________________________________________________SAP AG 183

SAP-System______________________________________________________________







See also





3.8.3.4 SCM-EM-MGR-ADM Administration

3.8.3.4.1 Archiving and Deletion in Event Management (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can archive and delete event handler sets with a specific archiving object, andinterrupt archiving sessions for archiving objects. Moreover, in addition to global residence times, you canalso use tracking ID code sets to differentiate between residence times for archiving event messages.

Use the archiving object SAPTRX_A2 to archive event handler sets.

Use report /SAPTRX/AUTO_ARCHIEVE_A0_SETS to automatically archive event handler sets.

You can interrupt all archiving sessions. You should not, however, interrupt automatic archiving sessionsfor event handlers or event handler sets.


If you want to archive and delete event handler sets, you must define archiving object SAPTRX_A2. Todo this, use the activity Define Archiving-Object-Specific Customizing in the IMG for SAP EventManagement.

If you want to differentiate between residence times by using the tracking ID code set when archivingevent messages, use the activity Define Residence Times for Archiving or Deleting in the IMG for SAP

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 184

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Event Management.

See also


- SAP Library under mySAP Supply Chain Management -> Supply Chain Management -> EventManagement -> Administration -> Archiving and Deletion in SAP EM.

- Implementation Guide (IMG) for SAP Event Management under Archive or Delete Event Handlersand Event Messages.

3.8.3.4.2 Change Documents (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, SAP Event Management (SAP EM) writes change documents for all data belongingto an event handler. This enables you to track which data was changed and when it was changed.

SAP EM writes a change document when the following event-handler- related data is created or changed:

- Event handler header data

- Expected events

- Info parameters

- Control parameters

- Query IDs

- Tracking IDs

SAP EM displays the change documents on the Change Documents tab page in the event handler detailoverview.


When SAP EM makes changes to the content of fields that it monitors with change documents, itgenerates records in the change document tables for each field change.


If you want SAP EM to write change documents, you must choose the Change Doc. Activation checkboxin the Customizing for SAP EM under Define Event Handler Types.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under mySAP Supply Chain Management -> EventManagement -> SAP Event Management Infrastructure -> Monitoring and Evaluating Processes ->Logging with Change Documents.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 185

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.8.3.4.3 Dynamic Assignment of a URL to Alert Framework (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, SAP Event Management (SAP EM) determines the URL link that it sends with eachalert message dynamically. This means that you can now use SAP EM in your normal system landscape(development, test, and production systems). You no longer have to manually change each predefinedalert category when you change the system landscape.

You can use SAP EM to react with a rule set to inbound event messages. This rule set contains a rule withan activity ALERT_CREATE. You can use the new optional activity parameter Page Type in thisactivity. The activity ALERT_CREATE triggers an alert with a dynamic assignment to the URL link, forexample, to the Web communication layer including the server name, port number, and additionalparameters.


For the dynamic assignment of a URL to the Alert Framework, you must define the activity parameterPage Type in the activity function SAPTRX/CREATE_ALERT in the rule set.

See also

For more information about the activity function /SAPTRX/CREATE_ALERT, see the ImplementationGuide (IMG) for Event Management in the IMG activity Reactions to Event Messages -> Define RuleSets. In the dialog structure, choose Activity Functions -> ALERT_CREATE -> Display Function ModuleDocumentation.

3.8.3.4.4 Activate Seasonal Procurement Process (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can monitor overdue events for the seasonal procurement process. You set theSeasonal Procurement indicator which controls the display of particular selection fields specific toseasonal procurement in the expected event monitor.


When you set the Seasonal Procurement indicator, you must note the following:

In addition to displaying selection fields specific to the seasonal procurement process, the indicator alsocontrols whether SAP EM performs a check of terminated queued Remote Function Calls (qRFCs) withspecial prefixes. These terminated qRFCs were constructed in a previous monitor run for event handlersbelonging to the seasonal procurement process. When SAP EM processes these qRFCs, it can be the casethat when executing automatic activities, a direct data backflow occurs from the application system toSAP EM. This backflow can result in changes to the expected events for event handlers which in turn canaffect the selection of overdue expected events in the monitor.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 186

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


If you want to use the selection fields specific to seasonal procurement in the expected event monitor, youmust set the Seasonal Procurement indicator in Customizing for SAP EM under Activate SeasonalProcurement Process.

See also

For more information, see the report documentation for report /SAPTRX/EE_MONITOR.

3.8.3.4.5 Authorization Concept for Event Handler Display (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also use indexed parameters to restrict the display of an event handlersearch. Indexing allows you to create a parameter multiple times and to give it different values, forexample, partner with value A and partner with value B.

When you search for event handlers, you can restrict the display of the results list by configuring the userauthorization appropriately. The authorization concept is based on parameters. By assigning acombination of parameter name and parameter value in authorization object X_EM_EH (event handlerauthorization), you can restrict the granularity of the display of searches for event handlers. Here you candefine whether authorization must exist for all values or for at least one value in the case of indexedparameters. Until now, SAP Event Management only took the first parameter into consideration and anyothers with the same name were ignored.


Use


If SAP EM has archived and deleted all event handlers that belong to a network, you can delete the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 187

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

corresponding network.













See also





3.9 SCM-FRE Forecasting and Replenishment

3.9.1 Exception Workbench (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the following enhancements in the Exception Workbench (EWB):

- You can forward exceptions to other users' alert inboxes via SMS.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 188

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- You can filter exceptions according to the relevance of an order proposal, enabling you to find themmore easily.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> ExceptionWorkbench.

3.9.2 F&R Dispatcher (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the F&R Dispatcher. This process makes controlling the F&R Processorsimpler and more flexible.

The dispatcher is a background process that you have to activate and start. You can change the sequenceof the individual process steps (sequences) in the dispatcher profile. For example, you can shedule theaggregation of data in two steps. You can adjust the sequence of the process steps delivered by SAP tosuit your requirements.

Using the start profile, you can define whether the F&R Dispatcher is to wait for the consumption data tobe posted and which start times are to be adhered to. This means that you can supply replenishment withthe most up-to-date data.

The Dispatcher starts the individual process steps for each store or distribution center depending on thesettings in the start profile.

You only need to start the Dispatcher once. It then remains active, recognizes a change in day (plan day),and starts replenishment for the location automatically.


The Dispatcher is activated by basis administration.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> F&RProcessor.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 189

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.9.3 Replenishment Workbench (Enhanced)

Use

In the Replenishment Workbench, the results of the automatic replenishment process for stores anddistribution centers are checked, controlled, and adjusted.

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can use the following enhancements in the Replenishment Workbench:

- Split and mergeHere, you can merge or split order proposals. The system provides extensive support.

- Display the stock situation (time series)The display of time series has now been enhanced with simulation options and improvedconfiguration settings. The following are now displayed in tabular form or also graphically:

- Demand influencing factors

- Time series

- Replenishment blocks

- Listing periods

You can influence and check the future development of the stocking situation by simulating changesto order proposals and forecast data.

- Currency converterYou can use the currency converter to convert individual prices into other currencies.

- Change reasonsYou use this function to enter the reasons why you made changes to order proposals in the system.You can then evaluate and analyze these reasons statistically in SAP Business Intelligence (SAP BI).

- RoundingYou activate rounding in the Replenishment Workbench. You can view the rounding rules and theassigned application log to check the system's rounding results.

- TraceabilityYou can trace the results of automatic replenishment with the help of an additional display function.Settings for master data and stocks are displayed as they were when the order quantity wasautomatically calculated.

- Temporary locks for manual replenishmentLocks that you set at location, product, or location product level are taken into account in manualreplenishment.

- Search for order proposalsYou can search for a specific order proposal in the Replenishment Workbench using the orderproposal number or the reference number.

- Check the release conditionsYou can check the release conditions for a selected order proposal. This may be necessary if youmake manual changes (grouping, splitting).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 190

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Check the grouping conditionsYou can check the grouping conditions for a selected order proposal. This may be necessary if youmake manual changes or when you recreate an order proposal.

- Cause determinationFrom the detail view in the Replenishment Workbench, you can go straight to the causedetermination function. In cause determination, you can display the time series for the target orsource location, the exceptions, and manual changes (to the order quantity or delivery date, forexample) for a selected location product.

See also

- For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> OrderProposal Management and under Optimization.

3.9.4 F&R Interfaces (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can use the following interfaces with enhanced functions in SAP Forecasting andReplenishment.

- Product

- Descriptive attribute to identify a product hierarchy node

- Characteristics for suspending replenishment planning

- Location product


- Characteristics for controlling the initial buy allocation

- Location


- Inbound and outbound interfaces for order proposals

- Order proposals adopt the identification number during the import, and do not change duringthe export of data.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 191

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


You must organize and control the import of data on the system side (for example, using backgroundjobs). SAP F&R cannot request the data.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> Interfaces.

3.9.5 F&R Interfaces (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use new inbound interfaces:

- Procurement cycle

- Release profiles

- Release profile assignments

- Layout module

- Unit of measure groups

- Reference modules

- Rounding profiles


You have to organize and control the import of data on the sending side (for example, using backgroundjobs). SAP F&R cannot request the data.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> Interfaces.

3.9.6 F&R Optimization Process (Enhanced)

Use

Using requirement quantity optimization, you can optimize the net requirements to cover the logisticalrequirements or to reduce costs in SAP F&R.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the following enhancements in the optimization process:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 192

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- You can now perform optimization for order proposal items that were created manually. The resultof the optimization is descrited in detail in the application log.

- If the maximum stock level is exceeded, you can display an exception and decide whether to allowthis to happen.

- Determination of minimum order quantities for products

- Determination of units of measure

- Definition of capital lockup costs (for example, storage costs and interest costs) and ordering costs

- Minimum restriction check and an additional restriction check

Constraints

This function is not available for stores.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> RequirementQuantity Optimization.

3.9.7 Consumption Data for SAP F&R (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 you can transfer the consumption data from SAP BI to SAP Forecasting andReplenishment.

For new products that have not yet been planned in SAP F&R, you can perform an initial data transferwith consumption data from SAP BI or SAP ECC. If the consumption data in SAP F&R is incomplete orincorrect for certain products, you can transfer the missing consumption data from SAP BI.

You use this function as a system administrator or replenishment planner.


Plan the transfer of consumption data from SAP BI manually or using a background job.

See also

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 193

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> MovementData.

3.9.8 SCM-FRE-MD Master Data

3.9.8.1 Business Week Definition (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can freely define the start of the business week and the first calendar week ofthe year.

SAP Forecasting and Replenishment (SAP F&R) uses weekly information for display (for example, in theReplenishment Workbench Time Series Screen and DIF Calendar) and reporting purposes. The definitionof what is considered a "business week" may be different in different countries or organizations.Therefore it is important to define the starting day of the week and how the system is to calculate the firstweek of the year.


The system does not automatically create a corresponding fiscal year variant that includes these businessweek settings for SAP F&R Analytics. If desired, you can define a matching fiscal year variant manuallyin the relevant BI system, which would allow reports to show the same week numbers as in the SAP F&Rsystem. You must create the fiscal year variant before sending F&R Analytics data to BI and use it in theupdate rules of the F&R content cubes.

If the Business Week Definition settings are left empty, the system cannot generate time series data.


In Customizing for Forecasting and Replenishment > Master Data > Define Settings at Client Level, youmake the following settings:

- First Week DayYou enter the weekday you want the system to use as the start of a business week. For example, inthe United States., the first day of the business week is usually Sunday.CAUTION: Once you enter a first week day here and save it, you will NOT be able to change itagain as this would invalidate any time series data generated with the previous setting. When youchoose Save, the system displays a message asking you if you are sure you want to save this day.Check your entry carefully before proceeding.

- First Week of the Business YearYou make entries in the following fields to specify how the system calculates the first week:

- Day of Reference DateEnter the number of the day of the month you want to use as a reference point.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 194

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Month Reference DateEnter the number month you want to use as a reference point.

- Determination Rule of Business WeekSelect the rule you want the system to use for the calculation. You can either select one of thestandard rules, or use BAdI /FRE/DB_MD_BADI_006 to create your own rule.For example, in Europe, the reference date is January 1 and the determination rule is "firstweek that has three days after the reference date." In the United States, the reference date maybe different for different retailers (for example, some use June 30, others use February 1); thedetermination rule is usually "week that contains the reference date."

See also

Fore further information, see the SAP Library under Forecasting and Replenishment > Master Data >Business Week Definition.

3.9.8.2 F&R Master Data (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, Forecasting and Replenishment (F&R) includes the following enhancements:

- You can make mass changes to location data in the F&R Mass Maintenance for Locationstransaction.

- You can manually maintain hierarchy reference locations in the Reference Location Maintenancetransaction.

- You can display F&R-relevant fields for master data objects either:

- In the mass maintenance screens by selecting a node and right clicking

- In the application by choosing GoTo > Display master data object

- You can maintain calendars in the Planning Calendar transaction.

- You can freely define the start date for business weeks and how the weeks are numbered. Fordetailed information, see the Business Week Definition release note.

- Cross-docking is available as a new processing method for scheduling.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 195

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.9.8.3 Product Type Identifier for Inbound Products (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, there is a new product type parameter for source objects imported from externalsystems that are to be added to the SAP SCM product database.

In some cases, multiple source objects could have the same ID number but be considered differentproducts: product 4711, merchandise category 4711 and reference module 4711, and so on. SAP SCMneeds to know what distinguishes these various objects so that it can filter them properly in the userinterface: for example, you want the F4 help to show a list of all products in merchandise category 4711rather than the single product 4711, or you want to see only the reference modules. To ensure this, eachincoming product has a product type based on the source object in the external system.


The Product Type fields in the MATMAP and MATKEY tables can contain the following entries:

- Blank = Real product

- 1 = Merchandise category

- 2 = Merchandise category hierarchy node

- 3 = Regular product hierarchy node

- 4 = Reference module

Using BAdI APO_BAPI_BUS10001 (method CHANGE_SAVEMULTIPLE2), you maintain theLT_PRODUCT_MAPPING parameter to map the external product identifiers to these product types inSAP SCM.

BAPIs responsible for inbound processing use the PRODUCT_TYPE parameter to retrieve the externalproduct identifiers.

3.9.9 SCM-FRE-REF References

3.9.9.1 Reference (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can create reference modules from several location products. Alternatively, youcan transfer reference modules to SAP Forecasting and Replenishment (SAP F&R).

In order to perform the forecast in SAP F&R, the F&R Processor requires time series values for the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 196

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

movement data. New products have no historical data (time series). You can therefore use the time seriesof several location products (reference module) for the new product until it has enough of its own timeseries values to yield reliable results from the forecast.

The time series for the reference module are calculated and assigned on the basis of the location productsthat are transferred.


You must organize and control the export of data from the external system (for example, SAP ECC)(using background jobs, for example). SAP F&R cannot request the data.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment --> MovementData.

3.9.10 SCM-FRE-CPF Collaborative Planning, Forecasting andReplenishment

3.9.10.1 Collaborative Planning Forecasting and Replenishment (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, there is a business platform for cooperative planning, forecasting and managementof goods flows and stock between retailers and consumer products manufacturers. The purpose ofCollaborative Planning Forecasting and Replenishment (CPFR) is to jointly forecast the sales of goods toconsumers and to plan promotion measures (for example, promotions by vendors, retail promotions andproduct price reductions).

SAP Forecasting and Replenishment (F&R) offers the following kinds of forecasts:

- Operational forecastThis provides a sales forecast for stores and/or goods issue forecast for distribution centers, and isintended for internal use only.

- Tactical forecastThis is a subset of the operational forecast, usually for a single vendor and restricted time period, andmay include some or all of the vendor's products and some or all of the retailer's stores. Its validityperiod can exceed that of an operational forecast. Like the operational forecast, the tactical forecastis a unified forecast, meaning that it already contains the DIF effects. For stores, a tactical forecast isa sales forecast and for distribution centers it is a goods issue forecast. This forecast can be exportedto external applications and allows the vendor to have input into and react to the retailer's stockrequirements.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 197

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

A tactical forecast is calculated in exactly the same way as an operational forecast (same parameters,same forecast basis). The only differences between them are the forecast horizons and the fact thatthe tactical forecast is always based on a specified number of weeks (typically 13 weeks, but can beup to 52 weeks).

You can flag the specific products or merchandise categories for which information can be exchangedwith the vendor. These can be maintained on the vendor/product level, and are included in the CPFRproduct list. The products must exist in F&R master data; you cannot import vendor data from an externalsource to F&R for collaborative forecasting.


RFC function /FRE/BIF_CPFR_DATA_PROVIDE can be called from an external system in order toretrieve the CPFR forecast results.


CPFR must determine the locations that are directly supplied by a specific vendor for the specified CPFRproducts where the tactical forecast is required. This determination is time-consuming so you shouldschedule the program /FRE/CPFR_DETERMINE_LOCPRD to run in batch mode, for example, daily.

When this program is executed, the determination is executed only if the supply network determinationdate + supply network frequency is less than or equal to the current date.


There are several BAdIs available for CPFR. In the IMG, see Forecasting and Replenishment >Collaborative Planning > Enhancements Using Business Add-Ins.

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment -> CollaborativePlanning.

3.9.11 SCM-FRE-IF Interfaces

3.9.11.1 Product Type Identifier for Inbound Products (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, there is a new product type parameter for source objects imported from externalsystems that are to be added to the SAP SCM product database.

In some cases, multiple source objects could have the same ID number but be considered differentproducts: product 4711, merchandise category 4711 and reference module 4711, and so on. SAP SCMneeds to know what distinguishes these various objects so that it can filter them properly in the userinterface: for example, you want the F4 help to show a list of all products in merchandise category 4711rather than the single product 4711, or you want to see only the reference modules. To ensure this, eachincoming product has a product type based on the source object in the external system.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 198

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


The Product Type fields in the MATMAP and MATKEY tables can contain the following entries:

- Blank = Real product

- 1 = Merchandise category

- 2 = Merchandise category hierarchy node

- 3 = Regular product hierarchy node

- 4 = Reference module

Using BAdI APO_BAPI_BUS10001 (method CHANGE_SAVEMULTIPLE2), you maintain theLT_PRODUCT_MAPPING parameter to map the external product identifiers to these product types inSAP SCM.

BAPIs responsible for inbound processing use the PRODUCT_TYPE parameter to retrieve the externalproduct identifiers.

3.9.12 SCM-FRE-DIF Demand Influencing Factor

3.9.12.1 Weighting Profile DIF Type (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, there is a new Demand Influencing Factor (DIF) type for weighting profiles. Thesystem uses weighting profiles when breaking down weekly forecasts into daily values that are then usedin the requirements calculation and requirements quantity optimization.

The system calculates dynamic weekly profiles from historical consumption data on a daily basis. In caseswhere it is not possible to calculate a dynamic profile (for example, for new products that have noconsumption history) you can use a static weekly profile.

You can replace the dynamic and static weekly profiles for a certain period and certain location productsor locations with your own customized profiles. If you want to replace an existing weighting profile for aperiod longer than one week, you can choose between the following weighting profiles:

- Time-dependent weekly profileThis is used in the same way as a static weekly profile for all weeks in the relevant period. The sevenweighting factors in a weekly profile represent the individual weekdays as a percentage of the totalconsumption for the week. They correspond to the weekdays in consecutive order, starting with thefirst weekday. The total consumption does not have to equal 100%.

- Event profile

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 199

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

This means that the profile pattern applies for the duration of an event, regardless of the day onwhich the event starts and finishes and how many weeks it lasts. If necessary, the system cangenerate several different weekly profiles for the forecast and the requirement calculation from thisevent profile.

Because a specific event may last for different lengths of time (for example, a retail promotion may last10 days the first time and 12 days the next) but with the same consumption pattern each time, you cancreate a weighting profile that has no fixed duration. You can then scale this to suit different periods andrequirements by extending or shortening the time period.

You can also specify a weighting profile as a default value for a DIF; the system automatically assigns thisprofile when new occurrences of this DIF are created. The value can be overwritten manually or deleted.If the DIF occurrence is created by the inbound interface, a profile assignment defined in the interfaceoverrides the default value.

NOTE: You cannot assign a weighting profile to:

- A DIF occurrence with an "ignore historical value" category because this only affects periods in thepast

- DIF types Metric, Time Series or Sales Price, because they have infinite periods


In Customizing for Defining Demand Influencing Factors, you can specify that a DIF is a weightingprofile by selecting the appropriate checkbox.

You can use the maintenance function in the master data to customize a weighting profile as default valuefor new DIF occurrences.

Scaling a weighting profile involves the time-based extension or shortening of a pattern that arises fromthe weighting factors of the profile to another period of time. This means that the number of weightingfactors of the profile is increased or reduced to a different number, without altering the pattern of theweighting profile. In addition to a scaling algorithm in the standard delivery, a BAdI/FRE/DIF_BADI_005 is available for customer-specific scaling.

See also

For further information, see the SAP Library documentation for SAP Forecasting and Replenishment >Demand Influencing Factors.

3.9.13 SCM-FRE-SUI Replenishment Workbench for Stores

3.9.13.1 Replenishment Workbench for Stores (Enhanced)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 200

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can configure the following areas of the Replenishment Workbench for Storesaccording to your own requirements:

- Screen configuration (product list view, product detail view, calculation detail view)

- Time series

- Demand influencing factors

- Responsibility profiles

See also

For more information, see the SAP Library under SAP Forecasting and Replenishment -> ReplenishmentWorkbench.

3.10 SCM-ICH Inventory Collaboration Hub

3.10.1 cFolders Integration

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can also call cFolders in the Web application menu of the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH). cFolders enable the exchange of information such as project plans,documents, and product structures between customers and suppliers. The following prerequisites must befulfilled so that you can call cFolders in the Web application menu of SAP ICH.

- You have installed the add-on SAP cProject Suite 4.0 in the SCM system.

- The implementation /SCF/NAV_CFOLDERS of the BAdI /SCF/NAV_ABS is active. Thisimplementation is active in the standard system.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 201

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.2 Structural Changes in the IMG for ICH

Use

The structure of the Implementation Guide (IMG) for the Inventory Collaboration Hub has been changedfor SAP SCM 5.0. To transfer these changes into the project IMG, you have to generate the project IMGsagain.

Deleted IMG Nodes

- IMG for ASN Processing

- Packing -> Handling Unit

- Packing -> Packaging SpecificationYou now call the IMG activities of this node in the IMG for SCM Basis.

New IMG Activities

- IMG for Basic Settings

- BAdI: Table Download

- Inbound and Outbound Messages -> Define Time Stamp Format of OutboundMessages

- Inbound and Outbound Messages -> Logical Business Partner Role of ICH -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Inbound and Outbound Messages -> Addresses -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Inbound and Outbound Messages -> Mapping External Exceptions and Logs -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Basic Settings -> Selection -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Basic Settings -> Validation -> SAP Standard Settings -> Display Standard ValidationChecks

- Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own Settings -> Maintain Validation Profiles

- Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own Settings -> Maintain Settings in Validation Profiles

- Basic Settings -> Validation -> Own Settings -> Maintain Validation Checks

- Basic Settings -> Alert Monitor -> ...All nodes and IMG activities under this node are new.

- IMG for Supplier Collaboration

- Scenario Control -> Define Scenario Control Key

- Projected Stock -> BAdI: Calculation of Stock on Hand

- Actions (Post Processing Framework) -> Assign Action Profile to Processes

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 202

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Purchase OrdersThis node previously only had two BAdIs, which have been moved under Purchase Orders ->Business Add-Ins (BAdIs). All other IMG activities under this node are new.

- Release Processing -> Settings for Release ProcessingThis IMG activity was previously only in the IMG for ASN processing.

- Release Processing -> Set Confirmation Control

- Release Processing -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> Conversion Exits -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- ASN Processing -> Define Validation Scenarios

- ASN Processing -> Define and Assign Display Profiles

- ASN Processing -> Packing -> Set Up Handling Units and Packaging Specifications

- Due List for Purchasing Documents and Receipts/Requirements List -> BAdI:Modification of Due List and Receipts/Requirements List

- Business Add-Ins -> BAdI: Scheduling in Supplier Collaboration

- Supplier Confirmation -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Delivery Control Monitor -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Kanban -> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.

- Supplier Delivery Performance Rating (SDPR)All IMG activities under this node are new.

- IMG for Customer Collaboration

- Responsive Replenishment -> Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) -> BAdI: Extract ForecastData

- Returns Processing-> ...All IMG activities under this node are new.


- IMG for Validation

- The IMG activity Define Validation Profiles is now called Display Standard ValidationProfiles.The IMG activity was moved under Validation -> SAP Standard Settings .

- The IMG activity Define Validation Checks and Responses to Check Results is nowcalled Display Settings for Standard Validation Profiles. The IMG activity was alsomoved under Validation -> SAP Standard Settings.

- IMG for Actions(Post Processing Framework)

- The IMG activity Define Number Ranges for Generated Conditions is now calledMaintain Number Ranges.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 203

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- The IMG activity Set GR Status for ASN Items Based on GR Cumulative Quantity isnow called Define Settings for Release Processing.

- The IMG activity Determine Due Scheduling Agreement Releases is now calledDetermine Due Schedule Lines. The IMG activity was also moved under SupplierCollaboration -> Due List for Purchasing Documents and Receipts/Requirements List.

- IMG for Packing

- The IMG activity Determine Smart Forms for Labels is now called Determine Forms forLabels.

- IMG for ASN Processing and Release Processing

- The IMG activity Smart Forms for Printing is now called Determine Print Forms.

Moved IMG Activities

- IMG for Validation

- The IMG activity Define Validation Groups is now under Validation -> Own Settings. Thisactivity was previously under Validation.

- IMG for Release Processing

- All BAdIs for release processing were moved under Release Processing -> BusinessAdd-Ins (BAdIs).


- All BAdIs under ASN processing were moved under ASN Processing -> Business Add-Ins(BAdIs).

- IMG for Time Series Data Management

- The structure for time series data management is now under SCM Basis -> Time Series DataManagement

3.10.3 Scenario Control (New)

Use

As of SAP ICH 5.0, you, as customer, can use scenario control to filter the location products that asupplier collaboration application is to display on the Web UI.

For scenario control, you use the following new objects in Customizing for Inventory Collaboration

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 204

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Hub:

- BAdI Selection (/SCF/BADI_SELECTION)In this BAdI you implement filtering logic. You find the BAdI in Customizing for InventoryCollaboration Hub under Basic Settings -> Selection. The reports for alert generation also callthe BAdI.

- IMG Activity Define Scenario Control KeysYou can use a scenario control key to flag a product. The BAdI can evaluate the scenario control keyand display a location product in an application depending on the scenario control key. You find theIMG activity in Customizing for Inventory Collaboration Hub under Supplier Collaboration ->Scenario Control. You enter the scenario control key in the D Location Product Settings(Customer) on the SAP ICH Web UI.

- IMG Activity Set Selection Mode of an ApplicationIn this IMG activity you assign an application to a selection context. The BAdI can evaluate theselection context and apply the same filtering logic that is used for other applications with the sameselection context. You find the IMG activity in Customizing for Inventory Collaboration Hubunder Basic Settings -> Selection.

For more information, see the IMG for Inventory Collaboration Hub under Supplier Collaboration ->Scenario Control -> Define Scenario Control Keys.

3.10.4 Visible Products and Locations (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, data for a location product is generally only visible to a user in the Web user interface for theSAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH) if the user had authorization to display or change thelocation product<Object1>. The user can therefore only display transaction data for a location product inan application (for example, the stock situation in the SMI Monitor), or the product or location name inthe input help for products and locations if he or she had the appropriate authorization. Thepartner-dependent network filter (PDNF) is an additional filter as of SAP SCM 4.0 that controls that theuser of a business partner can only see the products and locations in SAP ICH that are relevant andallowed for the business partner based on his or her role in the logistics network. This partner-dependentfiltering of data was a default setting in SAP SCM 4.1 for all SAP ICH applications.

In SAP SCM 5.0, the visibility concept was enhanced with new filters and configuration options. (A usermust, however, still have the authorization for a location product. This can be configured in SAP SCM5.0.)

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 205

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

New Selection Modes

Besides the selection mode PDNF, new selection modes are available which use new rules to filter thedata visible to the user. These include the following modes:

- Selection modes based on order documentsSelection modes for the various order documents and applications are available and determine thevisible documents and data as follows:

- A user of a supplier can see documents in the supplier view in which this supplier is entered asthe supplier.

- A user of a customer can see documents in the customer view in which this customer is enteredas the customer.

- A user of a goods recipient can see documents in the goods recipient view in which this goodsrecipient is entered as the goods recipient.

The location and product names of the location products from these documents are available in inputhelp (provided that the user authorization allows these locations and products to be displayed). Ifpurchase orders and scheduling agreement releases do not exist in the system, there are no locationsor products available in the input help for ASN processing. If the user of a supplier neverthelesswants to create an ASN without a purchasing document, he or she must enter the ship-from locationof the supplier and the product manually.As of SAP SCM 5.0, purchase order collaboration, release processing, and ASN processing usethese selection modes in the standard system. Alternatively, PDNF is still available for theseapplications.

- Master DataWith this selection mode, the user sees data for location products for which he or she hasauthorization. The locations and products of these location products are available in the input help.

- Partner-dependent master data for the SNI monitorWith this selection mode, the user only sees the SNI-relevant location products according to the roleof the business partner to which he or she belong (customer or supplier).

PDNF Applications

The following supplier collaboration applications, which were available in SAP SCM 4.1, continue to usePDNF in the standard system:

- Alert Monitor

- Demand monitor

- SMI Monitor

- Purchase orders in the SMI scenario

- ASNs in the SMI scenario

All applications for cooperation with customers also continue to use PDNF.

Configuration Options

A selection mode is defined per application data ID. In the standard system, the application screens usethe selection modes described above by default. For some applications, alternative selection modes areavailable. If required, you can set these up in Customizing for the Selections for the application screens.If required, you can also create user-defined selection modes in Customizing for selections, and program

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 206

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the selection logic with the /SCF/BADI_SELECTION BAdI. You can also use the BAdI to modify theselection logic for existing selection modes.

3.10.5 XI Content for SAP SCM Basis (Changed)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following new XI Content is available in the Integration Repository for SAPSCM Basis in the namespace http://sap.com/xi/SCMBasis/Global:

Integration Scenarios

- ASN_Processing

- Contract_Manufacturing_Purchasing

- Delivery_Control_Monitor

- Dynamic_Replenishment

- Kanban_Processing

- Returns_Instruction_Processing

- Supply_Network_Inventory_Monitoring

XI Interfaces

- DeliveryInformation_In

- DeliveryScheduleConfirmation_Out

- ReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification_In

- SupplyChainExceptionReportNotification_In

- SupplyChainExceptionReportNotification_Out

Changes have been made to the following XI Content:

Integration Scenarios

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 207

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Purchase_Order_Processing

- Release_Processing

- Responsive_Replenishment

- Supplier_Managed_Inventory

3.10.6 SCM-ICH-MD Master Data

3.10.6.1 AFS-Specific Enhancements for Responsive Replenishment (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, responsive replenishment has been enhanced by AFS-specific functions to supportan AFS scenario with SAP AFS 5.0.

You can use the BAdI (Business Add-In) Setting the AFS Flag for the AFS Customer (/SCA/AFS_FLAG)to activate the functions that are specific to the SAP Apparel and Footwear solution.

UI Features

The following new UI features are available:

- General Screen FeaturesNo information is available for a product at AFS hierarchy header level in the screens for short-termforecasting, promotion planning, or replenishment overview, or in the TLB screens. When headerproducts are specified in the selection criteria, the system breaks down these products into theirrespective AFS hierarchy subproducts.

- Product Sort OrderThis feature sorts the AFS hierarchy subproducts based on the sort order maintained for the AFSmaterial in the AFS system, instead of the standard alphanumeric sort order of the location productsdisplayed.

- Product Size InformationWhen the AFS hierarchy subproducts are displayed as a list in the short-term forecasting, promotionplanning, replenishment overview, and TLB screens, an additional column, Char Val, is added to thelist. It contains the product size information for the relevant subproduct.

- Display Key Figure and Total at AFS Hierarchy Product LevelThis feature helps you to view one key figure for a product at a time. If all the subproducts of theAFS hierarchy products are selected, the key figure total is also displayed at AFS product level.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 208

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Otherwise, the total is not calculated for the AFS header product to ensure consistency on the userinterface (UI).

Functions

The following new functions are available:

- Direct Shipment for Baseline DemandThis function determines the appropriate ship-from location for a location product in accordancewith the business rules maintained in the system. It applies to both the promotional and baselinedemand. You can use dynamic determination of the ship-from location to have these productsshipped directly from the plant to the customer location. If a ship-from location cannot bedetermined, the default ship-from location is used.

- Aggregation of AFS Hierarchy Subproducts History to AFS Header HistoryThis is an essential step when performing hierarchical responsive forecasting for the AFS hierarchyproducts. With this function, the sales history of the subproducts (in short-term time buckets) isaggregated to the header product's sales history (in long-term time buckets) and is then used forstatistical forecasting.

- Disaggregation of AFS Hierarchy Header ForecastIn the case of short-term forecasting, the statistical forecast for the product at AFS hierarchy headerlevel is disaggregated to the forecast of the subproducts (in short-term buckets). The disaggregationtakes place when you save the statistical forecast (in long-term time buckets) of the AFS hierarchyheader product. You can use the BAdI Disaggregation of AFS Hierarchy Header Forecast(/SCA/DISAGG_FACTOR) to implement your own disaggregation logic.

New Alerts

The following new alerts are available:

- Replenishment is not performed for hierarchy header product This alert is raised by the replenishment service when the selected products include an AFShierarchy header product. This alert has the alert type 1130 and can by viewed in the SAP ICH alertmonitor screen.

- Missing XML for at least one component of the AFS hierarchy product This alert is raised by the XML PROACT service when XML data is missing for an AFS hierarchysubproduct in a short-term time bucket that lies within the last long-term time bucket. You can viewthis alert in the SAP ICH forecast overview screen when running a statistical forecast for the relevantAFS hierarchy header product. This alert can also be viewed in the SAP ICH alert monitor screenand has the alert type 7401.

- Storage Capacity Alert This alert is raised by the storage capacity report for the ship-to location(/SAPAPO/VMIDRP_STORAGE_CAP). This alert indicates that the total projected inventory foran AFS header product exceeds the storage capacity of the customer location for a short-term timebucket. This alert has the alert type 1130 and can be viewed in the SAP ICH alert monitor screen.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 209

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


- To activate AFS functions, implement and activate the BAdI Set AFS Flag for the AFS Customer(/SCA/AFS_FLAG) in Customizing by choosing Customer Collaboration -> ResponsiveReplenishment -> Business Add-Ins -> Setting AFS Flag for AFS Customers.

- To disaggregate the weekly forecast data of the AFS hierarchy header product to the weekly forecastdata of its hierarchy subproducts, implement and activate the BAdI Disaggregate AFS HierarchyHeader Forecast (/SCA/DISAGG_FACTOR) in Customizing by choosing Customer Collaboration-> Responsive Replenishment -> Business Add-Ins -> Disaggregate AFS Hierarchy HeaderForecast.

- To display the key figure total at AFS product level, implement and activate the BAdI Key FigureSelection (/SCF/KEYFIG_SELECT) by choosing Customer Collaboration -> ResponsiveReplenishment -> Business Add-Ins -> Select Key Figures to Display in the Dropdown Box.

3.10.7 SCM-ICH-REL Scheduling Agreement Release

3.10.7.1 Confirmation Control (new)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can define in the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH) whether asupplier must create supplier confirmations (purchase order confirmations or scheduling agreementconfirmations) for purchase orders in purchase order collaboration and for scheduling agreement releases.You can make the settings dependent on the following characteristics of the purchasing document:

- Customer

- Supplier

- Customer location

- Ship-from Location

- Product

ASNs or supplier confirmations can be mandatory, forbidden, or optional (default setting) for a certaincharacteristics combination. If, for example, ASNs are forbidden, the supplier cannot create or publishASNs in SAP ICH.


You make the setting in Customizing for Purchase Orders or Release Processing under Set ConfirmationControl. You can also call the activity from the SAP Easy Access mySAP Supply Chain Managementscreen under Purchase Orders and under Release Processing.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 210

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

There is also confirmation control for purchase orders in an SAP back-end system. However, you cannotuse the IDoc ORDERS05 to transfer the settings for confirmation control in standard purchase ordercollaboration from an SAP back-end system to SAP ICH. You must therefore ensure that you maintainsettings in the SAP back-end system and in SAP ICH consistently.

3.10.7.2 Due Schedule Lines (Enhanced)

Use

As in SAP SCM 4.1, the system determines due schedule lines and quantities for purchase orders andreleases, and displays the due schedule lines in the due list for purchasing documents. To determine dueschedule lines, the system assigns the quantities of ASNs that refer to the document to the schedule linesof a purchasing document. A due schedule line is a schedule line that has not been assigned an ASNquantity, or has been assigned an ASN quantity that is too small.

In SAP SCM 5.0 there are the following enhancements:

- New setting options to calculate due quantitiesYou have the following new setting options in Customizing:

- You can make settings to define whether the shipping date/time or the delivery date/time isrelevant when calculating the due schedule lines of a release or a purchase order. Depending onyour settings, the system processes the schedule lines according to their shipping dates/times ortheir delivery dates/times, for example. In SAP SCM 4.1, processing occurred based on thedelivery dates/times.

- You can make settings to define which ASNs the system considers for a release. The systemcan choose ASNs based on release and ASN time stamps (as in SAP SCM 4.1), or based oncustomer cumulative quantity. To do so, the system considers the control category forcumulative quantities, which has been set for the scheduling agreement item, and whichspecifies whether the customer considers inbound deliveries or goods receipts in the backendsystem during release creation.

- Depending on the level of commitment of a release schedule line, you can define whether thesystem considers the release schedule line when calculating the due quantities of a release.Note the upgrade relevance: In SAP SCM 4.1, the due list displays all schedule lines of arelease, irrespective of the level of commitment. In the standard SAP SCM 5.0 system, the duelist does not display schedule lines with the level of commitment 004 (preview). If necessary,you can configure that the due list is to display schedule lines with the level of commitment004.

To make settings for due quantities of scheduling agreement releases in SAP SCM 4.1, the IMGactivity Determine Due Scheduling Agreement Releases existed. Since the IMG activity is alsorelevant for purchase orders in SCM 5.0 (the relevant date/time is valid for scheduling agreementreleases and purchase orders), the IMG activity has been renamed as Determine Due Schedule Lines.

- Creating ASNsIf the supplier creates an ASN for a purchase order delivery schedule line or for a release schedule

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 211

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

line in the due list for purchasing documents, in purchase order collaboration or in releaseprocessing, SAP ICH automatically proposes the due quantity as the ASN quantity. If the duequantity is zero, the supplier cannot create an ASN in these applications.

- Due list fields for purchasing documents In the due list for purchasing documents, the shipping date/time and the delivery date/time now alsoexist as selection criteria.

- Alerts for due and overdue purchase order delivery and scheduling agreement schedule linesIn SAP SCM 5.0, there are the following new alerts for due purchase order and release schedulelines:

- Overdue Scheduling Agreement Release (alert type 7101) and Overdue Purchase Order (alerttype 7103): The release/purchase order contains due schedule lines that lie in the past.

- Scheduling Agreement Release Due Within Procurement Time (alert type 7102) and PurchaseOrder Due Within Procurement Time (alert type 7104): The release/purchase order containsdue schedule lines in the future that occur within the procurement time.

You create the alerts using the new report Generate Alerts for Due/Overdue Purchase Orders andScheduling Agreement Releases

3.10.7.3 Goods Recipient View (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, a goods recipient view is available in addition to the customer and supplier viewsfor the following applications in the Web user interface (Web UI) of the SAP Inventory CollaborationHub (SAP ICH):

- Purchase order collaboration (overview and details)

- Release processing (overview, details, and comparison)

- ASN processing (overview and details)

- Receipts/Requirements List

- Returns ASN processing (overview and details)

The goods recipient view allows data to be displayed only. Fields that the user of a goods recipient is notallowed to see (such as components of a subcontract orders or prices) are hidden. A user of a businesspartner can see documents in the goods recipient view in which the business partner is entered as thegoods recipient. The user must be assigned to the business partner.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 212

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The items of a purchase order can have different goods recipients. The user can only see the items of thebusiness partner to which he or she is assigned.

3.10.7.4 Deviating Recipient of Ordered Products (New)

Use

In SAP SCM 4.1, you could only map procurement processes in which the supplier delivers the productdirectly to the customer in purchase order collaboration and release processing of the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH). The delivery goes to the ship-to location, which always belongs to thecustomer in SAP ICH 4.1. At header level, the XML messages contain the supplier and the customer andfor ASNs- the ship-to location. Purchase orders and releases contain the ship-to location at item level. InSAP SCM 4.1 the delivery address is the address of the ship-to location from the SAP ICH master data.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, in SAP ICH you can map procurement processes in which the supplier delivers theproducts to a different location than the customer location or to another address than the customeraddress. You can define the recipient of the products in SAP ICH and in the XML messages with thefollowing data alternatively:

- With a business partner named as Goods Recipient in SAP ICH other than the customer.A business partner master must exist in SAP ICH for the good recipient.

- With a ship-to location other than the customer location.A location master must exist in SAP ICH for the ship-to location.

- With a ship-to location address other than the customer location address.A location master does not have to exist in SAP ICH for the ship-to location. The XML messagedoes not have to transfer a ship-to location ID.

SAP ICH 5.0 now simplifies the following processes, for example:

- Third-party order processing (TPOP) with deviating goods recipient or deviating goods recipientaddress

- Delivery to a deviating delivery address from the customer point of view

- Packing of the product to be put away by a contract packager (see below)

Enhancements to the XML Messages

To enable processes with deviating goods recipients, ship-to locations, and delivery addresses, the XMLmessages for purchase orders, releases, and ASNs were enhanced with the following data:

- Business partner Goods Recipient

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 213

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The goods recipient (called ProductRecipientParty in the XML message) is at header or item level,depending on the message type.

- Business partner Customer at item levelThe customer at item level is available for purchase orders and scheduling agreement releases. Thebusiness partner is called BuyerParty in the XML message.

The goods recipient or customer data in the XML message is the business partner Goods Recipient on theGoods Recipient tap page and data for the ship-to location on the Ship-to Location tab page. In the SAPICH Web application menu there are also goods recipient views, with which the user of a goods recipientcan display data, for the following applications:

- Release processing

- ASN processing

- Purchase Order Collaboration


- Returns processing

For more information, see the release information for the goods recipient view.

Addresses in Inbound Message Processing

In SAP SCM 4.1, SAP ICH always used the address from the ICH master data for business partners andlocations. In SAP SCM 5.0, you can set in Customizing whether SAP ICH should use the addresses fromthe XML message or from the master data. This enables processes with deviating delivery addresses. Formore information, see the release information for the addresses.

Customer Location Determination

The ship-to location can differ from the customer location. However, only the ship-to location can betransferred in the XML messages, the customer location cannot. In inbound message processing SAP ICHdetermines the customer location as follows:

- If the XML message contains the business partner number of the customer at item or header level,SAP ICH takes the location, in which the business partner of the customer is entered, as thecustomer location. However, this is only possible as long as there is only one location in which thecustomer is entered. This function is not available for purchase orders.

- If the XML message does not contain the business partner number of the customer, you can use thenew BAdI /SCMB/BIF_MI_ITMBPRT to determine the customer location from the BuyerPartyID atitem level.The default coding of the BAdI determines the customer location if the customer back-end system isan SAP system. The IDoc of the SAP system does not contain a customer, but does contain the plantnumber at header level for the customer location. In SAP ICH the plant corresponds to a customerlocation.If you use a different back-end system, you must create your own BAdI implementation thatcalculates the customer location from the BuyerPartyID.

- If the XML message does not contain the business partner number of the buyer and you do not usethe BAdI, SAP ICH uses the ship-to location as the customer location. In this case you can thereforenot map deviating goods recipients.

Customer Determination

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 214

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The XML messages can transfer the customer at header level. If the XML message does not contain thecustomer, you must use the BAdI /SCMB/BIF_MI_ITMBPRT at item level to determine the customer aswell. This is relevant for an SAP back-end system that never sends the customer, for example. The defaultcoding of the BAdI /SCMB/BIF_MI_ITMBPRT reads the customer from the customer location.

Example: Packing by a Contract Packager (Contract Packaging)

In the service parts management scenario the customer orders products at the supplier. However, thesupplier is not to deliver the products directly to the customer, but is to send them to a contract packager(CP) who is to pack the products according to how the customer wants them. This process is mapped inthe service parts management scenario as follows:

- In the customer back-end system (SAP Enterprise Core Component 6.0 with activated service partsmanagement) the CP is mapped as a storage location MRP area.

- The plant and MRP area are transferred with the APO Core Interface to the SCM system where theyare mapped as locations with certain location types (1001 or 1007).

- The customer back-end system sends a purchase order IDoc to SAP ICH. The IDoc contains thefollowing data at item level:

- The plant from the SCM system as the business partner number of the customer

- The storage location MRP area as the ship-to location for the CP

3.10.7.5 Data in Release Processing (New)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, the following new data is available for release processing in the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH):

- Kanban IndicatorThe kanban indicator shows whether a release is a forecast delivery schedule in kanban processing.The kanban indicator is transferred to SAP ICH with the release. You can not create ASNs forkanban forecast delivery schedules in SAP ICH. For more information, see the release informationfor kanban processing.

- Purpose code and action codeBoth fields show whether a release is an original release or whether it replaces a preceding release.The purpose code corresponds to the EDI standard and is only relevant for the Service PartsPlanning business scenario, but not for standard release processing. The action code corresponds tothe SAP XML standard. In inbound message processing, SAP ICH maps the action code from the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 215

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

DelieveryScheduleInformation to the purpose code.

- Location AddressesIn release processing, there are tab pages with the addresses of the ship-from location, the customerlocation, and the ship-to location.

- Goods RecipientThe new Goods Recipient Details tab page displays data about the business partner if this is not thesame as the customer. The tab page is relevant for third-party order processing, for example.

- Contact personThe Contact Person tab page displays data about the contact persons that were transferred to SAPICH with the release.

- Shipping date/timeThe system takes the shipping date from the DeliveryScheduleNotification . If theDeliveryScheduleNotification does not contain a shipping date, SAP ICH can use the validationcheck REL_SHIPDATE_SCHEDULING to determine the shipping date by backwards schedulingstarting from the delivery date/time.

- Cumulative QuantitiesThe Cumulative Quantity tab page displays various cumulative quantities from release processing.

- Due Quantity of a Scheduling Agreement Release Schedule LineThe system calculates the due quantity using the algorithm for the due list for purchasing documents.For more information, see the release information for due schedule lines.

- Product Group TypeYou can select releases according to product group type.

- Entry locationThis field is only relevant for the Service Parts Planning business scenario.

- Lead TimeSAP ICH displays the lead time as the transportation duration of the means of transport that isassigned to the following transportation lane:

- If the ship-to location is the same as the customer location, the system uses the transportationlane between the ship-from location and the customer location.

- If the ship-to location is different to the customer location, the system uses the transportationlane between the ship-from location and the ship-to location (provided that it exists. Otherwiseit uses the transportation lane between the ship-from location and the customer location).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 216

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.7.6 Functions in Release Processing (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, the following new and enhanced functions are available for release processing in theSAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH):

- New XSLT MappingsAs has been the case up to now, SAP ICH receives releases with the DeliveryScheduleNotificationXML message, independent of the customer back-end system that sends the release. SAP NetWeaver2004s usage type Process Integration performs the necessary mapping of the release messageformat of the back-end system to the XML message DeliveryScheduleNotification. Until now, anXSLT mapping was available for transferring the scheduling agreement releases from an SAPstandard ERP system. This mapping maps the IDoc DELINS.DELFOR01 to aDeliveryScheduleNotification. As of Sap SCM 5.0, there is also an additional XSLT mapping fortransferring releases from SAP APO and from an SAP DIMP system. In the back-end system, youuse the following IDocs for releases:

- DELFOR.DELFOR02 (release generation in an SAP DIMP system)The IDoc is available as of SAP DIMP 4.71.

- DELINS.DELFOR02 (release generation in SAP APO)The IDoc is available as of SAP SCM 5.0.

Note that the transfer of releases from SAP APO to SAP ICH is only relevant for the Service PartsPlanning business scenario.

- JIT Delivery SchedulesUntil now, SAP ICH could process forecast delivery schedules only. As of SAP SCM 5.0, thetransfer of JIT delivery schedules is also possible. Forecast delivery schedules and JIT deliveryschedules are differentiated according to the release type that the release transfers to SAP ICH. Youcan use both forecast delivery schedules and JIT delivery schedules for a scheduling agreement item.

- Release ComparisonIn SAP SCM 4.1, the system compared two releases based on the delivery date/time. In SAP SCM5.0, you can set whether the system compares ASNs based on the delivery date/time or the shippingdate/time.You make this setting in Customizing for Release Processing in the Define Settings forRelease Processing IMG activity. (In SAP ICH 4.1, this IMG activity was called Set GR Status ofASN Items Based on Cumulative Received Quantity and was renamed for SAP SCM 5.0. In SAPSCM 4.1, the IMG activity was only available in Customizing for ASN Processing. For SAP SCM5.0, the IMG activity was moved to Customizing for Release Processing.

- NotesIn SAP SCM 5.0, you can create notes for a release on header level and on schedule line level, ascustomer and as supplier. If you create a note, the system automatically generates an alert (alert type7105).

- Release RejectionAs supplier, you can reject a release in release processing. The release receives the status Rejectedand the system generates an alert (alert type 7107). The system also cancels all scheduling agreementconfirmations that exist for the release. The rejection is not integrated with the customer back-endsystem.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 217

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Downloading in the Release OverviewUntil now, you could use the Download function (called Export in SAP SCM 4.1) to downloaddetails of an individual selected release in the release overview. As of SAP 5.0, you use this functionto download the list of releases in the release overview in a table format.

- Creation of an ASN in the Release DetailsUntil now, if you created an ASN for a schedule line in the release details, the system copied thewhole schedule line quantity into the ASN item. As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system copies the duequantity into the ASN. If the due quantity is zero, you cannot create an ASN in the due list forpurchasing documents and in the release details. For more information, see the release informationfor due schedule lines.

- Related ASNsUntil now, the Related ASNs function displayed all ASNs that you had created for a schedulingagreement item. As of SAP SCM 5.0, the system displays ASNs that SAP ICH has assigned to therelease using the algorithm for calculating due schedule lines. For more information, see the releaseinformation for due schedule lines.

- Scheduling Agreement ConfirmationsAs of SAP SCM 5.0, you, as supplier, can create scheduling agreement confirmations for ascheduling agreement in the SAP ICH Web user interface. You can use them to inform customersabout anticipated delivery quantities and delivery dates/times. For more information, see the releaseinformation for scheduling agreement confirmations and extended confirmation management.

- Confirmation ControlIn Customizing for Release Processing, you can control whether scheduling agreementconfirmations or ASNs are obligatory, forbidden, or optional (default setting) for a schedulingagreement release. For more information, see the release information for confirmation control.

- New Validation ChecksVarious new validation checks that support the new processes are available in the validationframework. Check the standard validation profile for the validation of inbound releases.

3.10.7.7 Receipts/Requirements List (New)

Use

The receipts/requirements list is a new screen in the Web user interface in SAP ICH 5.0 that displaysreceipts (ASNs, purchase order confirmations, and scheduling agreement confirmations) and requirements(purchase orders and scheduling agreement releases).

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 218

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.7.8 Extended Confirmation Management (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, extended confirmation management (ECM) is available in the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH). ECM updates the status of scheduling agreement confirmations andpurchase order confirmations in SAP ICH if the base demands (releases or purchase orders) change or ifthe supplier sends ASNs for these demands. ECM thereby helps the supplier to create confirmations inSAP ICH that are as up-to-date as possible and that reflect a changed demand situation and the deliveryprogress.

ECM processes both scheduling agreement confirmations and purchase order confirmations to a detaileddegree at request schedule line level. For purchase order confirmations, here lies the main difference toconfirmation processing in purchase order collaboration: In purchase order collaboration, purchase orderconfirmations only refer to one item according to international message standard. For more detailedprocessing of confirmations at request schedule line level, ECM links purchase order confirmations withrequest schedule lines. However, this link only affects SAP ICH internal processing and display ofpurchase order confirmations. The message exchange between the customer back-end system and thesupplier back-end system in purchase order collaboration is not affected. On the other hand, schedulingagreement confirmations, available in SAP ICH release processing as of SAP SCM 5.0, always refer toone specific request schedule line by ICH design. During message exchange, confirmations here are alsoonly linked to the request schedule lines at scheduling agreement item level.

ECM extends the classic confirmation processing in release processing and purchase order collaboration.These are the central functions of ECM that enable a more transparent and realistic confirmationprocessing:

- The customer can use confirmation requests to force the supplier to create confirmations for specificrequest schedule lines. In supplier delivery performance rating (only available in Service PartsPlanning), the customer can monitor the delivery reliability of the supplier on the basis ofconfirmation requests.

- ECM determines the delivery progress for confirmations by assigning ASN quantities to theconfirmations with a specific algorithm and then updating the confirmation status on the basis of thisassignment as follows:

- Current confirmations receive the status Partially Shipped or Shipped depending on theassigned ASN quantity.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 219

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Confirmations in the past that are not covered by ASNs receive the status Closed.For closed confirmations, ECM generates confirmation requests that the supplier must respondto with new confirmations.

- ECM closes confirmations for changed schedule lines automatically when a new release or achanged purchase order arrives, and marks the confirmation with the corresponding Closed status.

- On the SAP ICH Web user interface the supplier can create scheduling agreement and purchaseorder confirmations referring to the request schedule line in a specific confirmation screen. (Theconfirmation screen is especially relevant for purchase order confirmations since the supplier canonly create purchase order confirmations at item level on the purchase order collaboration Web UI).For the supplier, the confirmation screen acts as an inbox and a worklist of request schedule lines forwhich the customer expects confirmations by confirmation requests.

- If the supplier sends a purchase order with confirmation schedule lines via EDI to SAP ICH, SAPICH automatically assigns each confirmation schedule line to exactly one request schedule line.

You make the settings for ECM in Customizing for Inventory Collaboration Hub under SupplierCollaboration --> Enhanced Confirmation Management (ECM) and Location ProductConfirmations.

3.10.7.9 Scheduling Agreement Confirmations (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the supplier can create scheduling agreement confirmations for schedule lines of thecurrent release in release processing of the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH). The supplieruses scheduling agreement confirmations to inform the customer about when he or she can deliver whichquantities. The customer sees publishes scheduling agreement confirmations in SAP ICH in the releasedetails and as receipt- in the receipts/requirements list. The customer can plan in more detail on the basisof scheduling agreement confirmations. In the time interval between the release date and the delivery datenotified by an advanced shipping notification (ASN), the customer receives additional information aboutexpected deliveries.

The supplier uses the new Confirmations tab page in the release details to create scheduling agreementconfirmations. The supplier can create one or more scheduling agreement confirmations for a scheduleline. The supplier uses several scheduling agreement confirmations if he or she does not want to deliverthe quantity requested by the customer in the release schedule line all on one date, but rather divided overseveral dates. The supplier can create a note for a confirmation. He or she can also create a scheduling

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 220

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

agreement confirmation that acts purely as a note. The confirmed quantity of such a note-onlyconfirmation is zero. The supplier can use a note-only confirmation to inform the customer about why heor she currently cannot deliver, for example.

In SAP ICH, a scheduling agreement confirmation is a stand-alone business object that refers to a specificrelease schedule line. It is not a part of the release itself. A scheduling agreement confirmation is differentto a purchase order confirmation since a purchase order confirmation is a part of the purchase order andbelongs to a purchase order item in purchase order collaboration.

Send Scheduling Agreement Confirmations to SAP APO (Service Parts Management)

In the service parts management scenario, the customer generates scheduling agreement releases incollaborative management of scheduling agreement releases (CMDS) in SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization (SAP APO) and sends the releases to SAP ICH. The supplier can send schedulingagreement releases that he or she creates in SAP ICH to CMDS in SAP APO (possible as of SAP APO5.0). SAP ICH uses the DeliveryScheduleConfirmation XML message to send the scheduling agreementconfirmations. SAP ICH sends the XML message to SAP NetWeaver 2004s usage type ProcessIntegration. SAP NetWeaver maps the XML message to the IDoc DELCONF.DELFOR01 and sends theIDoc to SAP APO. A corresponding XSLT mapping is available.

Extended Confirmation Management

As of SAP SCM 5.0, extended confirmation management (ECM) is available in SAP ICH. ECM updatesthe status of scheduling agreement confirmations and purchase order confirmations in SAP ICH if thebase demands (releases or purchase orders) change or if the supplier sends ASNs for these demands. ECMthereby helps the supplier to create confirmations in SAP ICH that are as up-to-date as possible and thatreflect a changed demand situation and the delivery progress. A customer can also use confirmationrequests in ECM to force a supplier to create confirmations. For more information, see the releaseinformation for extended confirmation management.

3.10.7.10 Time Zones in Supplier Collaboration (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the Web user interface (Web UI) of the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAPICH) displays time data referring to the following time zones:

- Time data that refers to a location is shown in the time zones of the relevant location. Example: theshipping date/time in an ASN is displayed in the time zone of the ship-from location. The deliverydate/time is displayed in the time zone of the customer location or of the goods recipient.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 221

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Time data that does not refer directly to a location or to a business partner is displayed in the timezone of the user that is logged onto the system. This includes, for example, the time at which thestock status or the ASN in the SMI monitor was last updated.

3.10.8 SCM-ICH-PO Purchase Order


Use


- Customer

- Supplier

- Customer location


- Product




There is also confirmation control for purchase orders in an SAP back-end system. However, you cannotuse the IDoc ORDERS05 to transfer the settings for confirmation control in standard purchase order

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 222

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

collaboration from an SAP back-end system to SAP ICH. You must therefore ensure that you maintainsettings in the SAP back-end system and in SAP ICH consistently.


Use








- Creating ASNsIf the supplier creates an ASN for a purchase order delivery schedule line or for a release scheduleline in the due list for purchasing documents, in purchase order collaboration or in releaseprocessing, SAP ICH automatically proposes the due quantity as the ASN quantity. If the duequantity is zero, the supplier cannot create an ASN in these applications.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 223

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




- Scheduling Agreement Release Due Within Procurement Time (alert type 7102) and PurchaseOrder Due Within Procurement Time (alert type 7104): The release/purchase order containsdue schedule lines in the future that occur within the procurement time.



Use









______________________________________________________________SAP AG 224

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.8.4 Confirmation Approval (New)

Use

The quantities and dates/times that a supplier specifies in the confirmation schedule lines of a purchaseorder item can differ from the quantities and dates/times that the customer had entered in the requestschedule line. A supplier can also enter a component consumption that differs from the componentconsumption planned by the customer in a subcontract order in the component list for a confirmationschedule line of a component. In addition, the supplier can add new components.

As of SCM 5.0, an approval process is available to the customer in SAP ICH purchase order collaborationthat the customer can use to approve or reject the confirmation data of the supplier. SAP ICH canautomatically grant the approval. You can, however, also configure that the customer must manuallycheck the deviating confirmation data in the SAP ICH Web UI, and approve or reject it there. The systemautomatically accepts corresponding confirmation data.

If the customer has approved all confirmation schedule lines or components, SAP ICH transfers theconfirmation schedule lines and components into the purchase order as request schedule lines. SAP ICHtransfers the approved purchase order with a ReplenishmentOrderNotification XML message to thecustomer back-end system. The customer back-end system copies the changes made in SAP ICH into thepurchase order and sends the updated purchase order back to SAP ICH byReplenishmentOrderNotification.

New alert types in SAP ICH notify the customer when manual approval is necessary and notify thesupplier when the customer has rejected a confirmation. Notes at schedule line level and component levelenable communication between customer and supplier in the purchase order, for example about the reasonfor a rejection.

You make the settings for the approval procedure in Customizing for Purchase Orders. You can makethe settings for confirmation schedule lines and component consumption separately and depending oncustomer, supplier, and product.

If you do not use the approval process, the supplier can change the confirmation data in the purchase orderHowever, the request data in the purchase orders remains unchanged.

Integration with an SAP Back-End System

We deliver a standard XSLT mapping for the integration of SAP ICH with SAP ECC 6.0. SAPNetWeaver 2004s usage type Process Integration (PI) maps the ReplenishmentOrderNotification that SAPICH sends to the customer back-end system to the IDoc PORDCH.PORDCH02. The customer back-endsystem sends the updated purchase order with the IDoc PORDCR1.PORDCR102 to SAP ICH. PI maps

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 225

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

the IDoc to a ReplenishmentOrderNotification and sends the ReplenishmentOrderNotification to SAPICH.

3.10.8.5 Changeability of Purchase Order Items (New)

Use

In SAP 4.1, the purchase order status and item status that a purchase order item could have in order to bechanged on the Web UI for the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH) was fixed in purchase ordercollaboration and purchase orders in the SMI scenario. If necessary, you used the methodORDER_CHANGEABILITY of the BAdI /SAC/ORDER to make your own settings for status-dependentchangeability.

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can make the settings in Customizing for the Inventory Collaboration Hubunder Purchase Orders -> Changeability of Purchase Order Items on the Web UI. You can set thechangeability dependent on the following purchase order statuses:

- Distribution status

- Item status

- Change Distribution StatusThis is only relevant if the customer uses the approval process in purchase order collaboration.

You can use different settings for different customer-supplier combinations.

The BAdI method ORDER_CHANGEABILITY is still available.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 226

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.8.6 Update of Goods Receipt Data (Enhanced)

Use

Up to now, there was only goods receipt information in purchase order collaboration purchase orders inthe SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH): SAP ICH showed the goods receipt quantity for arequest schedule line that the customer transferred to SAP ICH in a changed purchase order. In SMIpurchase orders there was no data about the goods receipt. As of SAP SCM 5.0, SAP ICH calculates theopen quantity for request schedule lines and sets the item status Partially Delivered or Finally Delivereddepending on the open quantity for items. SAP ICH considers delivery tolerances for purchase order itemsin purchase order collaboration.

Open Quantity

The open quantity is the quantity of the request schedule line that the supplier has not yet delivered. As ofSAP SCM 5.0, there are special validation checks for calculating the open quantity of a request purchaseorder schedule line for purchase orders in purchase order collaboration and for SMI purchase orders. Thevalidation checks calculate the open quantity with the following data alternatively:

- Delivery quantity from ASN-confirmed schedule line(PO_OPENQUAN_FROM_ASNQUAN)

- Goods receipt quantity from ASN-confirmed schedule line(PO_OPENQUAN_FROM_ASNGRQUAN)

- Goods receipt quantity from request schedule line(PO_OPENQUAN_FROM_POGRQUAN)This validation check is active in purchase order collaboration in the standard delivery. Thisvalidation check is not relevant for SMI purchase orders.

Underdelivery and Overdelivery Tolerances in Purchase Order Collaboration

In purchase order collaboration, the ReplenishmentOrderNotification XML message can transferunderdelivery and overdelivery tolerances to SAP ICH. If the ReplenishmentOrderNotification does notcontain delivery tolerances (because the back-end system message cannot transfer delivery tolerances, forexample), purchase order collaboration uses the delivery tolerances from the contract in SAP ICH, fromthe purchasing info record in SAP ICH, or from the location product master in SAP ICH. (The sequencereflects the priorities of the sources.)

Note that for purchase order collaboration, the transfer of delivery tolerances from an SAP back-endsystem is only possible as of SAP ECC 6.0 and with the following IDocs:

- PORDCR1.PORDCR102

- ORDNTF.ORDINT01The IDoc ORDNTF.ORDINT01 is only relevant for the SAP customer back-end system in theservice parts management scenarios (SAP ECC 6.0 with active service parts management). The IDoconly transfers delivery tolerances at item level, not at header level.

Delivery tolerances are not relevant for SMI purchase orders.

Item Status for Partial and Final Delivery

In purchase order collaboration, SAP ICH compares the total open quantity of an item with the absoluteunderdelivery tolerance of the item. (The absolute underdelivery tolerance is the percentage of the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 227

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

underdelivery tolerance applied to the request quantity.) If the open quantity is less than the underdeliverytolerance, SAP ICH sets the status Finally Delivered for the item (if the customer has not transferred thedelivery completed indicator to SAP ICH for the item in purchase order collaboration). If the openquantity is greater than the absolute underdelivery tolerance, SAP ICH sets the Partially Delivered statusfor the item. SAP ICH generates alerts if the underdelivery and overdelivery tolerances are violated.

For SMI purchase orders, SAP ICH compares the open quantity with the request quantity. If the openquantity is less than the request quantity, SAP ICH sets the item status to Partially Delivered, otherwise itsets it to Finally Delivered.

3.10.8.7 Notes (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can create notes on the SAP ICH Web user interface in the purchase orderdetails of purchase order collaboration and of the SMI purchase orders. Notes are possible for thefollowing purchase order elements:

- Purchase order header

- Purchase order item

- Purchase order schedule line

- Component requirement (only relevant for subcontract orders in purchase order collaboration)

SAP ICH automatically generates an alert when you create a note. In the purchase order, notes enablecommunication between customer and supplier, for example about why the supplier delivers at a differentdate/time or why the customer rejects a confirmation schedule line. Notes at header and item level are alsointegrated in the XML messages for purchase orders (ReplenishmentOrderNotifications andReplenishmentOrderConfirmations). However, an SAP customer back-end system cannot take the notes.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 228

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.8.8 Data in Purchase Order Collaboration (New)

Use

New Fields

In SAP SCM 5.0 there are various new fields in the purchase order details on the Web user interface ofSAP ICH. The XML messages for purchase orders were enhanced accordingly.

You can find the following new data at header level:

- Administrative data

- Terms of payment with cash discount data

- Incoterms

- Underdelivery and overdelivery tolerancesFor more information, see the release information about updating the GR data in purchase ordercollaboration.

- Supplier priorities

- Customer contact person and supplier contact personIf the customer uses an SAP back-end system, the telephone number of the buyer from thepurchasing organization is mapped to the customer contact person. The sales representative on theCommunication tab page in the purchase order header is mapped to the supplier contact person.

- SellerThe seller of a product can be different from the supplier who actually delivers the product. TheSeller tab page shows the data of the business partner who sells the product (business partnernumber and address). If the customer uses an SAP back-end system, the tab page shows the supplierof the Ordering Address partner role from the purchase order.

You find the following data at item level:

- Prices

- Incoterms

- Underdelivery and overdelivery tolerances at header and item level

- Supplier priorities

- Bill-To party

- Business partner number of the goods recipient

- Ship-to LocationThis location specifies the location to which the supplier is to send the products. The ship-to locationcan differ from the customer location. If the purchase order does not transfer a ship-to location forthe purchase order item (location ID and/or address), SAP ICH determines the ship-to location usingthe validation check PO_GR_LOCATION_ASSIGN. As the ship-to location, SAP ICH assigns thelocation in which the Goods Recipient business partner is entered to the purchase order item.However, this assignment is only possible if only one location is assigned to the Goods Recipientbusiness partner in SAP ICH.

- Unloading point of the ship-to location

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 229

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Change number of the product

- Confirmation ControlTwo fields show whether confirmations or ASNs are forbidden, mandatory, or optional for an item.For more information, see the release information for confirmation control.

- Purpose code and action codeBoth fields show how SAP ICH has processed a purchase order item in an inbound purchase order.The purpose code corresponds to the EDI standard and is only relevant for the Service PartsPlanning business scenario, but not for standard purchase order collaboration. The action codecorresponds to the SAP XML standard. In inbound message processing, SAP ICH maps the actioncode from the ReplenishmentOrderNotification to the purpose code.

Order Unit

In the SAP customer back-end system, you can specify purchase order quantities in the order unit. Ininbound message processing, SAP ICH automatically converts the order unit into the base unit ofmeasure. In SAP ICH purchase order collaboration, the supplier creates confirmed quantities in the baseunit of measure. When publishing the purchase order, SAP ICH converts the purchase order quantity backinto the order unit in outbound message processing.

3.10.8.9 Functions in Purchase Order Collaboration (New and Changed)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0 the following functions are new or changed in SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAPICH) purchase order collaboration:

- Rejection of a purchase order or purchase order item (new)If the supplier cannot fulfill a purchase order or individual purchase order items, he or she can rejectthe purchase order or purchase order items in the purchase order details. All items of the purchaseorder or the purchase order item receive the item status Rejected. SAP ICH generates alerts toinform the customer about the rejection. The rejection is not integrated with an SAP customerback-end system.

- Confirmation Control (new)In Customizing for Purchase Orders, you can control whether confirmations or ASNs are obligatory,forbidden, or optional (default setting) for a purchase order item. You make the settings forconfirmations and ASNs separately. In purchase order collaboration, the supplier can only create aconfirmation or an ASN for an item if confirmation control allows it.The XML message ReplenishmentOrderConfirmation contains the relevant fields and can thus alsotransfer the settings from the customer back-end system, provided that the message format of theback-end system is suitable. It is not possible to transfer the settings for confirmation control from an

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 230

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

SAP customer back-end system.

- Validation checks (new)As of SAP SCM 5.0, there are also validation checks for purchase orders in the ValidationFramework. You can use these validation checks to ensure that SAP ICH only receives and sendsvalid purchase orders and purchase order confirmations. Many validation checks determine missingdata that is important for the processing of purchase orders. These include validation checks thatdetermine the open quantity for a request schedule line, or the ship-to location or means of transportfor an item, for example. Check the standard validation profile for the validation of purchase orders.For more information about the open quantity, see the release information about updating the GRdata in purchase order collaboration.

- Create an ASN (changed)Until now, if you created an ASN for a purchase order schedule line in the purchase order details,SAP ICH copied the whole schedule line quantity into the ASN item. As of SAP SCM 5.0, SAP ICHonly copies the due quantity into the ASN. The due quantity is the schedule line quantity that has noassigned ASN quantity. If the due quantity is zero, you cannot create an ASN in the due list forpurchasing documents and in the purchase order details. For more information, see the releaseinformation for due schedule lines.

- Approval process (new)You use this process if you, as customer, put supplier confirmation data (confirmation schedule linesand component requirements) through an approval process in SAP ICH purchase ordercollaboration, and want to transfer the confirmation data into the purchase order as request data inthe case of approval. For more information, see the release information for the approval process.

- Closing purchase orders (changed)Up to now you could use the report /SCA/SET_PO_CLOSED to close purchase order items. Youcan now also select the purchase order items to be closed according to the header status of thepurchase order and according to the item status.

3.10.8.10 Processes and Process Types in Purchase Order Collaboration(Changed)

Use

The following processes were renamed in SAP SCM 5.0:

- CONF_PUBLISH to ORDERCONF_PUBLISH

- CONF_SAVE to ORDERCONF_SAVE

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 231

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

In addition, you now use the process type ICH (Supplier Collaboration) instead of the process type CPFBfor purchase orders with confirmation data (ReplenishmentOrderConfirmations) that the supplier sendsfrom his or her back-end system to SAP ICH via EDI.

If necessary, adjust your process- and process type-dependent BAdI implementations and your settings inCustomizing for Process Types for Inbound Messages accordingly.

3.10.8.11 Scheduling in Purchase Orders (Changed)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, if a schedule line contains only the shipping date/time or only the delivery date/time,SAP ICH determines the missing date/time automatically using the validation check PO_SCHEDULE. Todo so, SAP ICH uses the receiving calendar of the ship-to location, the transportation duration of themeans of transport of the item, and the shipping calendar of the ship-from location. The validation checkis relevant for purchase order collaboration and for SMI purchase orders, and is active in the standardsystem. The BAdI /SCA/SCHEDULE is available for modifying the scheduling logic.

3.10.8.12 Sending Purchase Orders to the Customer Back-End System(Changed)

Use

Up to now, the customer used the report /SCA/ICH_ORDER_SEND in the SCM system to transferpurchase orders that the supplier had released in SAP ICH from SAP ICH to the customer back-endsystem. As of SAP SCM 5.0, the report /SCA/ORDER_SEND and the following process are obsolete insupplier collaboration (purchase order collaboration and SMI with purchase orders):

1. The supplier releases the purchase order in the SAP ICH Web UI.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 232

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

2. The customer transfers the purchase order to the customer back-end system (and to the supplierback-end system in the SMI scenario).

This process has been replaced by the following process:

3. The supplier publishes the purchase order in the SAP ICH Web UI. This function is available in theWeb UI at header level. SAP ICH automatically publishes purchase orders that the supplier sendsfrom his or her back-end system to SAP ICH.

4. SAP ICH sends the purchase order to the customer back-end system (and to the supplier back-endsystem in the SMI scenario). To do so, SAP ICH uses the following PPF action profiles and actionsof the application /SCA/ICH:

- In purchase order collaboration, SAP ICH uses the action /SCA/BOL_ORD_CONF_PUBLISHof the application profile /SCA/BOL_ORDER for the purchase order with the confirmationdata (ReplenishmentOrderConfirmation).

- In the scenario SMI with Purchase Orders, SAP ICH uses the actions/SCA/BOL_VGOR_PUBLISH_CUST and /SCA/BOL_VGOR_PUBLISH_SUPP of the actionprofile /SCA/BOL_ORDER_VGOR to send the purchase orders to the customer back-endsystem (VendorGeneratedOrderNotification) and to the supplier back-end system(<object2>ReplenishmentOrderNotification).

The statuses Customer Send Status and Supplier Send Status that belonged to the old process are nowobsolete.

The report is still used in customer collaboration.

3.10.8.13 Web User Interface for Purchase Orders (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, you now call the Web UIs for purchase order collaboration and SMI purchase ordersseparately under different menu entries (Purchase Order Collaboration or Purchase Orders (SMI)) inthe Web application menu of SAP ICH. An overview, a details view, and a history are available in themenus as follows:

- The overview displays the list of purchase orders that you have selected according to specificcriteria. In the standard system, the overview can display a maximum of 200 purchase orders. Ifthere are more than 200 purchase orders for the selection criteria in the system, the overviewdisplays a message. You can set the user-specific maximum number in the user settings (transactionSU01) using the SET/GET parameter /SCA/DM_ORD_MAXROW.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 233

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- The details display an individual purchase order. The details are structured according to thethree-level purchase order structure in the three screen sections for the header, item, and scheduleline data. In purchase order collaboration you can also see component requirements of a scheduleline at schedule line level for a subcontract order.

- In the history, you can see old versions of a purchase order.

For each screen there is a supplier, a customer, and a goods recipient view with business partner specificfunctions for displaying and processing purchase orders. The goods recipient view is only ever fordisplaying.

For SMI purchase orders there is still a screen for the supplier to create purchase orders.

3.10.8.14 Validation Checks for Purchase Orders (New)

Use

In the Validation Framework as of SAP SCM 5.0, there are also validation checks for purchase orders insupplier collaboration and for SMI purchase orders. You can use these validation checks to ensure thatSAP ICH only receives and sends valid purchase orders or - in purchase order collaboration - purchaseorder confirmations. Many validation checks determine missing data that is important for the processingof purchase orders. These include validation checks that determine the open quantity for a requestschedule line, or the ship-to location or means of transport for an item, for example. Check the standardvalidation profile for the validation of purchase orders.

For more information about the standard validation profiles, see the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hubcomponent under Validation of Purchase Orders in the SMI Scenario and Validation of Purchase Ordersin Purchase Order Collaboration.

For more information about the open quantity, see the release information about updating the GR data inpurchase order collaboration.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 234

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Use












- Business partner Goods RecipientThe goods recipient (called ProductRecipientParty in the XML message) is at header or item level,depending on the message type.




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 235

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- ASN processing
















______________________________________________________________SAP AG 236

SAP-System______________________________________________________________







Use



Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, extended confirmation management (ECM) is available in the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH). ECM updates the status of scheduling agreement confirmations and

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 237

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

purchase order confirmations in SAP ICH if the base demands (releases or purchase orders) change or ifthe supplier sends ASNs for these demands. ECM thereby helps the supplier to create confirmations inSAP ICH that are as up-to-date as possible and that reflect a changed demand situation and the deliveryprogress.











______________________________________________________________SAP AG 238

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Use




3.10.9 SCM-ICH-ASN Advanced Shipping Notification

3.10.9.1 Data in ASN Processing (New)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, the following new data is available for advanced shipping notification (ASN)processing in the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH):

- Goods RecipientThe new Goods Recipient Details tab page displays data about the business partner if this is not thesame as the customer. The tab page is relevant for third-party order processing, for example.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 239

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Ship-To Location and Customer LocationThe new Ship-To Location Details tab page displays data about the location that receives theproducts (delivery address or location ID). The system takes the data from the purchase order orfrom the release. You cannot enter data in ASN processing manually. The customer location displaysdata about the location that ordered the products.

- Bill to partyYou can specify a bill-to party in the ASN. If you create an ASN for a scheduling agreement releaseor for a purchase order, the system takes the bill-to party from the scheduling agreement release orfrom the purchase order.

- Shipping detailsThe Shipping Details tab page contains the carrier, the standard carrier alpha code, and the freightinvoice number.

- Purpose code and action codeThese fields are only relevant for ASNs that the supplier send to SAP ICH from his back-end systemvia EDI. They display which action SAP ICH is to perform for an inbound ASN (create, change, ordelete). The action code corresponds to the SAP XML standard and is transferred to SAP ICH in theASN. The purpose code corresponds to the EDI standard. In inbound message processing, SAP ICHmaps the action code to the purpose code.

3.10.9.2 External ASN Validation in Service Parts Management (New)

Use

In the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH), the validation framework was previously availablefor the validation of advanced shipping notifications (ASN). You could use validation to ensure that thesupplier only published valid ASNs in SAP ICH. As of SAP ICH 5.0, in the service parts managementscenario you send an ASN published by the supplier in SAP ICH to an external system for an additionalvalidation after the internal validation. In the service parts management scenario, the external system isthe back-end system of the customer (SAP ECC 6.0 with activated service parts management). Theexternal system checks the ASN and returns the ASN with the validation result to SAP ICH. (In theservice parts management scenarios, ASNs that the supplier sends by EDI firstly go to the customerback-end system where they are validated and then forwarded to SAP ICH with the validation results.)

You use the new XML message DeliveryInformation to transfer the ASN and the validation result fromthe external system to SAP ICH. (However, you still send the ASN with a DeliveryScheduleNotificationfrom SAP ICH to an external system as you did previously). With the DeliveryInformation, you transferexceptions and the exception status, which informs SAP ICH whether the external validation accepted or

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 240

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

rejected the ASN. In the case of a rejection, the supplier must correct the ASN in SAP ICH.

In the standard system, internal validation is also set in SAP ICH 5.0. In Customizing for ASN Processingunder Define Validation Scenarios, you can define whether you want to use an external validation inaddition to the internal validation, depending on customer and supplier. If you set external validation, thesystem includes the fields that are only relevant for scenarios with external validation in the Web UI ofSAP ICH (such as exception status, inbound delivery status, and original system).

In the standard system, the supplier can change ASNs that have the status Published and that wereaccepted by external validation. In the IMG activity Define and Assign Display Profiles, you can definewhether a supplier can display ASNs with the status Published in the Web UI of SAP ICH, but cannotchange them. You use this setting in a service parts management scenario if a supplier is to send ASNs viaEDI from his or her back-end system, but is not to create or change them manually in SAP ICH.

3.10.9.3 Functions in ASN Processing (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP SCM 5.0, the following new and enhanced functions are available for advanced shippingnotification (ASN) processing in the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH):

- Integration with SAP ECC 6.0If you use SAP ECC 6.0 as the customer back-end system, you use the IDoc DELVRY05 to integrateASNs with SAP ICH (not relevant for service parts management). We deliver standard XSLTmappings. For earlier releases, continue to use the IDoc DELVRY03 and the relevant XSLTmappings.

- Downloading in the ASN OverviewUntil now, you could use the Download function (called Export in SAP ICH 4.1) to downloaddetails of an individually selected ASN in the ASN overview. As of SAP SCM 5.0, you use thisfunction to download the list of ASNs in the ASN overview in a table format.

- New View for Item DetailsAs standard, the system displays a table row with item data for each item in the ASN details. Withthe new Show Details function, you can change to a compact overview display for a selected item(form box): The system shows a tab page with the item data. If you select a different item, thesystem displays the data of this item in the overview. If you have selected several items and thendeselect one of them, the system displays the data for the item with the smallest item number in thetab page.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 241

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Serial Number MaintenanceYou can use the Show Details function, with which you can show item details, to also show a tabpage for the maintenance of serial numbers. For more information, see the release information forserial numbers.

- Validation messagesThe new Validation Messages tab page displays messages that the system generates during ASNvalidation. The system displays the first message of each validation log.

- ASN HistoryIn ASN processing in SAP SCM 4.1, you could display who had changed a field in an ASN andwhen via Audit Trail. In SAP SCM 5.0, the function Audit Trail in the Web UI is replaced by theASN History function. In the ASN history, you can call complete previous versions of an ASN. Thereports Close ASNs (/SCA/DLV_CLOSE) and Delete ASNs (/SCA/DLV_DELETE) also close ordelete all historical versions of an ASN that meets the selection criteria.You can use the change history to trace goods receipts, for example. The change history is alsorelevant if you have configured a validation scenario in which the supplier can also change publishedASNs. For more information, see the release information for <Object>external validation<Object>.

- SelectionThe following new selection criteria are available in the ASN overview:

- Ship-to Location

- Shipping date (as interval)

- Internal ASN number (the ASN number from the customer back-end system, only relevant forexternal validation)

- Tracking number

- Packing list

- Business partner number of the goods recipient

- Planner

- Validation statusThe field displays various combinations of validation status of the ASN header and the ASNitem, and is relevant for the ICH internal validation. (However, errors from the externalvalidation influence the validation status of the internal validation.)

- Approval StatusThe approval status is only relevant for external validation. For more information, see therelease information for <Object>external validation<Object>.

- Inbound delivery statusThe inbound delivery status is only relevant in a business scenario for service partsmanagement (when using external validation and the XML message DeliveryInformation).

Some of the new selection criteria are also available in the ASN details. You can now enter thedelivery date, which was previously already a selection criterion, as an interval.

- Maximum Number of ASNs in OverviewThe overview displays the list of ASNs that you have selected according to specific criteria. In thestandard system, the overview can display a maximum of 200 ASNs. If there are more than 200ASNs for the selection criteria in the system, the overview displays a message. You can set the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 242

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

user-specific maximum number in the user settings (transaction SU01) using the SET/GETparameter /SCA/DM_DLV_MAXROW.

- New Validation ChecksVarious new validation checks that support the new processes are available in the validationframework. Check the standard validation profile for the validation of ASNs.

3.10.9.4 Packaging Specification (Enhanced)

Use

You use packaging specifications (PS) for automatic packing. As of SAP SCM 5.0, the following newfunctions and data exist for packaging specifications:

- Element groupWhen you save a PS, the system automatically generates an element group for the elements at apackaging specification level. The element group contains the elements of the PS level. Elementgroups simplify the maintenance of PS levels: Instead of manually entering the PS elements of a PSlevel individually in PS maintenance, you can assign an existing element group and thus theelements of this group to the PS level. To do so, you enter the element group in the PS level andchoose Assign Element Group.If the system creates an element group, it automatically assigns a number from the number range forelement groups to the element group. You still define number range intervals in Customizing forSCM Basis under Packing -> Packaging Specification -> Define Number Range forPackaging Specification. You define which number range the system uses for element groupsunder SCM Basis -> Packing -> Packaging Specification -> Define General PackagingSpecification Parameters.

- Packaging specification versionsIn SAP SCM 4.1 there could only be one PS with one of the following statuses in the system:

- New

- Active

- InactiveIf you wanted to change a PS, you had to firstly deactivate it. For the duration of the reactivation, noPS was active in the system and therefore no useable PS was available under the PS ID.As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can create a second inactive version of an active PS with the same PS IDand make the required changes to the inactive version. As you do so, the original version remains

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 243

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

active and can continue to be used for automatic packing. When you activate the second version, thesystem sets the status Active for this version and deletes the old one. An active version always hasthe PS change number 1, and a new version has the PS change number 2. You can only changepackaging specifications with the PS change number 2.The following new functions are available in the PS details:

- With the Activate function you activate a new or inactive PS. The PS acquires the<Object>Active status.

- With the Deactivate function you deactivate an active version. The PS acquires the<Object>Inactive status.

- With the Create 2nd Version function you create a second, inactive version of the PS with thesame PS ID which you can then edit.

- New fields for the PS levelThere are the following new fields for the PS level:

- Fields for the dimensions of the main packaging material (height, length, width, and unit ofmeasure)The fields display the data from the product master of the main packaging material. You cannotchange the data in the PS level.

- HU creation indicatorYou set this indicator for a PS level if you want the system to automatically generate an HU atautomatic packing. The system generates the HU for the PS level element that is marked as themain packaging material in the HU-Relevant field, as in SAP SCM 4.1

- Tab page with administration dataIn the PS details there is now a tab page with administration data that shows who created, changed,or activated a PS and when.

- PS ID in ASN detailsUntil now, the system displayed the PS ID in the item row in the ASN details. You now find the PSID in the item details that you call for a selected item via Show Details.

Structural Changes in the Implementation Guide (IMG)

Until now you could call the IMG activities for handling units and packaging specifications inCustomizing for the Inventory Collaboration Hub under Supplier Collaboration -> ASN Processing-> Packing. You now find the IMG activities in Customizing for SCM Basis under Packing.

When editing the IMG activities, note that the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub does not support thefollowing objects and configuration possibilities for packaging specifications and that the correspondingIMG activities are thus not relevant for packing in the SAP ICH Web UI:

- Work steps

- Level sets

- Documents

- Packaging specification determination with condition technique

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 244

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Use


- Customer

- Supplier

- Customer location


- Product






Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 245

SAP-System______________________________________________________________








- Creating ASNsIf the supplier creates an ASN for a purchase order delivery schedule line or for a release scheduleline in the due list for purchasing documents, in purchase order collaboration or in releaseprocessing, SAP ICH automatically proposes the due quantity as the ASN quantity. If the duequantity is zero, the supplier cannot create an ASN in these applications.




- Scheduling Agreement Release Due Within Procurement Time (alert type 7102) and Purchase

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 246

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Order Due Within Procurement Time (alert type 7104): The release/purchase order containsdue schedule lines in the future that occur within the procurement time.



Use









______________________________________________________________SAP AG 247

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Use
















- ASN processing

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 248

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

















______________________________________________________________SAP AG 249

SAP-System______________________________________________________________






Use


3.10.9.10 Serial Numbers (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can manually assign serial numbers to the products of an ASN item in the Webuser interface (Web UI) of ASN processing. You can use a serial number to differentiate an individualpiece from the other pieces of an item. On the packing screen, you can pack the products taking the serialnumbers into account.

Serial numbers are also integrated at item level and at HU level in the following XML messages:

- DespatchedDeliveryNotification

- DeliveryInformation

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 250

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- ReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification

You can thus integrate serial numbers with the back-end system in advanced shipping notification (ASN)processes. For example, the supplier can transfer serial numbers from his or her back-end system to SAPICH in the returns instruction (ReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification) for the RMAs in returnsprocessing. (RMA stands for Returns Material Authorization. An RMA is an approval that allows acustomer to return products to the supplier, and is identified by an RMA number.) In returns ASNprocessing, the customer can pack the products to be returned taking account of the serial numbers.

Note that returns processing and the XML messages DeliveryInformation andReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification are only relevant for the business scenarios of service partsmanagement (back-end system SAP Enterprise Core Component 6.0 with activated service partsmanagement). For more information, see the release information for release processing.


Use




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 251

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.10 SCM-ICH-RET Returns


Use










Use


As of SAP SCM 5.0, in SAP ICH you can map procurement processes in which the supplier delivers theproducts to a different location than the customer location or to another address than the customer

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 252

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

address. You can define the recipient of the products in SAP ICH and in the XML messages with thefollowing data alternatively:














- ASN processing








______________________________________________________________SAP AG 253

SAP-System______________________________________________________________














______________________________________________________________SAP AG 254

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.10.3 Returns in Service Parts Management (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, customers and suppliers can process returns as part of the Service Parts ExecutionBusiness scenario with the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH). The process starts with receiptof the return delivery instruction in SAP ICH, which contains one or more RMAs (return materialauthorizations). An RMA contains an RMA number and authorizes the customer to return a specificquantity of a product that has been approved by the vendor. The customer and the vendor can display theRMAs on the Web user interface (Web UI) in SAP ICH. If the customer sends the returns to the vendor,the customer creates a returns ASN for the RMAs in the Web UI, and sends the returns ASN to thevendor. The supplier can also create returns ASNs in the Web UI for RMAs, for example if a customerdoes not have Web access and notifies the returns via telephone or fax. The supplier then creates ASNsfor the customer in the Web UI. In returns ASN processing, serial numbers and the packing function areavailable for the customer and the supplier. Returns processing in SAP ICH is integrated in the dealerportal.


SAP delivers standard XLST mappings for message integration in the business scenario Service PartsExecution. In the business scenarios of service parts management, the vendor uses SAP ERP CentralComponent 6.0, in which Service Parts Management is activated, as the back-end system. The suppliertransfers a return delivery instruction to SAP ICH with the XML messageReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification. The XML message DespatchedDeliveryNotification is used forASNs.

Note that a standard ERP system from SAP (such as SAP ERP Central Component 6.0 without activatedservice part management) does not support returns processing.

3.10.10.4 Serial Numbers (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can manually assign serial numbers to the products of an ASN item in the Web

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 255

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

user interface (Web UI) of ASN processing. You can use a serial number to differentiate an individualpiece from the other pieces of an item. On the packing screen, you can pack the products taking the serialnumbers into account.

Serial numbers are also integrated at item level and at HU level in the following XML messages:

- DespatchedDeliveryNotification

- DeliveryInformation

- ReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification

You can thus integrate serial numbers with the back-end system in advanced shipping notification (ASN)processes. For example, the supplier can transfer serial numbers from his or her back-end system to SAPICH in the returns instruction (ReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification) for the RMAs in returnsprocessing. (RMA stands for Returns Material Authorization. An RMA is an approval that allows acustomer to return products to the supplier, and is identified by an RMA number.) In returns ASNprocessing, the customer can pack the products to be returned taking account of the serial numbers.

Note that returns processing and the XML messages DeliveryInformation andReturnDeliveryInstructionNotification are only relevant for the business scenarios of service partsmanagement (back-end system SAP Enterprise Core Component 6.0 with activated service partsmanagement). For more information, see the release information for release processing.


Use




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 256

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.11 SCM-ICH-IMO Inventory Monitor

3.10.11.1 SMI Monitor (Enhanced)

Use

Renaming of the Inventory Monitor as the SMI Monitor

In SAP SCM 5.0, the Inventory Monitor was renamed as the SMI Monitor. This renaming was necessaryto distinguish this monitor, which supports the business scenario Supplier Managed Inventory (SMI),from a new related monitor for the business scenario Supply Network Inventory (SNI). (The SNI monitoralso monitors the demand/stock situation). All views in the SMI monitor were renamed accordingly (forexample, Inventory Details as SMI Details.) You now call the report for generating inventory alerts for theSMI scenario from the SAP Easy Access screen for Supply Chain Management under InventoryCollaboration -> Supplier Collaboration -> Alerts -> Generate Inventory Alerts for SMI (previouslyGenerate Inventory Alerts).

Multisourcing

Multisourcing means that a customer procures a product for his or her customer location from multipleship-from locations. In SAP SCM 4.1, the ship-from locations had to belong to the same supplier. As ofSAP SCM 5.0, ship-from locations can also belong to different suppliers. For this multisourcing variant,the SMI monitor must consider demands, stock, and receipts at the supplier-customer location-productlevel or at the ship-from location-customer location -product level. In SAP SCM 5.0, the SMI monitorwas enhanced as follows:

- The SMI monitor processes demands, stock, and receipts at the supplier-customer location-productlevel.

- In the case of multisourcing, the report RSMIPROACT determines inventory assigned to a supplierin the SAP back-end system. The report distributes demands with quota arrangement to thesuppliers.

- The customer can maintain the SMI location product settings depending on the supplier (such asminimum stock level, maximum stock level, and days supply) in the Web UI of SAP ICH.

Renaming of Ship-To Location as Customer Location

In SAP SCM 4.1, there was only a ship-to location in the Web UI of supplier collaboration. This is thelocation to which the supplier delivers the product. In SAP SCM 5.0, the customer location wasintroduced to support scenarios in which the location that orders the product and the location that receivesthe product differ. The customer location is the location that orders the product. In SMI scenarios, thecustomer location and the ship-to location are identical. However, to be consistent with other SAP ICHapplications, the Ship-to Location in the SMI monitor was renamed as the Customer Location .

Scenario Control

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 257

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SCM 5.0, you can use scenario control to define the products that the SMI monitor displays, and thelocation products for which SAP ICH generates alerts in the SMI scenario. If you want to restrict productsand alerts using scenario control, you use the following IMG activities:

- Define Scenario Control Key

- BAdI: Selection

You can also use scenario control for other applications in addition to the SMI Monitor. For moreinformation, see the IMG under Define Scenario Control Key and in the SAP Inventory CollaborationHub (SAP ICH) component of the SAP Library under Scenario Control.

3.10.11.2 Generation of Inventory Alerts for SMI (Changed)

Use

In SAP SCM 4.1, the action for generating SMI inventory alerts in the Post Processing Framework wasactive by default (application /SCA/ICH, application profile /SCA/BOL_INVENTORY, action/SCA/BOL_INV_PROJSTOCK_CHECK). To improve the performance, the action is inactive by defaultas of SAP SCM 5.0.

3.10.11.3 Delivery Control Monitor (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the delivery control monitor (DCM) is available for supplier collaboration in theWeb user interface (Web UI) of the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH). A supplier can use theDCM to monitor the current stock on hand of the customer daily, and immediately initiate deliveries ifrequired. The DCM generates alerts for critical stock situations. These include alerts for falling below the

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 258

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

minimum stock level or for exceeding the maximum stock level. A special alert is generated if the stockfalls to or below the signal stock level that lies between the minimum and the maximum stock levels. Ifthis occurs, the supplier should immediately initiate a delivery to refill the stock. In the DCM, the suppliercan call ASN processing and create ASNs to inform the customer about the pending deliveries. Werecommend that you use the DCM in the following scenario:

- For a product that the supplier delivers several times a day, the customer only wants to keep a verylow stock on hand that lies between the minimum and the maximum stock levels agreed on with thesupplier. The supplier is responsible for ensuring that the stock on hand does not fall below theminimum stock level nor exceed the maximum stock level.

- The supplier must react to the current status of the customer stock on hand at very short notice. Thesupplier should initiate deliveries as soon as the stock has fallen to or below the signal stock level atthe very latest (several times a day if required) so as to refill the stock and to prevent the stock levelfrom falling below the minimum.

Difference Between DCM and SMI Monitor

The main difference between the DCM and the SMI monitor is that in the DCM, the current stock onhand in the customer location is the important control parameter in the replenishment process. In the SMImonitor, however, the projected stock is the significant key figure and gives an overview of future stockdevelopment. Demands, stocks, and receipts go into the projected stock. You can use both monitors atthe same time in an SMI scenario: You use the SMI monitor for inventory planning and the DCM forstock monitoring. You can use scenario control to define which products are displayed in the DCM andwhich in the SMI monitor.


So that the DCM gives an up-to-date view of the stock situation, the customer must transfer stock dataregularly and timely to SAP ICH with the XML message ProductActivityNotification<Object1>. If thecustomer uses an SAP back-end system, he or she can use the IDoc PROACT.PROACT01 for the datatransfer. The customer sends the IDoc to SAP NetWeaver 2004s usage type Process Integration, whichmaps the IDoc to a ProductActivityNotification, and forwards it to SAP ICH. SAP delivers XSLTmapping to map the IDoc to the ProductActivityNotification. The customer can use the reportRSMIPROACT to generate the IDoc.


Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 259

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




3.10.12 SCM-ICH-KNB Kanban

3.10.12.1 Kanban (New)

Use

As of SAP ICH 5.0, you, as customer, can use the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH) insupplier collaboration for kanban-controlled external procurement. If you want to procure a specificquantity of a product from your supplier with whom you have arranged kanban processing, send a kanbanrequest from your back-end system to SAP ICH by XML message. (This kanban request corresponds tothe kanban card of an empty kanban container.)

On the Web user interface of SAP ICH, you and your supplier can monitor the kanbans. The kanban WebUI provides an overview of all kanban control cycles and kanbans, and provides information about thekanban status and quantities. In particular, the supplier sees the empty kanbans and can deliveraccordingly.

If the supplier wants to inform you that he or she has sent you the requested kanban quantity, he or shepublishes an ASN for SAP ICH for kanban and send the ASN to your back-end system. On the basis ofthe ASN, SAP ICH automatically updates the kanban status (Empty -> In Transit), as it does if you wantto send a goods receipt message from your back-end system to SAP ICH (In Transit -> Full).

Forecast Delivery Schedules

If you, the customer, want to inform a supplier of required quantities in advance, you can send a forecastdelivery schedule to SAP ICH from your back-end system. However, the supplier cannot create ASNs inkanban processing or release processing for these forecast delivery schedules. Forecast delivery schedulespurely play an informative role for the supplier.

Alerts

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 260

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Special kanban alerts are available in SAP ICH kanban processing. These inform you that a new kanbanrequest has arrived, or that the supplier has still not reacted to an empty kanban after a period of timedefined by the customer has elapsed.


The customer transfers a kanban request to SAP ICH with the XML messageReplenishmentOrderNotification. If the customer uses an SAP back-end system, he or she can generatekanban requests using the back-end system kanban function. We deliver a standard XSLT mapping for theintegration of SAP ICH with the following SAP back-end systems:

- Back-end system as of SAP R/3 4.6C without DIMPUse the IDoc ORDERS.ORDERS03 for a kanban request.

- Back-end system SAP ERP 2005 with DIMPUse the IDoc PAB_ORDERS.SEQJIT03 for a kanban request.

In both cases, use the IDoc DELINS.DELFOR01 for forecast delivery schedules. SAP NetWeaver 2004susage type Process Integration maps a kanban request to a ReplenishmentOrderNotification and a forecastdelivery schedule to a DeliveryScheduleNotification. Mappings are also available for ASNs and goodsreceipt messages.


Use




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 261

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.13 SCM-ICH-SNI Supply Network Inventory

3.10.13.1 SNI Monitor (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the SNI monitor, which supports the business scenario Supply Network Inventory(SNI), is available for supplier collaboration in the Web user interface (Web UI) for the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH). Using the SNI Monitor, both customers and suppliers can monitor thestock situation of selected products in the customer and supplier location, within a subcontractingscenario. Customers and suppliers have a joint view of the most important components of the end productthat the supplier produces in the customer order, and they can see a quick overview of critical stocksituations that could endanger the availability of the end product. Here the SNI Monitor is not limited toone supply relationship between a customer and a supplier; rather, it also supports more complex supplynetworks with more than one customer and supplier.

The SNI Monitor provides a period-oriented, time-series-based view of the demands, receipts, and stockof the components, which the customer and the supplier transfer from their back-end systems to SAP ICHfor the products that they manage. Alternatively, the supplier can enter the demand and receipt data for hisor her components manually. This is of particular relevance for suppliers that do not use a back-endsystem or EDI.

SAP ICH calculates the projected stock from the demand, receipt, and stock data. The projected stockprovides information about the demand/stock balance of a location period in each period. SAP ICHcompares the projected stock and the actual stock on hand with the minimum and maximum stock levelsof the location product agreed upon between the customer and the supplier. If these stock thresholds areviolated, SAP ICH generates alerts.

A simulation function is also available for the customer. The customer can use this function to determinehow changed receipts affect the projected stock of the components that he or she produces or procures forthe supplier.


So that the SNI monitor gives a current view of the stock situation, customers and suppliers mustregularly transfer data about the components that they manage with the XML messageProductActivityNotification.

If the customer uses an SAP ERP system as the back-end system, he or she can use the IDocPROACT.PROACT01 to transfer data. The customer sends the IDoc to SAP NetWeaver 2004s usage typeProcess Integration, which maps the IDoc to a ProductActivityNotification, and forwards it to SAP ICH.SAP delivers XSLT mapping to map the IDoc to the ProductActivityNotification. Mapping is notavailable for the integration of a supplier back-end system. In order to generate the IDoc, the customer canuse the following reports:

- ROEMPROACT for the transferal of data about products that the customer manages in the customerlocation.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 262

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- RCMPROACT for the transferal of data about products that the customer manages in the supplierlocation.


Use




3.10.14 SCM-ICH-SCO Supplier Confirmations


Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 263

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

- Customer

- Supplier

- Customer location


- Product






Use


______________________________________________________________SAP AG 264

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, extended confirmation management (ECM) is available in the SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH). ECM updates the status of scheduling agreement confirmations andpurchase order confirmations in SAP ICH if the base demands (releases or purchase orders) change or ifthe supplier sends ASNs for these demands. ECM thereby helps the supplier to create confirmations inSAP ICH that are as up-to-date as possible and that reflect a changed demand situation and the deliveryprogress.








______________________________________________________________SAP AG 265

SAP-System______________________________________________________________




3.10.14.4 Scheduling Agreement Confirmations (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the supplier can create scheduling agreement confirmations for schedule lines of thecurrent release in release processing of the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH). The supplieruses scheduling agreement confirmations to inform the customer about when he or she can deliver whichquantities. The customer sees publishes scheduling agreement confirmations in SAP ICH in the releasedetails and as receipt- in the receipts/requirements list. The customer can plan in more detail on the basisof scheduling agreement confirmations. In the time interval between the release date and the delivery datenotified by an advanced shipping notification (ASN), the customer receives additional information aboutexpected deliveries.

The supplier uses the new Confirmations tab page in the release details to create scheduling agreementconfirmations. The supplier can create one or more scheduling agreement confirmations for a scheduleline. The supplier uses several scheduling agreement confirmations if he or she does not want to deliverthe quantity requested by the customer in the release schedule line all on one date, but rather divided overseveral dates. The supplier can create a note for a confirmation. He or she can also create a schedulingagreement confirmation that acts purely as a note. The confirmed quantity of such a note-onlyconfirmation is zero. The supplier can use a note-only confirmation to inform the customer about why heor she currently cannot deliver, for example.

In SAP ICH, a scheduling agreement confirmation is a stand-alone business object that refers to a specificrelease schedule line. It is not a part of the release itself. A scheduling agreement confirmation is differentto a purchase order confirmation since a purchase order confirmation is a part of the purchase order and

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 266

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

belongs to a purchase order item in purchase order collaboration.

Send Scheduling Agreement Confirmations to SAP APO (Service Parts Management)

In the service parts management scenario, the customer generates scheduling agreement releases incollaborative management of scheduling agreement releases (CMDS) in SAP Advanced Planning andOptimization (SAP APO) and sends the releases to SAP ICH. The supplier can send schedulingagreement releases that he or she creates in SAP ICH to CMDS in SAP APO (possible as of SAP APO5.0). SAP ICH uses the DeliveryScheduleConfirmation XML message to send the scheduling agreementconfirmations. SAP ICH sends the XML message to SAP NetWeaver 2004s usage type ProcessIntegration. SAP NetWeaver maps the XML message to the IDoc DELCONF.DELFOR01 and sends theIDoc to SAP APO. A corresponding XSLT mapping is available.

Extended Confirmation Management

As of SAP SCM 5.0, extended confirmation management (ECM) is available in SAP ICH. ECM updatesthe status of scheduling agreement confirmations and purchase order confirmations in SAP ICH if thebase demands (releases or purchase orders) change or if the supplier sends ASNs for these demands. ECMthereby helps the supplier to create confirmations in SAP ICH that are as up-to-date as possible and thatreflect a changed demand situation and the delivery progress. A customer can also use confirmationrequests in ECM to force a supplier to create confirmations. For more information, see the releaseinformation for extended confirmation management.


Use




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 267

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.15 SCM-ICH-FCS Forecast


Use



UI Features





- Display Key Figure and Total at AFS Hierarchy Product LevelThis feature helps you to view one key figure for a product at a time. If all the subproducts of theAFS hierarchy products are selected, the key figure total is also displayed at AFS product level.Otherwise, the total is not calculated for the AFS header product to ensure consistency on the userinterface (UI).

Functions


- Direct Shipment for Baseline DemandThis function determines the appropriate ship-from location for a location product in accordancewith the business rules maintained in the system. It applies to both the promotional and baselinedemand. You can use dynamic determination of the ship-from location to have these productsshipped directly from the plant to the customer location. If a ship-from location cannot be

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 268

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

determined, the default ship-from location is used.



New Alerts








______________________________________________________________SAP AG 269

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


3.10.15.2 Key Figure Selection (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can use the BAdI (Business Add-In) Key Figure Selection(/SCF/KEYFIG_SELECT) to select the key figures to be displayed in the short-term forecasting,promotion planning, and replenishment screens of SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH).

3.10.16 SCM-ICH-NDC Net Requirements Calculation


Use



UI Features




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 270

SAP-System______________________________________________________________



Functions





New Alerts




- Storage Capacity Alert This alert is raised by the storage capacity report for the ship-to location(/SAPAPO/VMIDRP_STORAGE_CAP). This alert indicates that the total projected inventory foran AFS header product exceeds the storage capacity of the customer location for a short-term time

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 271

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

bucket. This alert has the alert type 1130 and can be viewed in the SAP ICH alert monitor screen.






Use


3.10.16.3 Consideration of Minimum Safety Stock (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, the responsive replenishment algorithm considers the minimum safety stock as thelower limit for the safety stock, regardless of whether the safety stock value has been calculateddynamically or is provided as a static master data attribute.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 272

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The minimum safety stock is maintained in the location product master data. If, for example, safety stockis calculated in any period below the minimum safety stock that has been maintained, the safety stockcalculated for this period is replaced by the minimum safety stock.

3.10.17 SCM-ICH-PRO Promotion Planning


Use



UI Features






Functions

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 273

SAP-System______________________________________________________________





New Alerts






______________________________________________________________SAP AG 274

SAP-System______________________________________________________________





Use


3.10.17.3 Cannibalization Effect of Promotions (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can include the effects of "cannibalization" in ICH Promotion Planning.Cannibalization refers to the phenomenon whereby the promotion of one product may affect the sales ordemand for other products.

You model the cannibalization effect between products using a cannibalization group that you assign to apromotion. You assign products with an associated factor (cannibalization percentage) to thecannibalization group. When you create a promotion, if a product within the cannibalization group isbeing promoted, the baseline forecast values of other products in the cannibalization group are affectedaccording to their baseline quantities and cannibalization factors.

You can assign multiple cannibalization groups in the form of a cannibalization profile at the eventtype/ship-to location/product level to accommodate different product categories that you may promote in

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 275

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

one promotion. You can also manually correct cannibalization factors at the promotion level, and you canmanually add cannibalization products and their factors to a promotion even if originally there was nocannibalization group assigned to the promotion. The system calculates the cannibalized baseline forecastfor cannibalized products with the same location as the promoted product. Cannibalization effects areonly considered for the same customer.

Other features of cannibalization include:

- The ability to turn the cannibalization effect for a promotion on or off

- The daily baseline forecast is adjusted according to the cannibalization effects

- The cannibalized baseline forecast is displayed in the short-term forecasting screen

- The system issues an alert if a negative cannibalized baseline causes the final baseline quantity tofall below zero

3.10.17.4 Comparison of Promotions (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0, you can compare two promotions in the promotion planning screen. When you viewa single promotion, you can see the various key figures such as promotion history, promotion forecast,promotion stockouts, and released promotion demand for the relevant products. When you compare twopromotions, all these key figures are displayed for both promotions to be compared.

3.10.17.5 Complex Shipping Units (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, Responsive Replenishment incorporates the impact of complex shipping units (CSU) onthe forecast and replenishment of individual product demand.

CSU refers to the shipping of display pallets containing several finished products or sets. These CSUs arecomprised of finished products that can also be sold individually and therefore have an impact on demandfor the individually sold finished products.

If a selected product is a CSU or is within the CSU of another product (dependent product), theShort-term Forecasting screen displays two new views to show the CSU forecast demand and the totaldemand.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 276

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.17.6 Interchangeability in RR (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, interchangeability in ICH Responsive Replenishment (RR) is available. Withinterchangeability, when a new product replaces an old product, you can avoid waste and use up theinventory of the old product to satisfy the demand of the new product. Substitution orders are created torepresent the transfer of inventory from the old product to the new product.

Two new key figures -- substitution receipt and substitution demand -- are available on the ReplenishmentOverview screen. These key figures are used to represent the transfer of inventory from the old product tothe new product. When the old product's inventory is depleted, substitution demand is created for the oldproduct and substitution receipt is created for the new product.

The interchangeability relationship between the old and new product is set up in Interchangeability masterdata.

3.10.17.7 Activity Status "Introduction" (Enhanced)

Use

As of SCM 5.0 the introduction activity status is available at the location/product level,. Introductionbehaves exactly like the new status except that it permits forecasting without the PROACT XMLmessage check. The introduction status allows you to forecast new products using, for example, LIKEmodeling before you send product sales data to the system.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 277

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.17.8 Post Promotion Dip (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, a product's baseline sales can be cannibalized after you run a promotion for the sameproduct. This effect is modeled using the post promotion dip.

You model time periods for the post promotion dip using a "dip" pattern that you define in the promotionprofile or in the pattern maintenance screen. The default start date of the post promotion dip is one dayafter the promotion sales end. You can change the default start date using the offset profile. Dips areapplied first to baseline, and then the result is processed with projected sales. Post promotion dips arecalculated or updated when you:

- Create the promotion

- Manually force a new promotion calculation

- Use a batch job to perform mass calculations

- Remove the product from the promotion

- Add a product to a promotion

Post promotion dips are displayed in the Short Term Forecast screen as a distinct key figure. The systemtakes the post promotion dip into account when it calculates released demand .

3.10.17.9 Percentage Promotion (New)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, you can manage promotion demands as percentages of the baseline forecast. Instead ofgenerating promotion demands as absolute values for each promotion time period, the system assignspercentage values to the promotion at the ship-to location/product/time level. Promotion demands (totalquantities) are calculated as follows:

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 278

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

Promotion_Demand = Percentage_Value * Released Baseline_Forecast_Value

You enter percentage values at the promotion item (ship-to/location) level. You can also input onepercentage at the overall promotion level that overrides the percentages at the item level.

3.10.17.10 Usability in PP (Enhanced)

Use

As of SCM 5.0, the following enhancements are available in promotion planning:

- You can enter both the UPC/EAN and the quantity when you manually create a promotion.

- You can add or delete products from existing promotions

- The system accepts negative total values and converts them into cannibalization effects

- A new screen, outside the Promotion Parameter screen, is available to maintain the offset profile

- A new screen is available to maintain event type

- New screen links are available to maintain cannibalization group and cannibalization profile

- A deletion function is available for forecasting and promotion settings

3.10.17.11 Usability in RR (Enhanced)

Use

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 279

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

As of SCM 5.0, the following enhancements are available in Responsive Replenishment (RR):

- You can set promotion parameters for "mix turn with promotion" on the user interface for theinteractive Transport Load Builder (TLB) run

- You can consider future promotion orders in RR : the system checks future promotion orders andorders the difference between the demand and the future receipts.

- Performance is improved for small rounding values in Transport Load Builder (TLB)

- There is a new TLB order creation indicator for Baseline/Prom. Sep. called "Mixing Allowed, butOnly to Fill Up Means of Transport"

- In the header for Transportation Lane there is a new order generation rule that allows you to overriderounding rules and order the exact amount for a promotion

3.10.18 SCM-ICH-DIO Inbound/Outbound Data Processing


Use



UI Features



- Product Sort OrderThis feature sorts the AFS hierarchy subproducts based on the sort order maintained for the AFSmaterial in the AFS system, instead of the standard alphanumeric sort order of the location products

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 280

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

displayed.



Functions





New Alerts




- Storage Capacity Alert This alert is raised by the storage capacity report for the ship-to location(/SAPAPO/VMIDRP_STORAGE_CAP). This alert indicates that the total projected inventory for

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 281

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

an AFS header product exceeds the storage capacity of the customer location for a short-term timebucket. This alert has the alert type 1130 and can be viewed in the SAP ICH alert monitor screen.





3.10.18.2 Addresses (Enhanced)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 , you can transfer location and business partner addresses in all XML messages thatcorrespond to a business object in SAP ICH, for example in DeliveryScheduleNotifications (businessobject ASN) or in ReplenishmentOrderNotifications (business object purchase order). However, theXML message ProductActivityNotification, which transfers time series and stock data, still contains noaddresses.

To display the goods recipient address, the new tab page Goods Recipient exists on the web userinterface of SAP ICH . Depending on the scenario, this contains one of the following business partneraddresses:

- The business partner address of the goods recipient

- The business partner address of the business partner to which the ship-to location is assigned Notethat a backend system in the A2A scenarios of supplier collaboration cannot transfer the orderingaddress to SAP ICH. (In supplier collaboration, the ordering address is the business partner addressof the customer).

Under Define Address Source and Configure Address Sending Mode in the Customizing of ProcessingInbound and Outbound Messages, you can define which addresses SAP ICH uses, depending on theprocess type, sender and receiver. You do this as follows:

- Addresses in Inbound Messages

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 282

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

You can define which addresses SAP ICH uses for a document based on an inbound XML message.SAP ICH can use the following addresses:

- The addresses from the XML messageThis is the default setting. If the XML message does not contain an address, SAP ICH uses theaddress from the ICH master data.

- The addresses from the master data of SAP ICHYou can improve performance if you use the master data addresses. This is recommendable ifthe transferred addresses do not deviate from the master data addresses.

- The addresses of the goods recipient from the XML message and the other addresses from themaster data of SAP ICH

- Addresses in Outbound MessagesYou can define whether and which addresses SAP ICH sends to the backend system with the XMLmessage. SAP ICH can use the following addresses:

- The addresses from the master data

- The addresses from the document that is to be sent with the XML documentIn the standard system, SAP ICH sends the addresses from the document. If an address does notexist in the document, SAP ICH uses the address from the master data.

3.10.18.3 Logical Business Partner Role in ICH (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP Supply Chain Management (SAP SCM) 4.1, SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH)differentiated between A2A and B2B scenarios in inbound message processing. If the location of abusiness partner was included in an XML message in an A2A scenario, the inbound XML message didnot have to contain the business partner. The business partner was, however, mandatory in a B2Bscenario. In SAP SCM 5.0, SAP ICH no longer differentiates between A2A and B2B scenarios. SAP ICHinterprets the IDs for business partners, locations, and products included in the inbound XML message onthe basis of the logical business partner role, which can be Customer or Supplier.

We have predefined business partner roles for all process types (for example SAP ICH has the logicalbusiness partner role Customer in supplier collaboration, and the logical business partner role Supplierin responsive replenishment).

So that SAP ICH can successfully process an inbound XML message, the XML message can only usepartner-specific IDs for business partners, locations, and products in a way that SAP ICH can clearlydetermine the object.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 283

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.18.4 Process Type Definition (Enhanced)

Use

Until now, it was possible, under Define Sender- and Recipient-Dependent Process Types in theCustomizing of Processing Inbound and Outbound Messages, to define the process type for aninbound XML message independently of the business partners that exchange the XML message. You arenow also able to define the process type independently of the system that sends the XML message.

3.10.18.5 Time Stamp Format of Outbound Messages (Enhanced)

Use

Until now, the time stamp format for time specifications in outbound XML messages was local time +offset of UTC time to local time (display: CCYY MM DDThh:mm:ss(.sss)(+/-)hh:mm). Now, you can,if necessary, also select the UTC time as the time stamp format (display: CCYY MMDDThh:mm:ss(.sss)Z ). You set the time stamp format in the Customizing of Processing Inbound andOutbound Messages under Define Time Stamp Format of Outbound Messages. The time stamp formatthat you must use depends on the backend system used and on the mapping in SAP NetWeaver 2004susage type Process Integration.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 284

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.18.6 Validation Framework (Enhanced)

Use

In SAP ACM 5.0, there are new standard validation checks and configuration possibilities in theValidation Framework.

New Validation Checks

For ASNs, scheduling agreement releases, and purchase orders there are new standard validation checksavailable that support the new processes in the SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH).

Enhanced Configuration Possibilities

Enhanced configuration possibilities are available in Customizing for Validation:

- You can use the new BAdI Validation in Validation Framework (/SCMB/BOL_VALFRMWRK) tomodify the validation. You can use this to modify the standard validation checks that we deliver orto program your own validation checks, for example.

- Under the new IMG node Own Settings you can use the new IMG Activity Maintain ValidationChecks to provide your own validation checks to the Validation Framework without modifications,and to use your own validation checks as well as the standard validation checks in the validationprofiles. Here you can also maintain the settings for the standard validation checks.

- Under the new IMG node Own Settings you can also find the following new IMG activities that youcan use to make customer-specific settings without modifying the system (as previously in SAPSCM 4.1).

- Define Validation ProfilesHere you create validation profiles and define the combination of process-customer-supplier forwhich each validation profile is valid.

- Maintain Settings in Validation ProfilesHere you define which validation checks a validation profile contains. You also define for eachvalidation check how the system reacts to an exception.

- The following IMG activities, which were already available in SAP SCM 4.1, are now under thenew IMG node SAP Standard Settings and were renamed as follows:

- Old title: Define Validation ProfilesNew title: Display Standard Validation Profiles

- Old title: Define Validation Checks and Responses to Check ResultsNew title: Display Settings for Standard Validation Profiles

Up to now you used these IMG activities to process validation profiles and their settings. However, achange made in these IMG activities meant a modification to the system. In SAP SCM 5.0 werecommend that you only use these IMG activities to display the SAP standard settings.

Short Description for Validation Checks

Until now there was only a technical name for a validation check. As of SAP SCM 5.0, there is also ashort description.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 285

SAP-System______________________________________________________________


Use













- Business partner Customer at item level

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 286

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

The customer at item level is available for purchase orders and scheduling agreement releases. Thebusiness partner is called BuyerParty in the XML message.



- ASN processing














______________________________________________________________SAP AG 287

SAP-System______________________________________________________________








3.10.19 SCM-ICH-AMO Alert Monitor


Use



UI Features



- Product Sort Order

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 288

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

This feature sorts the AFS hierarchy subproducts based on the sort order maintained for the AFSmaterial in the AFS system, instead of the standard alphanumeric sort order of the location productsdisplayed.



Functions





New Alerts




- Storage Capacity Alert

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 289

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

This alert is raised by the storage capacity report for the ship-to location(/SAPAPO/VMIDRP_STORAGE_CAP). This alert indicates that the total projected inventory foran AFS header product exceeds the storage capacity of the customer location for a short-term timebucket. This alert has the alert type 1130 and can be viewed in the SAP ICH alert monitor screen.






Use




______________________________________________________________SAP AG 290

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

3.10.20 SCM-ICH-ERP ERP-ICH Integration (ERP Only)

3.10.20.1 Kanban Master Data Transfer to SAP ICH (new)

Use

From SAP SCM 5.0 you can use the report KANBAN_MD_TRANSMIT to transfer master data that youneed for Kanban in SAP ICH from your ERP system to SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH). Asa prerequisite to using Kanban in SAP ICH, you must create the master data for Kanban in SAP ICH. Youcan also create and add master data manually in SAP ICH.

See also

For more information, see SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management -> SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH) -> Cooperation with Vendors -> Kanban -> Master Data and Settings forKanban -> Kanban Master Data Transfer to SAP ICH.

3.10.20.2 Data Transfer for Contract Manufacturing (New)

Use

As of SAP SCM 5.0 and as of SAP ECC 6.0, you can use the reports ROEMPROACT and RCMPROACTin SAP ECC to read data from the stock, material requirements, and receipts, and write this data to IDocPROACT01. You can use these reports in a Contract Manufacturing scenario to send the IDoc to an SAPNetWeaver system, which converts the IDocs to XML messages of type ProductActivityNotification andsends the messages to SAP Inventory Collaboration Hub (SAP ICH).

The two reports are used as follows:

- Data Transfer for Contract Manufacturing (Customer) (ROEMPROACT)You use the ROEMPROACT report as an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) to transmitinformation about stock and material receipts and requirements from your ERP system to yoursuppliers, who can view the data in SAP ICH. The required materials are stored in the OEM'splant.

- Data Transfer for Contract Manufacturing (Supplier) (RCMPROACT)Again, you use the RCMPROACT report as an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) totransmit information about stock and material receipts and requirements from your ERP systemto your suppliers, who can view the data in SAP ICH. In this case, however, the materials are

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 291

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

stored with your contract manufacturer (supplier), as in a subcontracting scenario.

See also

For more information, see SAP Library under Supply Chain Management -> Inventory CollaborationHub -> Supplier Collaboration -> SNI Monitor -> Data Transfer for Contract Manufacturing.

3.10.20.3 Transfer of Requirements and Stock to SAP ICH (extended)

Use

In SAP SCM 4.0 and 4.1 you use the report RSMIPROACT to read requirement or stock data, that theERP system sends to SAP ICH using IDoc and XML technology, in an ERP system. From SAP SCM 5.0and SAP R/3 4.6C you can use also use this report with the following additional functions:

Vendor-Dependent Supplier Managed Inventory

The ERP system essentially determines requirement and sources of supply in the same way as for SupplierManaged Inventory, but for vendor-dependent Supplier Managed Inventory several vendors per materialare permitted. The daily requirement is distributed according to the quotas between those vendors forwhom a quota exists.

Inclusion of Material Subject to a Batch Management Requirement (Only for Vendor-DependentSupplier Managed Inventory)

The ERP system automatically checks during each material selection whether a material is subject to abatch management requirement, and determines the appropriate vendors on the basis of the batches.

Inclusion of WM-Managed Consignment Stock

When determining data, the ERP system also considers whether a material belongs to MM-managed ownstock, WM-managed own stock or WM-managed consignment stock and uses corresponding stock data.Make sure that for WM-managed consignment stock the storage type is not analyzed individually.

See also

For more information see the SAP Library under SAP Supply Chain Management -> SAP InventoryCollaboration Hub (SAP ICH) -> Cooperation with Vendors -> Delivery Control Monitor -> XMLMessages in the ASM Process -> Transfer of Requirements and Stock to SAP ICH.

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 292

SAP-System______________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________SAP AG 293

SAP-System______________________________________________________________